Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Series 0 / 00 / 0-Mate
Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-61393E/06
September 1998
GFL-001
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
B61393E/05
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
s1
Table of Contents
B61393E/06
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
3.2
3.3
POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
10
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.6
10
10
11
12
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7
12
17
21
21
25
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.8
25
27
28
29
30
CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
33
34
37
41
4.1
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
55
5.1
5.2
POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
CONNECTION OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT A, B1, C (INPUT UNIT SEPARATE TYPE) . .
57
5.2.1
5.2.2
57
59
5.3
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT BUILTIN TYPE POWER UNIT (POWER SUPPLY UNIT AI)
66
5.4
68
71
6.1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
6.2
73
6.2.1
6.2.2
c1
73
80
Table of Contents
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.3
B61393E/06
Descriptions on Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Connection with Power Magnetic Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Using the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83
102
112
6.3.1
6.3.2
112
123
124
6.3.2.2
127
6.3.2.3
DI/DO addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
6.3.2.4
128
6.3.2.5
129
7.2
133
134
138
141
141
144
146
7.2.1
7.3
133
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Signal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Display Unit Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Soft Key Cable of a Separate Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON/OFF Switch on the Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDI Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
147
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
Reader/Punch Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASR33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PPR Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Tape Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Tape Reader without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters Related to the Reader/Punch Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
148
150
151
152
153
154
155
164
7.4
166
7.5
169
172
8.2
174
8.3
175
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
9.2
182
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.3
182
183
184
186
9.3.1
9.3.2
LowResolution A/B Phase Pulse Coder (2000P to 3000P) (Builtin Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . .
LowSpeed, HighResolution A/B Phase Pulse Coder (10000P to 25000P, 12 m/min)
(Builtin Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2
186
187
B61393E/06
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.4
9.5
193
195
198
203
203
204
205
206
206
207
208
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.7
188
190
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.6
208
209
210
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
10.2
213
10.3
INSTALLATION POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
10.4
215
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
221
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.3
221
221
OUTLINE DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
11.3.1
11.3.2
222
223
11.4
224
11.5
226
11.6
229
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
12.2
ORDER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
232
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.4
232
233
234
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.5
234
234
CONNECTION DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
12.5.1
12.5.2
c3
235
236
Table of Contents
12.5.3
12.5.4
12.5.5
12.5.6
12.6
B61393E/06
237
238
239
240
242
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
13.2
RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
13.3
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF VARIOUS UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
A.1
UNITS OF CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
A.2
CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
305
TABLE OF CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
B.2
336
B.3
346
B.4
351
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
361
D.2.1
D.2.2
D.2.3
D.2.4
361
362
362
362
D.3
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
D.4
367
D.4.1
D.4.2
D.4.3
D.4.4
368
368
SELFDIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
D.4.5
D.5
D.5.1
D.5.2
D.5.3
D.6
D.7
367
368
368
369
369
370
371
372
c4
B61393E/06
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
D.8
D.7.1
MOUNTING OF READER/PUNCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
D.9
387
Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Connection Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State of the LEDs on the Machine Operators Panel Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Operators Panel Interface Unit Dimension Diagram (Including Connector Locations) . . . .
Machine Operators Panel Interface Unit Mounting Dimension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Card 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
399
400
401
404
414
415
415
416
417
418
420
421
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
F.2
433
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
434
F.3
F.3.1
F.3.2
F.4
434
435
EXTERNAL DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
447
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
449
G.2
450
G.3
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
453
G.4
464
G.5
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
465
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
467
H.2
468
H.2.1
H.2.2
H.2.3
H.2.4
H.2.5
H.2.6
H.2.7
H.3
468
474
476
479
495
514
518
522
H.3.1
H.3.2
H.3.3
c5
522
522
528
Table of Contents
B61393E/06
531
531
531
532
533
534
535
536
539
540
542
542
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
545
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
546
J.2.1
J.2.2
J.2.3
J.2.4
J.2.5
J.3
546
547
548
550
551
OUTER VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
552
J.3.1
552
K.2
554
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Connecting Two Control Unit with One CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Connecting One Series 0C with Two CRT/MDI Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
554
554
560
567
K.2.1
K.2.2
K.2.3
K.2.4
K.2.5
K.2.6
K.2.7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.2.2.1 Installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
567
567
567
567
568
570
570
572
574
574
575
576
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
578
L.2
ARRANGEMENT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
579
L.3
579
L.4
CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
580
L.5
581
L.6
583
c6
B61393E/06
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
586
M.2
BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
587
M.3
CONNECTION EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
588
M.3.1
M.3.2
M.3.3
M.3.4
M.4
M.5
588
590
592
593
EXTERNAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
594
PRECAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
595
M.5.1
M.5.2
M.5.3
Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Power Supply Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
595
595
596
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
598
N.2
CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
598
N.3
COLORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
599
c7
1. PREFACE
B61393E/06
Abbreviations
0TC
0TF
0TTC
0MC
0MF
0GCC
0GSC
0TD
0MD
Series 0
Series 0D
FANUC Series 0GCD
0GCD
0GSD
0TDII
0MDII
Series 0DII
0GCDII
0GSDII
00TC
00MC
00GCC
0Mate TC
0Mate MC
0Mate MF
Series 00
Series 0Mate
1. PREFACE
B61393E/06
Related manuals
The table below lists manuals related to the FANUC Series 0/00/0Mate.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
D Series 0/00/0Mate C
Table 1 Manuals related to the Series 0/00/0Mate C
Manual name
Specification
number
B61392E
B61392EN1
B61393E
B61393E2
B61394E
B61404E
B61395E
B6139
B61400E
B61410E
B61434E
B55193E
B61393E1
D Series 0D
Table 1 Manuals related to the Series 0D
Manual name
Specification
number
B62542EN
B61393E
B62543EN1
B62973EN
B61394E
B61404E
B62974EN
B61395E
B62975EN
B61400E
B61410E
1. PREFACE
B61393E/06
D Series 0DII
Table 1 Manuals related to the Series 0DII
Manual name
Specification
number
B61393E
B61393E2
B61394E
B61404E
B61395E
B61400E
B61410E
2. CONFIGURATION
B61393E/06
CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
B61393E/06
CRT/MDI
unit (7.1.7.2)
Heat
exchanger
(3.6)
Operators
panel interface
(APPENDIX F)
I/O device
Power
magnetic
circuit
I/O unit
(Note1)
Sensor /
actuator
(6)
(5)
Servo
amplifier
(9)
Multitap
transformer for
the control unit
Spindle
amplifier
(8)
(Note 2)
Servo
motor
(Note 3)
Spindle
motor
Power
supply
(11, 12)
Host computer
Distribution
board
NOTE
1 Refer to the FANUC I/O Unit Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B-61813E).
2 Refer to the FANUC AC Servo Motor Series Descriptions (B-65002E) or FANUC SERVO
AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTION (B65162E).
3 Refer to the FANUC AC Spindle Motor Series (Serial interface) Descriptions (B-65042E).
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.1
EXTERNAL
ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS OF
CABINET
The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
this manual cabinet refers to the following:
D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
D Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operators panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.4 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Room temperature
temperat re
Change in
temperature
INSTALLATION
CONDITION OF CNC
AND SERVO UNIT
3.3
POWER CAPACITY
In storage or transportation
20_ to 60_
1.1C/minute max.
Relative humidity
h midity
3.2
0_ to 45_
In operation
Normal
75% or less
95% or less
Vibration
In operation:
Environment
Room temperature
temperat re
0.5G or less
In operation
In storage or transportation
0C to +55C
20C to +60C
Relative humidity
Vibration
0.5 G or less
Environment
The unit shall not be exposed direct to cutting oil, lubricant or cutting chips.
The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section means
the specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding the
power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo
section.
The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity of
the control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operators panel interface.
Power capacity of
the control section
0.4 kVA
Power capacity of
the servo section
3. INSTALLATION
3.4
DESIGN AND
INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS OF THE
MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET
B61393E/05
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
D The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
D The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.
Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generally must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, cover the screen with a magnetic shield.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.
Top
Bottom
3. INSTALLATION
3.5
THERMAL DESIGN OF
THE CABINET
3.5.1
Temperature Rise
within the Cabinet
3.5.2
Cooling by Heat
Exchanger
B61393E/05
The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10C
or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.5.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit
Name
C t l
Control
unit
Display
Heat
loss
Remarks
Basic unit
80W
Graphic
14W
PMCM
14W
Increased I/OB, F
17W
SUB CPU
14W
16W
15W
Analog interface
9W
Remote buffer
14W
9 monochrome CRT/MDI
14W
9 color CRT/MDI
40W
9 monochrome EL/MDI
20W
9 monochrome PDP/MDI
20W
10W
15W
14 color CRT/MDI
70W
8W
24W
Operators
anel
panel
Heat
loss
PMCM
12W
MMC interface
11W
14 color CRT/MDI
11
Remarks
3. INSTALLATION
3.6
INSTALLING THE
HEAT EXCHANGER
B61393E/05
Table 3.6 lists the heat exchangers. Cooling fins A, B and C are not
provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor is required for any of these
cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
Table 3.6 List of Heat Exchangers
Ordering
specification
Name
Size
Cooling fin A
A02B0053K303
9.1W/C
196901000mm
Cooling fin B
A02B0053K304
10.1W/C
44490650mm
Cooling fin C
A02B0053K305
25.2W/C
56090970mm
A02B0094C901
9.0W/C
226132415mm
A02B0087K220
6.5W/C
45085506mm
3.6.1
Cooling
capacity
A02B0087K225
14060290mm
12
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Cooling fin
Inside air
flow
Outside
air flow
D Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.
13
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
External dimensions
183
196
Fan mounting
plate
220
1000
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its
height is 20mm)
Cooling fins
Mounting metal
for cooling fins
Fan motor
24.
75 150
168
C15
Door
40
188
24.75
4M4
mounting screw
for fan mounting
plate
180
45
70
10260
685
4M4
mounting
screw for
cooling fins
570
70
100
90
Mounting plate
for fan motor
164
45
70
260
770
570
Fig. 3.6.1(c) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin (A02B0053K303)
NOTE
1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting metal for cooling fins are not attached
to the cooling fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 50W power.
3 Weight : 6.5kg
14
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
External dimensions
300
72
432
66 dia
Mounting hole
Mounting plate
for fan motor
10
24
Hole
358
300
370
350
4M4
(Mounting hole for
fan motor)
External shape
of cooling fins
30
300
Door
Hole
25
135 60
400
66 dia. hole or
M5 stud bolt
Cooling fins
Fan motor
25
124
10
24
116
124
Mounting
hole for
fan motor
4M4
10
14
116
650
435
300
60
90
25
72
444
432
Stud hole
(Make a hole 5 dia. for
fan motor)
5 dia
Fig. 3.6.1(d) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B0053K304)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the
machine tool builder.
2 Use four fan motors with about 20W power.
3 Weight : 7.5kg
15
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
335
315
695
6
External shape of
cooling fins
430
Mounting
plate for
fan motor
40
25
60
775
315
287
10
514
86 dia.
mounting hole
Door
5 dia
66 dia. hole or M5
stud bolt
548
Fan motor
548
440
(This hole
combines
mounting hole
and stud hole.)
Cooling fins
287
Terminal block
for fan motor
G04
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its
height is 20mm)
155
335
37
6
5M4
(Mounting hole for
fan motor)
37
35
10
233
213
520
170
6M4
Mounting
hole for fan
motor
210
266 266
60
970
60
115
90
10
560
23
External dimensions
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them
at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 40W power.
3 Weight : 13.5kg
16
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.6.2
Weight 0.65
Outer dimensio of
external cooling fan
AIR
FLOW
Power
input
termina
M4 screw
AC 200V
Air
hole
Outerdimension of
finger guard
Fig. 3.6.2(a) Outer dimension of fin and external cooling fan for 14 CRT/MDI for Series 00
(Specification number A02B0087K220 2 sets of cooling fin and external cooling fan are provided.)
NOTE
2 sets of external cooling fan and finger guard are provided.
17
3. INSTALLATION
6 3.6
8 3.6
Air inlet
Air outlet
6mounting
hole
Air outlet
hole
Outside
Inside
Main body
of cooling
unit
B61393E/05
Fig. 3.6.2(b) Mounting methods of cooling unit for CRT/MDI for Series 00
NOTE
(1) Use M5 screws to mount the cooling unit.
(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install the panel where it can be
exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet on cooling unit mounting panel.
18
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Inside
Outside
Side view
CRT/MDI
370
Heat exchanger
Min
35
370
Min
35
Top view
19
20
5 to 10 mm
Fan unit
Air flow
Power input
terminal
M4 screw
AC200V
Air flow
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Fig. 3.6.2(d) Outer dimension of fan unit (for inner circulation) of 14 CRT/MDI for Series 00
(Specification number A02B0087K225)
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.6.3
The Heat Pipe Type Heat
Exchanger
3.6.3.1
Installation
The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heatefficient unit. Because the fan is builtin, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the panel cut operation.
Specifications
Installation format
Fan
sspecifications
ecifications
Voltage (V)
200VAC
Frequency (Hz)
50
60
0.28
0.24
28
26
Weight (kg)
Color
Order specifications
Remarks
D A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.
D The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
D When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L00010219#A
Filter specifications
A2500689X004
D If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.
21
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
17.5
External dimensions
190
AIR
FLOW
Earth
terminal
M4
External
fan unit
415
99 dia.
Power
source
terminal M4
17.5
190
Internal
fan unit
AIR
FLOW
216
22.4
85
22.4
226
1.6
85
199
22
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
187.5
190
2.5
180
HOLE
190
175
35 dia.
66 dia. or stud welder (M4)
214
23
3. INSTALLATION
Installation method
B61393E/05
Heat exchanger
main unit
Fan power cable
(detach the connector)
External fan unit
Installation panel
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
24
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.7
ACTION AGAINST
NOISE
3.7.1
Separating Signal
Lines
The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surfacemount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group
Signal line
Primary AC power line
Secondary AC power line
Action
Bind the cables in group A separately (Note 1) from groups B
and C,
C or cover grou
group A with an
electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
See Section 3.7.4 and connect
sspark
ark killers or diodes with the
solenoid and relay.
y
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC)
DC relay (24VDC)
Separate group
gro p C as far from
Group B as possible.
Be sure to
B
t perform
f
shield
hi ld processing in Section 3.7.5.
375
25
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
Cabinet
Spindle
amp.
Servo
amp.
Control
unit
Cable of group B, C
Duct
Section
Cable of group A
Group A
Group B, C
Cover
26
To operators
panel,
motor, etc.
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.7.2
The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground
Power
magnetics
unit
Servo
amplifier
CNC
control
unit
Power
magnetics
cabinet
Distribution board
D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one
place in the CNC control unit.
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough crosssectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the crosssectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
27
3. INSTALLATION
3.7.3
Connecting the Signal
Ground (SG) of the
Control Unit
B61393E/05
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
control unit.
M4 screw for
grounding
Frame ground
Ground strap on
the cabinet
System ground
NOTE
This figure shows the grounding of control unit A. The
position of the protective grounding of control unit B is
different. When connecting control unit B to the ground
strap, see the outline drawing of control unit B.
28
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.7.4
Noise Suppressor
The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
2) Capacitance (C) :
I2
10
I2
(mF)
20
Condenser
Spark killer
Motor
Spark killer
NOTE
Use a CRtype noise eliminator. Varistortype noise
eliminators clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot
suppress a sharp rising edge.
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
voltage up to two times the applied
DC relay
voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.
29
3. INSTALLATION
The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the method
shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40mm 80mm
3.7.5
B61393E/05
30
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Control unit
Metal fittings
for clamp
Machine side
installation
board
Ground plate
Shield cover
Ground terminal
(grounded)
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
31
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Ground
plate
8mm
12mm
20mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
32
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.8
CONTROL UNIT
3.8.1
Configuration of the
Control Unit
NOTE
Connection position of this figure are depended on each printed board.
33
3. INSTALLATION
3.8.2
Battery for Memory
Backup
B61393E/05
Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
memory in the control unit.
The program stored in the memory of the control unit is kept after power
is cut off. Alcalic electric cells (single 3 cells) are used for this
function. The unit accommodating the dry cells is the battery unit. The
cells must be periodically exchanged to new cells once a year at the users.
When exchanging the cells, the power must be always on. (If the cells are
removed when the power is off, the parameters and programs stored in the
memory goes out.)
The NC is delivered to the machine tool builder with the battery unit set
temporarily, so that it should be reset in the cabinet designed at the
machine tools builder. Take notes on the following, and reset the battery
unit at the cabinet surface. If the machine is delivered to the users with
the battery unit still temporarily set, the battery will not be able to be
exchanged at the users, resulting in a fatal maintenance problem.
1) The battery must be able to changed easily with the power on, at the
users side.
2) The battery unit must be away from coolant and chips.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message BAT
blinks on the CRT display and the battery alarm signal is output to the
PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as
possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (SRAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery.
The power to the control unit must be turned on when the battery is
replaced. If the battery is disconnected when the power is turned off, the
contents of memory are lost.
34
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Each control unit is factoryequipped with a battery so that the unit can
retain the factoryset parameters. Never disconnect the battery while the
unit is turned off, therefore. Mount the battery case containing the battery
on the cabinet, by means of the following procedure:
(1) Turn on the control unit.
(2) Leaving the control unit turned on, perform steps 1 to 5:
1 Remove the battery connector from the memory PC board. If a sub
CPU PC board is mounted, remove the battery connector from the
sub CPU PC board. If a remote buffer PC board is mounted,
remove the battery connector from the remote buffer PC board
(which may be mounted in the same slot as that used for a sub CPU
PC board).
2 Remove the battery case and cable from the yellow carton.
(Discard the carton.)
3 Remove the lid from the battery case, being careful to keep it
horizontal so that the screws do not full out.
35
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Connection
terminals are
at the rear
36
Lid
Mount hole 4
Case
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
3.8.3
Cable Leadin Diagram
37
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
38
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
Fig. 3.8.3 (c) Cable leadin diagram (TypeB axis card, power supply unit AI for CE marking is mounting)
39
3. INSTALLATION
B61393E/05
CP1
35
Connector layout of
power supply unit for CE
marking
80
F1
115
330
CP2 CP3
CP5 CP6
F4
65
F3
35
CP4
Unit: mm
40
B61393E/06
41
4.1
B61393E/06
PRECAUTIONS
The diagram shows the connection of all PC boards that can be fitted into
the slots. In the actual unit, the PC boards to be mounted are determined
by the model and optional functions. Note that all the PC boards shown
in the diagram are not always mounted.
Symbols of connectors for the following figures
Symbol
Manufacturer
Specification
BK3.F
Japan FCI
BWG3.F
Japan FCI
BWG6.F
Japan FCI
BN3.F
Japan FCI
BN6.F
Japan FCI
BK6.F
Japan FCI
AHX3.F
ALY6.F
ALX3.F
ALY3.F
H20.M
H20.F
H50.M
H50.F
D25.F
OPT
Optical connector
42
B61393E/06
Power supply
unit AI
CP1
MasterPC board
CP2
CP2
CP3
CP14
CP15
BK3.F
BK3.F
Singlephase 200VAC
input
Servo magnetic
contactor
BK3.F
BWG6.F
200VAC output
(fan or display unit using 200VAC)
ON/OFF switch
BN3.F
24VDC output
(I/OB2, I/OB3)
BN6.F
Power supply
unit A, B1, C
24VDC output
(display unit using 24 VDC)
Input unit
TP1
Singlephase 200VAC
input
CAP
BK6.F BK6.F
BK3.F
CP2
CP4
BN3.F
BN6.F
24VDC output
(display unit using 24 VDC)
CP15
CE Marking
Power
supply CP1
unit AI
CP3
CP2
CP4
CP6
CP5
PAS
200VAC output
(fan or display unit using 200VAC)
24VDC output
(I/OB2, I/OB3)
CP14
CAP
ON/OFF switch
TP2
CP1
AHX3.F
AHX3.F
Singlephase 200VAC
input
Servo magnetic
contactor
AHX3.F
ALY6.F
200VAC output
(Spare)
ON/OFF switch
ALX3.F
24VDC output
(Spare)
ALY3.F
24VDC output
(display unit using 24 VDC)
Customengineered macro
cassette
(Continued)
43
B61393E/06
(Continued)
I/O C5C7
I/O
H50.M
M1
H50.F
C5
M1A
M1B
M2A
M2B
H50.M
M2
H50.F
H50.M
H50.F
H50.M
H50.M
H50.F
M18
C6
H20.F
H20.M
H50.F
H50.M
M19
M20
I/O E1E3
H50.F
I/O
M201
H50.F
H50.M
MB2A MB2B
E1 M202
H50.F
H50.M
H50.M
H50.M
H50.F
M218
E2
E3
H20.F
H20.M
H50.F
H50.M
M219
C7
M220
Memory card
MEM
H20.F
H20.F
CCX5
* When no graphics
card is used
H20.M
(Continued)
44
B61393E/06
(Continued)
Memory card
Relay connector
H20.M
D25.F
H20.M
H20.F
M5
M74
H20.F
Tape reader
M12
Spindle control
circuit
(analog control)
H20.F
M26
Spindle motor
Spindle
H20.F
Position
coder
M27
OPT
COP5
OPT
Spindle motor
Spindle
Position
coder
OPT
CN11A Spindle control
circuit (Digital control)
CN11B
Second unit
Spindle motor
Spindle
Position
coder
BWG3.F
CPA7
45
B61393E/06
(Continued)
1st to 4th axis
control
AXE
M34
H20.F
(Command)
H20.F
M35
(Velocity/position feedback)
AC
servo motor
H20.F
H20.F
M35
(Command)
(Position feedback)
Linear scale,
separate pulse coder
H20.F
M36
AC
servo motor
(Velocity feedback)
H20.M
M37
H20.F
M38
H20.F
M39
H20.M
M44
H20.F
M45
H20.F
M46
H20.M
M47
H20.F
M48
H20.F
M49
BWG3.F
CPA9
(Continued)
46
B61393E/06
(Continued)
1st to 4th axis
control
AXE
M184
H20.F
(Command)
H20.F
M185
(Velocity/position feedback)
AC
servo motor
H20.F
(Command)
H20.F
M185
AC
servo motor
(Velocity feedback)
H20.F
M186
(Position feedback)
Linear scale,
separate pulse coder
H20.M
M187
H20.F
M188
H20.F
M189
H20.M
M194
H20.F
M195
H20.F
M196
H20.M
M197
H20.F
M198
H20.F
M199
BWG3.F
CPA9
(Continued)
47
B61393E/06
(Continued)
1st to 4th axis
control
AXE
JS1A
HF20.F
(Command)
AC
servo motor
H20.F
(Command)
HF20.F
(Velocity feedback)
AC
servo motor
H20.F
M186
(Position feedback)
Linear scale,
separate pulse coder
HF20.F
JS2A
M189
HF20.F
JS3A
M196
HF20.F
JS4A
M199
BWG3.F
CPA9
(Continued)
48
B61393E/06
(Continued)
Expansion I/OB2, F1
PMC
H20.M
H20.F
M24
M60
24VDC
input
(from power supply unit)
CP51
The connector
names for F1
are parenthesized.
M61
(M261)
M62
(M262)
M78
(M278)
M79
(M279)
M80
(M280)
H50.F
H50.M
H50.F
H50.M
H50.F
H50.M
H20.F
H20.M
H50.F
H50.M
PMCM
I/O module
OPT
OPT
COP4
M25
MMC1 unit
(14CRT/MDI)
CRT/MDI
adapter
H20.F
H20.F
CD13
BK6.F
CA7
(PC board supporting
I/OLink)
PMC
24VDC
input
(from power supply unit)
JD1A1
(MASTER)
HF20.F
HF20.F
HF20.F
HF20.F
JD1B
I/O Unit
(SLAVE)
HF20.F
JD1A
JD1B2
(SLAVE)
HF20.F
HF20.F
JD1A
HF20.F
JD1A2
(SLAVE)
Battery unit
HF20.F
JD1B
(Continued)
49
FD Mate
(MASTER)
H50.F
H50.M
H50.F
H50.M
H50.F
H50.M
H20.F
H20.M
H50.F
H50.M
PMCM
CA3
H20.M
CD13
B61393E/06
(Continued)
(or circuit for controlling two manual pulse generators)
Graphic
H20.F
GR
CCX4
H20.F
H20.F
M21
JB1
M73
(Channel 3)
JB2
M77
(Channel 3)
CD3
(M73)
H20.F
1
3
JA2
FD Mate
(Primary unit)
Tap
JB1
JB2
2
3
Terminating
resistor
50
CD3
B61393E/06
(Continued)
5th/6th axis
control
AXS
M64
H20.F
M65
H20.F
M66
H20.M
M67
H20.F
M68
H20.F
M69
BWG3.F
CPA10
Spindle control
circuit
(analog control)
H20.F
M28
Spindle motor
Spindle
H20.F
Position
coder
M29
OPT
COP6
OPT
Spindle motor
Spindle
Position
coder
OPT
Spindle motor
Spindle
Position
coder
(Continued)
51
B61393E/06
(Continued)
5th/6th axis
control
AXS
M204
H20.F
M205
H20.F
M206
H20.M
M207
H20.F
M208
H20.F
M209
BWG3.F
CPA10
Spindle control
circuit
(Analog control)
H20.F
M28
Spindle motor
Spindle
H20.F
Position
coder
M29
OPT
COP6
OPT
Spindle motor
Spindle
Position
coder
OPT
Spindle motor
Spindle
Position
coder
(Continued)
52
B61393E/06
(Continued)
Optional configuration of control unit B only
Remote buffer
DNC2 for
control unit B
H20.F
M73
SP
(Channel 3)
M77
(Channel 3)
FD Mate
(Primary unit)
Tap
H20.F
1
CD3
3
Terminating
resistor
SUB CPU
H20.F
SUB
M73
(Channel 3)
BWG3.F
CPA8
(Continued)
53
(Channel 3)
B61393E/06
(Continued)
7th/8th axis
control
AXA
M134
H20.F
M135
H20.F
M136
H20.M
M137
H20.F
M138
H20.F
M139
BWG3.F
CPA11
7th/8th axis
control
AXA
M224
H20.F
M225
H20.F
M226
H20.M
M227
H20.F
M228
H20.F
M229
BWG3.F
CPA11
Analog
interface
H20.M
H20.F
H20.M
H20.F
M121
L/A
M122
H20.M
M123
CPA6
Analog input
CPB1
H20.F
M124
Position coder
54
B61393E/06
55
B61393E/06
5.1
Select the type of power source with reference to the list below. When the
apparatus to be used does not apply to examples 1 to 5, total up the points
on the right and select the type of power from that figure.
POWER SOURCE
Printed circuit board
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 5
Points
Master (16Bit)
Master (32Bit)
Graphic card
PMCM card
3.1
1.3
2.4
2.8
1.0
2.3
2.1
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.5
0.1 number of
generators
10
0.35 number of
generators
9.55
8.55
13.55
15.00
19.00
Power
source B2
Power
source B2
Power
source C
Total points
Type of power source
Total points
Type of power source
Power
Power
source A or source A or
Power
Power
source AI
source AI
Total below 10
Power source A or
Power source AI
Total below 15
Power source B2
Over 15
Power source C
NOTE
The mark in the table above signifies that a printed circuit board should be assembled on
that apparatus. Memory cards, I/O cards, 14 axis cards can be disregarded.
56
B61393E/06
5.2
CONNECTION OF THE
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
A, B1, C (INPUT UNIT
SEPARATE TYPE)
5.2.1
Connection of the
Power Unit without
Using Input Unit
CNC
PA
PB
CNC
CP11-1
CP11-2
CP11-3
To Ground
Contact capacity
250 VAC, 3A or
30 VDC, 5A
CP11-5
PA
CP11-6
PB
57
B61393E/06
SK
Magnetic contactor
tm (Timer contact)
MCC
OFF button
MCC
SK
PA
PB
(MCC contact)
Magnetic contactor
Fuse
Control
unit
AC200V
Use OFF delay timer as shown above so that Magnetic Contactor (MCC)
for control unit cannot be turned OFF unit the PA/PB holding circuit
operates.
58
B61393E/06
5.2.2
(1) The figure below shows the connection when the input unit is used.
Connection of Power
Supply Unit when the
Input Unit is Used
Control unit
Input unit
Connector
CP11
CP2
PA
PB
PA
PB
TP1 M4 screw
terminal
R
R
S
S
Ground
G
TP2 M screw terminal
EON
EOF
COM
EON
EOF
COM
59
Fuse
ON/OFF button
B61393E/06
Fuse
U, V , W
3 servo input
ON/OFFcontrolled
200/200 VAC, 1
ON button
OFF button
Fuse alarm
signal
EON
EOF
COM
FA
FB
TP2
0.3A
To servo amplifier or
servo transformer
TP1
10A
R
S
EMG OUT1
EMG OUT2
EXR
EXS
Not
used
Fuse
200/220 VAC
input, 1
Ground
Magnetic contactor
CP11
CP2
(6P, Black)
CP3
(3P, Black)
CP4
(3P, Black)
CP5
(3P, Black)
Control
unit
Series 0
CN2
CP6
(3P, White)
14 color CRT/
MDI unit
CP41
or
Separate tape
reader
CP31
ON/OFFcontrolled
200/200 VAC, 1
I/O module
Alarm signal
M3 screw terminal
PA
PB
60
B61393E/06
(ii) CP3, CP4, CP5, CN2, CP41: JAPAN FCI 3pin connector,
black
1
ALA
ALB
(c) ON/OFF control of the input power to the servo amplifier or servo
transformer
As shown in the connection diagram, ON/OFFcontrolled 200 or
220 VAC singlephase power can be drawn from the EXR/EXS pin
of terminal block TP1. If a magnetic contactor provided by a
machine tool builder is connected to this pin, the servo system can
be turned on or off in synchronization with the NC. The current
should not exceed 0.3 A.
(d) Connection between units
(i) Connection between the input unit and power supply unit
Power supply unit
Input unit
CP2-1
CP11-1
CP2-2
CP11-2 AC200/220V,
1
CP2-3
CP11-3
CP2-5
PA
CP11-5
CP2-6
PB
CP11-6
61
Power
ready
signal
B61393E/06
CP5-2
CP5-3
I/O module
CP31-1
AC200/220V,
CP31-2 1
CP31-3
CP31-5
PA
Not used
CP31-6
PB
Terminal block T1
CP6-1
ALA
CP6-2
ALB
14 color CRT or
tape reader
Input unit
EON
POWER
ON
EOF
POWER
OFF
COM
B61393E/06
T off on
Between EON
and COM
Between EOF
and COM
T on
T off
(Power on)
(Power off)
T on 500msec
T off 500msec
T off on 5sec
Contact ratings
Up to 50 VDC
Up to 0.5 A
Up to 50 VAC
Up to 5 A
63
B61393E/06
Input unit
AC power
supply 1
AC power
supply 2
EON EOF COM
Power supply
unit
Output voltage
monitor circuit
DC
output
Alarm signal
OFF switch
ON switch
(Reference)
A power supply unit incorporating an input unit is
also available. This is a combined unit that incorporates those sections enclosed in broken lines in
the above figure.
1. The power supply unit is provided with the output voltage monitor
circuit. When the output voltage is found to be improper, an alarm
signal is sent to the input unit.
2. In the input unit, this alarm signal is held and the AC power supply 2
which supplies power to the power unit is cut off. (This is the routine
to ensure safety since normal operation cannot be assured in abnormal
output voltage.)
Reset the alarm by pressing the OFF switch or cutting off the AC
power supply 1 which supplies power to the input unit and then press
the ON switch to turn on the power again from the status above.
3. When the temporary power interruption occurs at the AC power
supply 1 and as a result the voltage drops, the voltage hold time of
input unit is set to a value which is longer than that of power unit to
perform detection by the output voltage monitor circuit and to hold an
alarm in the input unit. The same operation is also performed in the
input unit builtin type power supply unit.
4. There is no problem if the power ON/OFF is performed by the
ON/OFF switch. But, when the AC power supply is turned on/off
while the EONCON and EOFCOM remain shortcircuited, the
status where the power is cut off is the same as that where power
interruption occurs (because the power is cut off without pressing the
OFF switch) and an alarm is held in the input unit.
This alarm is canceled after passing the voltage hold time of input unit
so that an alarm is held when the AC power supply 1 is turned on again
before the pass of voltage hold time of input unit.
Thus, it is required that the time interval of poweron/off should be set
to a value which is longer than the voltage hold time of input unit for
proper poweron/off in the above use.
5. It is recommended that the power should be turned on/off using the
ON/OFF switch.
It is required to follow this since there are restrictions as described in
4 in other methods.
The conditions in terms of time for poweron/off are described below:
64
B61393E/06
T off on
EON-COM
EOF-COM
T on y 500msec
T on
T off y 500msec
T off
T off on y 5sec
Power supply
AC power supply
T off w 2.5sec
(Equal to or more than
the voltage hold time of
input unit)
T off on
Power supply
65
B61393E/06
5.3
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT BUILTIN
TYPE POWER UNIT
(POWER SUPPLY
UNIT AI)
CP2 (SMS3RK-3TK2)
1
200R
200S
G
JAPAN FCI 3pin (black)
(A02B-0072-K892)
CP2 (SMS3RK-3TK2)
1
200R
200S
CP3 (SMS6RW-4D28)
1
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
JAPAN FCI 3pin (black)
(A02B-0072-K892)
CP1 (SMS3RK-3TK2)
1
G
JAPAN FCI 3pin (brown)
(A02B-0072-K893)
CP14
1
+24E
0V
CP15
1
0V
0V
5
+24V
+24V
66
B61393E/06
1) Interface
CP3 : SMS6RW-4D28
1
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
2) Connection example
Power supply unit
240V AC 1A
FB
RY
FA
AL
EAL
COM
POFF
PON
OFF
ON
PON :
Poweron switch.
POFF:
Poweroff switch.
EAL :
RY
NOTE
1 Neither EAL nor RY is used in general system.
2 The contact capacity of PON, POFF, and EAL is as shown
below:
50V DC 0.1A
67
B61393E/06
5.4
CONNECTION OF THE
INPUT UNIT BUILTIN
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
AI (QUALIFYING FOR
CE MARKING)
D Signal assignment
2 200B
2 200B
1 200A
1 200A
Key assignment
A3 COM
B2 FA
A2 OFF
B1 AL
A1 ON
1 +24V
0V
1 +24E
F3(+24V fuse, 5 A)
F4 (+24E fuse, 5 A)
68
B61393E/06
D Connection diagram
Japan AMP
11781283 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
200 to 240 VAC
1, 50 Hz/60Hz
Japan AMP
21781296 (Housing)
11752182 (Contact)
ON
OFF
COM
B3
FB
A3
COM
B2
FA
A2
OFF
B1
AL
A1
ON
200B
200A
200B
200A
Alarm input
Japan AMP
11781283 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
AL
FA
FB
200 VAC to 14
color CRT
Japan AMP
11781283 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
Regulator
Alarm output
Servo amplifier
MCC
*The total rating of CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.
CP5(+24V output)
3
2
0V
+24V
CP6(+24E output)
Japan AMP
21782883 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
24 VDC output to 9 monochrome
CRT, 9 PDP unit, 7.2 monochrome LCD, 8.4 color LCD, etc.
*The maximum rating is 2 A.
Japan AMP
11782883 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
3
2
0V
+24E
69
B61393E/06
70
B61393E/06
71
6.1
OVERVIEW
B61393E/06
The Series 0 is provided with an I/O card as the standard machine interface
I/O. The internal I/O card is available in six types, which provide different
types of output signals and different numbers of I/O signals.
When the required I/O signals outnumber the I/O signals provided by the
internal I/O card, an external I/O unit is connected as a supplement. To
add I/O signals, an expansion I/O card or other unit is connected via a
serial communication interface. This connection requires the use of a
PMCM card.
One serial communication interface is the FANUC I/O Link. The
FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface enabling fast I/O signal (bit data)
transfer between the CNC, cell controller, I/O UnitA, Power Mate, and
other units. When two or more units are connected to the FANUC I/O
Link, one unit functions as a master unit while the other units function as
slaves. The input signal statuses of the slave units are transferred to the
master unit at regular intervals. The output signal from the master unit
is transferred to the slave units. Multiple units can be connected to the
FANUC I/O Link. This manual describes those units that can be used with
the Series 0. For details of the other units, see the corresponding manual.
72
B61393E/06
6.2
CONNECTION OF THE
INTERNAL I/O CARD
The internal I/O card is available in six types, which have different output
signals and different numbers of I/O signals.
Number of output
signals
40
40
M1, M2
80
56
I/O C7
104
72
I/O E1
40
40
M201, M202
80
56
104
72
Output signal
I/O C5
I/O C6
I/O E2
Sink output
DO common output
I/O E3
NOTE
When using the third or fourth controlled axis, an Mseries system requires an I/OC7 or
I/OE3 card. In the case of a Tseries system, an I/OC5 or I/OE1 card can also be used if
the address of the thirdaxis/fourthaxis reference position return deceleration signal *DEC3
or *DEC4 is changed by specifying the corresponding parameter.
6.2.1
Machine Interface
Signal Standard
D Input signal standard
B61393E/06
Machine tool
CNC
+24V
Direct current input signal
Receiver output
signal
Filter and level
converter circuit
Switch
Resistor
Contact open:
Logic 0
Contact closed:
Logic 1
Receiver circuit
Signal
Signal
Logic 1
ON (High)
OFF (Low)
Logic 0
Chattering of 5
ms or less is ignored
522ms
74
B61393E/06
Machine tool
CNC
+24V
Direct current input signal
Receiver output
signal
Filter and level
converter circuit
Resistor
Receiver circuit
Contact open:
Logic 0
Contact closed:
Logic 1
Logic 1
ON
Logic 0
OFF
2ms max
2ms max
75
B61393E/06
Control unit
Sink input
+24E
+24E
Contact
Input signal DI
Open: Logic 0
Close: Logic 1
Resistor
COMn
0V
Control unit
Source input
+24E
+24E
COMn
Contact
Input signal DI
Resistor
Filter and level
converter circuit
0V
Open: Logic 1
Close: Logic 0
WARNING
The COMn signal must always be connected to 0 V or 24 V. Do not leave it open.
D Output signal standard
A direct current output signal is used to drive a light emitting diode (LED)
indicator or a relay of a machine. For the direct current output signal, a
noninsulation interface (direct current output signal A) and a DO
common output interface (direct current output signal B) are supported.
The noninsulation interface uses an NPN transistor as a driver, while the
DO common output interface uses a semiconductor contact.
(1) Direct current output signal A
(a) Rating of the output transistor
(i) Maximum load current when the output is on
Up to 200 mA, including an instantaneous value
76
B61393E/06
Output
signal
Sink driver
Output
signal
Sink driver
0V
+24V
Protection resistor
Lamp
Resistor
Output
signal
LED
Relay
This sample circuit uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
(c) When connecting inductive loads like relays in the machine tool
side, a spark killer must be inserted. The spark killer must also be
inserted as near as possible (within 20 cm) to the load. When
connecting capacitance load in the machine tool side, a resistance
for current limit must be inserted in series, and it must be used
within the rated current and voltage, including instantaneous
current and voltage.
(d) When lighting a lamp directly with a solid state relay output, a rush
current may flow to damage the driver. A protection circuit as Fig.
6.2.1 (n) must be inserted and it must be used within the rated
voltage and current, including instantaneous current and voltage.
77
B61393E/06
COMn
+24V
ISO
LATER
Output
signal
0V
Protection resistor
Driver
Lamp
ISO
LATER
Output
signal
Resistor
Driver
ISO
LATER
Output
signal
Relay
Driver
This sample circuit uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of the regulated
power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated power supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the LED and surge
suppression diode must be inverted.
78
B61393E/06
NOTE
1 When connecting inductive loads like relays in the machine tool side, a spark killer must be
inserted. The spark killer must also be inserted as near as possible (within 20 cm) to the load.
When connecting capacitance load in the machine tool side, a resistance for current limit must
be inserted in series, and it must be used within the rated current and voltage, including
instantaneous current and voltage.
2 When lighting a lamp directly with a solid state relay output, a rush current may flow to damage
the driver. A protection circuit as below must be inserted and it must be used within the rated
voltage and current, including instantaneous current and voltage.
79
B61393E/06
6.2.2
System without PMC
D Signal assignment of the
internal I/O card
The figure below shows the signal assignment of the internal I/O card.
The CNC for machining center (M series) systems and that for lathe (T
series) systems use different signals.
NOTE
Series 0PD is in need of PMC. See Subsec. 6.2.5 for
machine interface I/O of Series 0PD.
(1) Mseries signals
(a) Signals input from the machine to the CNC (system without PMC)
PMC
DGN
ADDRESS
NO.
X000
000
X002
X004
BIT NUMBER
#7
#5
#4
M1836 M1821
M185
M1835
M1824
M188
X008
X010
X012
X014
X016
X017
X018
X019
X020
X021
X022
#3
#2
#1
#0
M1833
M1838 M1823
M187
M186
M1841
M1826 M1810
M1840 M1825
M189
M1839
M1845 M1814
M1844 M1813
M1827
002
004
M1837 M1822
4NG
M1811
X006
#6
M Series
006
008
SKIP
*RILK
ZAE
M1849 M1818
M1848 M1817
M2011
M2041
M2026 M2010
M2045 M2014
YAE
XAE
M1815
M2044 M2013
M2027
M2049 M2018
M2048 M2017
M2015
HX/ROV1
*DECX
+X
SBK
BDT
M16
M138
M120
M121
M111
M112
HY/ROV2
*DECY
+Y
MLK
*ILK
M17
M139
M122
M123
M19
M110
HZ/DRN
*DECZ
+Z
M18
M140
M124
M125
H4
*DEC4
+4
M2040
M2025
M209
M2039
010
012
014
016
017
018
019
020
021
0022
ZRN
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
FIN
ST
MP2
MP1/MINP
M113
M137
M15
M114
M115
M116
M117
M118
ERS
RT
*SP
*ESP
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
M141
M126
M127
M119
M133
M134
M135
M136
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
M142
M143
M144
M145
M146
M147
M148
M149
80
B61393E/06
(b) Signals output from the CNC to the machine (system without
PMC)
PMC
DGN
ADDRESS
NO.
Y048
048
Y049
Y050
Y051
Y052
Y053
Y080
Y082
Y084
Y086
049
BIT NUMBER
#7
OP
#6
SA
#5
STL
#4
SPL
M25
M26
M27
M28
052
053
#2
ZPZ/EF
#1
ZPY
#0
ZPX
M227
M226
M225
MA
ENB
DEN
RST
AL
M29
M241
M222
M223
M224
050
051
#3
M Series
DST
TF
SF
MF
M210
M220
M219
M221
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
M233
M234
M235
M236
M237
M238
M239
M240
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14/GR30
S12/GR20
S11/GR10
M211
M212
M213
M214
M215
M216
M217
M218
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
M242
M243
M244
M245
M246
M247
M248
M249
M198
M197
M196
M195
M194
M193
M192
M191
M1916 M1915
M1914 M1913
M1912
M1911
M1910
M199
M2036 M2021
M205
M2033
M2024
M2038 M2023
M207
M206
080
082
084
ZP4
M2035
086
M208
M2037 M2022
DGN
ADDRESS
NO.
X000
000
X002
X004
X006
BIT NUMBER
#7
#6
#5
#4
M1836 M1821
M185
M1835
M1824
M188
M1811
#3
T Series
#2
X010
#0
M1833
M1838 M1823
M187
M186
M1841
M1826 M1810
M1840 M1825
M189
M1839
M1845 M1814
M1844 M1813
M1827
002
M1837 M1822
004
006
SKIP
X008
#1
008
ZAE
SKIP
SKIP4
M1849 M1818
M1848 M1817
M2011
M2026 M2010
010
M2041
81
SKIP3
SKIP2
ZAE
XAE
XAE
M1815
0GCC
X012
X014
X016
X017
X018
X019
X020
X021
X022
B61393E/06
012
M2045 M2014
M2044 M2013
M2027
M2049 M2018
M2048 M2017
M2015
HX/ROV1
*DECX
+X
SBK
BDT
M16
M138
M120
M121
M111
M112
HZ/ROV2
*DECZ
+Z
MLK
MPI/MINP
M17
M139
M122
M123
M19
M110
014
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
DRN
*+LZ
GR2
GR1
M18
M140
M124
M125
M209
M2039
*DEC3
*DEC4
M2040
M2025
ZRN
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
FIN
ST
STLK
MIX
M113
M137
M15
M114
M115
M116
M117
M118
ERS
RT
*SP
*ESP
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
M141
M126
M127
M119
M133
M134
M135
M136
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
M142
M143
M144
M145
M146
M147
M148
M149
(b) Signals output from the CNC to the machine (system without
PMC)
PMC
DGN
ADDRESS
NO.
Y048
048
Y049
Y050
Y051
Y052
Y053
Y080
Y082
049
BIT NUMBER
#7
OP
#6
SA
#5
STL
#4
SPL
M25
M26
M27
M28
052
053
Y086
#1
ZPZ
#0
ZPX
M227
M226
M225
ENB
DEN
RST
AL
M29
M241
M222
M223
M224
DST
TF
SF
MF
M210
M220
M219
M221
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
M233
M234
M235
M236
M237
M238
M239
M240
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
M211
M212
M213
M214
M215
M216
M217
M218
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
M242
M243
M244
M245
M246
M247
M248
M249
M198
M197
M196
M195
M194
M193
M192
M191
M1914 M1913
M1912
M1911
M1910
M199
M2033
M207
M206
080
082
M1916 M1915
Y084
#2
MA
050
051
#3
T Series
084
AP4
M2036 M2021
M205
M2035
M2024
M2038 M2023
086
M208
82
M2037 M2022
B61393E/06
6.2.3
Descriptions on
Signals
6.2.4
Control unit
M1(MR50RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0V
0V
0V
0V
SOR
HX
ROV1
HY
ROV2
HZ
DRN
MLK
*ILK
SBK
BDT
ZRN
SAR
FIN
ST
MP2
MP1
MINP
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
*ESP
+X
+Y
+Z
RZ
*SP
33
34
35
36
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
37
38
*SSTP
39
*DECX
40
*DECY
*DECZ
28
29
30
31
32
+24E
+24E
+24E
+24E
J1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
ERS
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
16
S14
GR30
17
S12
GR20
50
M2(MR50RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
0V
0V
0V
0V
OP
SA
STL
SPL
MA
DST
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SF
TF
MF
DEN
RST
AL
ZPX
ZPY
27
ZPZ
EF
28
29
30
31
18
S11
GR10
J2
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
ENB
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
50
M18(MR50RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
14
4NG
19
33
34
20
35
21
36
22
37
23
38
24
39
25
40
26
41
27
42
28
43
29
44
30
45
15
16
XAE
ZAE
31
46
17
18
J30
32
47
YAE
48
49
*RILK
SKIP
16
17
50
M20(MR50RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
4
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
33
34
35
26
27
28
29
*DEC4
ZP4
36
37
38
39
40
+4
H4
30
31
J32
32
CONG
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
SKIP
NOTE
Use unified shield cable for signal connection of J1 and J2.
Recommended cable specification A66L00010042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
83
B61393E/06
Control unit
M1(MR50RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0V
0V
0V
0V
SOR
HX
ROV1
HZ
ROV2
DRN
MLK
MP1
MINP
SBK
BDT
ZRN
SAR
FIN
ST
STLK
MIX
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
*ESP
+X
+Z
GR2
GR1
RT
*SP
28
29
30
31
32
+24E
+24E
+24E
+24E
J1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
*SSTP
*DECK
*DECZ
*+LZ
ERS
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
50
M2(MR50RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0V
0V
0V
0V
OP
SA
STL
SPL
MA
DST
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SF
TF
MF
DEN
RST
AL
ZPX
ZPZ
27
28
29
30
31
J2
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
ENB
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
50
M18(MR50RMD)
1
18
XAE
19
33
34
20
35
21
36
22
37
23
38
24
39
25
40
26
41
27
42
28
43
29
44
30
45
31
46
ZAE
J30
32
47
48
49
50
SKIP
NOTE
Use unified shield cable for signal connection of J1 and J2.
Recommended cable specification A66L00010042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
84
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Resistor
Automatic operation stop signal
Mode selection
signal
CAUTION
The mode selection signal uses a gray code. To ensure the correct operation of the NC at mode
switching, use a rotary switch with makebeforebreak contacts.
NOTE
(M) . . . . . . . . M series
(T) . . . . . . . . . T series
85
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Resistor
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6,
and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
86
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Resistor
Workpiece number
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6,
and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
87
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Resistor
Optional block skip signal
Miscellaneous function
completion signal
External reset signal
Gear number
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6,
and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
88
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Mode selection
switch
Resistor
Axis selection
switch
Diode ratings
Forward current:
10 mA or higher
Withstand reverse voltage:
30 V or higher
Saturation voltage: Up to
1 V (IF = 10 mA)
All the signals indicated above are Mseries signals. The circuit indicated above uses
sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2,
and E3, connector M201 is used.
89
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Interlock signal
Resistor
Interlock signal
Skip signal
All the signals indicated above are Mseries signals. *ILK and 4NG are sink direct current input signals
A, and XAE, YAE, ZAE, *RILK, and SKIP are sink direct current input signals B. The circuit indicated
above uses I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connectors M1 and M18 should be
replaced with M201 and M218, respectively.
90
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Mode selection
switch
Resistor
Diode ratings
Forward current:
10 mA or higher
Withstand reverse voltage:
30 V or higher
Saturation voltage:
Up to 1 V (IF = 10 mA)
All the signals indicated above are Tseries signals. The circuit indicated above uses
sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2,
and E3, connector M201 is used.
91
B61393E/06
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Interlock signal
Resistor
Mirror image signal
Skip signal
Skip signal
Skip signal
Skip signal
All the signals indicated above are Tseries signals. STLK and MIX are sink direct current input signals
A, and XAE, ZAE, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4, and SKIP are sink direct current input signals B. The circuit
indicated above uses I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connectors M1 and M18
should be replaced with M201 and M218, respectively.
92
B61393E/06
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Resistor
Automatic operation activation in progress
signal
Resistor
Automatic operation stop signal
Resistor
Xaxis reference position return completion
signal
Resistor
Y/Zaxis reference position return completion signal
Resistor
Alarm signal
Reset signal
Ready signal
The circuit indicated above uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
93
B61393E/06
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Relay
Relay
The circuit indicated above uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
94
B61393E/06
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Relay
Relay
The circuit indicated above uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
95
B61393E/06
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Relay
Relay
The circuit indicated above uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
96
B61393E/06
Resistor
Automatic operation activation in progress
signal
Driver
Resistor
Automatic operation stop signal
Driver
Resistor
Driver
Driver
Resistor
Driver
Relay
Driver
Driver
Driver
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO.
The voltage of the regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48
VDC. The polarity of the regulated power supply is inverted when the I/O
card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the LEDs and
surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
97
B61393E/06
Relay
Alarm signal
Driver
Relay
Reset signal
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Ready signal
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of
the regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated
power supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation
of the LEDs and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
98
B61393E/06
Pin number
Bit number
Neutral and static insulation sink driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of the
regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated power
supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the
LEDs and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
99
B61393E/06
Pin number
Bit number
Neutral and static insulation sink driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of the
regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated power
supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the
LEDs and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
100
B61393E/06
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
Relay
Driver
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of the
regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated power
supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the LEDs
and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
101
6.2.5
System Using the PMC
B61393E/06
Two PMCs are available for the Series 0: the PMCMODEL L and
PMCMODEL M.
When a PMC is used, a signal input from the machine is input to the PMC,
which outputs a signal to the CNC according to the input signal and
sequence program. A signal output from the CNC is sent through the
PMC to the machine.
The pins of the internal I/O card can be more flexibly assigned to I/O
signals than those of a system without a PMC. Some input signals are,
however, monitored directly by the CNC without passing through the
PMC.
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Resistor
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards
C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
102
B61393E/06
D Connector table of
builtin I/O C5 to C7
Control unit
M1 (MR50RMD)
M18 (MR50RMD)
0V
33
X21.3
0V
33
X00.0
0V
34
X21.2
0V
34
X00.2
0V
35
X21.1
0V
35
X00.4
0V
36
X21.0
COM1
36
X00.7
X20.5
37
X20.6
X00.5
37
X02.2
X16.7
38
X02.0
38
X02.5
X17.7
39
X16.5
X17.5
X02.3
39
X04.0
X18.7
40
X18.5
X02.6
40
X04.3
X17.1
41
X21.7
X04.1
41
X04.6
10
X17.0
42
X22.7
10
X04.4
42
X06.1
43
X06.3
44
X06.5
45
X06.7
46
X08.1
47
X08.3
48
X08.5
19
20
21
22
X21.4
X16.3
X16.2
X17.3
23
X17.2
24
X18.3
25
26
27
X18.2
X21.6
X21.5
19
X00.1
20
X00.3
21
X00.6
22
X02.1
23
X02.4
24
X02.7
25
X04.2
26
X04.5
27
X06.0
28
COM2
29
COM3
43
X22.6
11
X04.7
4NG
44
X22.5
12
X06.2
45
X22.4
13
X06.4
46
X22.3
14
X06.6
47
X22.2
15
X08.0
48
X22.1
16
X08.2
X20.1
49
X22.0
17
X08.4
49
X08.7
X20.0
50
0V
18
X08.6
50
0V
11
X16.1
12
X16.0
13
X20.7
14
X20.4
15
X20.3
16
X20.2
17
18
28
29
30
31
32
+24E
+24E
+24E
+24E
M2 (MR50RMD)
30
31
32
J1
M1
J30
M18
M20 (MR50RMD)
0V
33
Y51.7
0V
33
Y84.0
0V
34
Y51.6
0V
34
Y84.2
0V
35
Y51.5
0V
35
Y84.4
36
Y51.4
0V
36
Y84.7
37
Y51.3
Y84.5
37
Y86.2
38
Y51.2
Y86.0
38
Y86.5
39
Y51.1
Y86.3
39
X19.2
40
Y51.0
Y86.6
40
X19.7
41
Y49.4
X19.3
41
X10.6
42
Y53.7
10
X10.4
42
X12.1
43
Y53.6
11
X10.7
43
X12.3
44
Y53.5
12
X12.2
44
X12.5
45
Y53.4
13
X12.4
45
X12.7
46
Y53.3
14
X12.6
46
X14.1
47
Y53.2
15
X14.0
47
X14.3
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
19
Y84.1
20
Y84.3
21
Y84.6
0V
Y48.7
Y48.6
Y48.5
Y48.4
Y49.7
10
Y50.5
11
Y52.7
12
Y52.6
13
Y52.5
14
Y52.4
15
Y52.3
16
Y52.2
48
Y53.1
16
X14.2
48
X14.5
17
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
17
X14.4
49
X14.7
18
Y52.0
50
0V
18
X14.6
50
0V
14
Y82.5
15
Y82.6
16
Y82.7
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Y48.0
Y48.1
Y48.2
22
Y86.1
23
Y86.4
24
Y86.7
25
26
27
28
29
X19.5
X10.5
X12.0
COM4
COM5
30
31
32
J2
M2
J32
M20
M19 (MR20RMD)
1
Y80.0
Y80.1
Y80.2
Y80.3
Y80.4
Y80.5
Y80.6
Y80.7
Y82.0
10
Y82.1
11
Y82.2
12
Y82.3
13
Y82.4
17
18
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable forJ1, J2, J30, J31 and J32.
Recommended cable : A66L00010042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
A66L00010041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
103
0V
0V
0V
J31
M19
Magnetic
cabinet and
operators
panel or
machine side
B61393E/06
D Connector table of
builtin I/O E1 to E3
Control unit
M201 (MR50RMD)
M218 (MR50RMD)
0V
33
X21.3
0V
33
X00.0
0V
34
X21.2
0V
34
X00.2
0V
35
X21.1
0V
35
X00.4
0V
36
X21.0
COMI 1
36
X00.7
X20.5
37
X20.6
X00.5
37
X02.2
X16.7
38
X02.0
38
X02.5
X17.7
39
X16.5
X17.5
X02.3
39
X04.0
X18.7
40
X18.5
X02.6
40
X04.3
X17.1
41
X21.7
X04.1
41
X04.6
10
X17.0
42
X22.7
10
X04.4
42
X06.1
43
X06.3
44
X06.5
45
X06.7
46
X08.1
47
X08.3
19
X21.4
20
X16.3
21
X16.2
22
X17.3
23
X17.2
24
X18.3
25
X18.2
26
X21.6
27
X21.5
19
X00.1
20
X00.3
21
X00.6
22
X02.1
23
X02.4
24
X02.7
25
X04.2
26
X04.5
27
X06.0
28
COMI 2
29
COMI 3
43
X22.6
11
X04.7
4NG
44
X22.5
12
X06.2
45
X22.4
13
X06.4
46
X22.3
14
X06.6
47
X22.2
15
X08.0
48
X22.1
16
X08.2
48
X08.5
X20.1
49
X22.0
17
X08.4
49
X08.7
X20.0
50
0V
18
X08.6
50
0V
11
X16.1
12
X16.0
13
X20.7
14
X20.4
15
X20.3
16
X20.2
17
18
28
29
+24E
30
+24E
31
+24E
32
+24E
M202 (MR50RMD)
30
31
32
COMO 3
33
Y51.7
0V
33
Y84.0
COMO 2
34
Y51.6
0V
34
Y84.2
COMO 1
35
Y51.5
COMO 8
35
Y84.4
COMO 0
36
Y51.4
COMO 7
36
Y84.7
Y48.7
37
Y51.3
Y84.5
37
Y86.2
Y48.6
38
Y51.2
Y86.0
38
Y86.5
Y48.5
39
Y51.1
Y86.3
39
X19.2
Y48.4
40
Y51.0
Y86.6
40
X19.7
Y49.7
41
Y49.4
X19.3
41
X10.6
10
Y50.5
42
Y53.7
10
X10.4
42
X12.1
11
Y52.7
43
Y53.6
11
X10.7
43
X12.3
12
Y52.6
44
Y53.5
12
X12.2
44
X12.5
13
Y52.5
45
Y53.4
13
X12.4
45
X12.7
14
Y52.4
46
Y53.3
14
X12.6
46
X14.1
15
Y52.3
47
Y53.2
15
X14.0
47
X14.3
16
Y52.2
48
Y53.1
16
X14.2
48
X14.5
17
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
17
X14.4
49
X14.7
18
Y52.0
50
COMO 4
18
X14.6
50
0V
14
Y82.5
15
Y82.6
16
Y82.7
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J30
M218
M220 (MR50RMD)
19
J1
M201
Y48.0
Y48.1
Y48.2
19
Y84.1
20
Y84.3
21
Y84.6
22
Y86.1
23
Y86.4
24
Y86.7
25
X19.5
26
X10.5
27
X12.0
28
COMI 4
29
COMI 5
30
31
32
J2
M202
J32
M220
M219 (MR20RMD)
1
Y80.0
Y80.1
Y80.2
Y80.3
Y80.4
Y80.5
Y80.6
Y80.7
Y82.0
10
Y82.1
11
Y82.2
12
Y82.3
13
Y82.4
17
0V
18
19
COMO 6
20
COMO 5
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable forJ1, J2, J30, J31 and J32.
Recommended cable : A66L00010042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
A66L00010041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
104
J31
M219
Magnetic
cabinet and
operators
panel or
machine
side
B61393E/06
I/OC
I/OE
No.
I/OC
I/OE
No.
X00#0
M18
M218
33
M18
M218
04
X00#1
M18
M218
19
X00#2
M18
M218
34
X00#3
M18
M218
20
X00#4
M18
M218
35
X00#5
M18
M218
05
X00#6
M18
M218
21
X00#7
M18
M218
36
X02#0
M18
M218
06
X02#1
M18
M218
22
X02#2
M18
M218
37
X02#3
M18
M218
07
X02#4
M18
M218
23
X02#5
M18
M218
38
X02#6
M18
M218
08
X02#7
M18
M218
24
X04#0
M18
M218
39
X04#1
M18
M218
09
X04#2
M18
M218
25
X04#3
M18
M218
40
X04#4
M18
M218
10
X04#5
M18
M218
26
X04#6
M18
M218
41
X04#7
M18
M218
11
X06#0
M18
M218
27
X06#1
M18
M218
42
X06#2
M18
M218
12
*+LX (0PD)
*LX (0PD)
*DECX (0PD)
*+LY (0PD)
*LY (0PD)
*DECY (0PD)
M18
M218
28
*+L3 (0PD)
*L3 (0PD)
*DEC3 (0PD)
(4NG M series)
*+L4 (0PD)
*L4 (0PD)
105
B61393E/06
I/OC
I/OE
No.
I/OC
I/OE
No.
X06#3
M18
M218
43
M18
M218
28
X06#4
M18
M218
13
X06#5
M18
M218
44
X06#6
M18
M218
14
X06#7
M18
M218
45
X08#0
M18
M218
15
X08#1
M18
M218
46
X08#2
M18
M218
16
X08#3
M18
M218
47
X08#4
M18
M218
17
X08#5
M18
M218
48
X08#6
M18
M218
18
X08#7
M18
M218
49
X10#4
M20
M220
10
X10#5
M20
M220
26
X10#6
M20
M220
41
X10#7
M20
M220
11
X12#0
M20
M220
27
X12#1
M20
M220
42
X12#2
M20
M220
12
X12#3
M20
M220
43
X12#4
M20
M220
13
X12#5
M20
M220
44
X12#6
M20
M220
14
X12#7
M20
M220
45
M18
M218
29
*DEC4 (0PD)
4NG (0PD)
ZAE (M)
PFWB (0PD)
*RILK (M), *PFIN (0PD)
*NFIN (0PD)
SKIP (M, T), PE (0PD)
M20
M220
28
X08#0 to X08#7 are direct current input signals B (for fast signal input).
106
B61393E/06
I/OC
I/OE
No.
I/OC
I/OE
No.
X14#0
M20
M220
15
M20
M220
29
X14#1
M20
M220
46
X14#2
M20
M220
16
X14#3
M20
M220
47
X14#4
M20
M220
17
X14#5
M20
M220
48
X14#6
M20
M220
18
X14#7
M20
M220
49
X19#2
M20
M220
39
X19#3
M20
M220
09
X19#5
M20
M220
25
X19#7
M20
M220
40
X16#0
M1
M201
12
X16#1
M1
M201
11
X16#2
M1
M201
21
X16#3
M1
M201
20
X16#5
M1
M201
38
X16#7
M1
M201
06
*EDCX (0PD)
X17#0
M1
M201
10
*EDCY (0PD)
X17#1
M1
M201
09
*EDC3 (0PD)
X17#2
M1
M201
23
*EDC4 (0PD)
X17#3
M1
M201
22
X17#5
M1
M201
39
X17#7
M1
M201
07
X18#2
M1
M201
25
X18#3
M1
M201
24
X18#5
M1
M201
40
X18#7
M1
M201
08
X20#0
M1
M201
18
*ESP (0PD)
*+EDCX (0PD)
*+EDCY (0PD)
*+EDC3 (0PD)
*+EDC4 (0PD)
*DECX
107
I/OE
No.
X20#1
M1
M201
17
X20#2
M1
M201
16
X20#3
M1
M201
15
X20#4
M1
M201
14
X20#5
M1
M201
05
X20#6
M1
M201
37
X20#7
M1
M201
13
X21#0
M1
M201
36
X21#1
M1
M201
35
X21#2
M1
M201
34
X21#3
M1
M201
33
X21#4
M1
M201
19
X21#5
M1
M201
27
X21#6
M1
M201
26
X21#7
M1
M201
41
X22#0
M1
M201
49
X22#1
M1
M201
48
X22#2
M1
M201
47
X22#3
M1
M201
46
X22#4
M1
M201
45
X22#5
M1
M201
44
X22#6
M1
M201
43
X22#7
M1
M201
42
B61393E/06
I/OE
No.
*ESP (T, M)
108
B61393E/06
Table 6.2.5 (b) Signal pin assignment and common signal pin assignment for output signals
Expansion I/O cards C5, C6 and C7 are fixed to sink output. Expansion I/O cards E5, E6, and
E7 can be set to sink output or source output, by setting the common signal accordingly.
Signal pin
Signal pin
Signal address
I/OC
No.
I/OE
No.
Y48#0
M2
25
M202
25
Y48#1
M2
26
M202
26
Y48#2
M2
27
M202
27
Y48#4
M2
08
M202
08
Y48#5
M2
07
M202
07
Y48#6
M2
06
M202
06
Y48#7
M2
05
M202
05
Y49#4
M2
41
M202
41
Y49#0
M2
24
M202
24
Y49#1
M2
23
M202
23
Y49#3
M2
22
M202
22
Y49#7
M2
09
M202
09
Y50#0
M2
21
M202
21
Y50#2
M2
19
M202
19
Y50#3
M2
20
M202
20
Y50#5
M2
10
M202
10
Y51#0
M2
40
M202
40
Y51#1
M2
39
M202
39
Y51#2
M2
38
M202
38
Y51#3
M2
37
M202
37
Y51#4
M2
36
M202
36
Y51#5
M2
35
M202
35
Y51#6
M2
34
M202
34
Y51#7
M2
33
M202
33
109
Common
I/OE
No.
COMO1
M202
03
COMO0
M202
04
COMO3
M202
01
B61393E/06
Signal pin
Signal pin
Signal address
I/OC
No.
I/OE
No.
Y52#0
M2
18
M202
18
Y52#1
M2
17
M202
17
Y52#2
M2
16
M202
16
Y52#3
M2
15
M202
15
Y52#4
M2
14
M202
14
Y52#5
M2
13
M202
13
Y52#6
M2
12
M202
12
Y52#7
M2
11
M202
11
Y53#0
M2
49
M202
49
Y53#1
M2
48
M202
48
Y53#2
M2
47
M202
47
Y53#3
M2
46
M202
46
Y53#4
M2
45
M202
45
Y53#5
M2
44
M202
44
Y53#6
M2
43
M202
43
Y53#7
M2
42
M202
42
Y80#0
M19
01
M219
01
Y80#1
M19
02
M219
02
Y80#2
M19
03
M219
03
Y80#3
M19
04
M219
04
Y80#4
M19
05
M219
05
Y80#5
M19
06
M219
06
Y80#6
M19
07
M219
07
Y80#7
M19
08
M219
08
110
Common
I/OE
No.
COMO2
M202
02
COMO4
M202
50
COMO5
M219
20
B61393E/06
Signal pin
Signal pin
Signal address
I/OC
No.
I/OE
No.
Y82#0
M19
09
M219
09
Y82#1
M19
10
M219
10
Y82#2
M19
11
M219
11
Y82#3
M19
12
M219
12
Y82#4
M19
13
M219
13
Y82#5
M19
14
M219
14
Y82#6
M19
15
M219
15
Y82#7
M19
16
M219
16
Y84#0
M20
33
M220
33
Y84#1
M20
19
M220
19
Y84#2
M20
34
M220
34
Y84#3
M20
20
M220
20
Y84#4
M20
35
M220
35
Y84#5
M20
05
M220
05
Y84#6
M20
21
M220
21
Y84#7
M20
36
M220
36
Y86#0
M20
06
M220
06
Y86#1
M20
22
M220
22
Y86#2
M20
37
M220
37
Y86#3
M20
07
M220
07
Y86#4
M20
23
M220
23
Y86#5
M20
38
M220
38
Y86#6
M20
08
M220
08
Y86#7
M20
24
M220
24
111
Common
I/OE
No.
COMO6
M219
19
COMO7
M220
04
COMO8
M220
03
6.3
ADDING I/O POINTS
6.3.1
System without FANUC
I/O Link
D Connecting expansion
I/O card B2 or expansion
I/O card F1
D Connection
B61393E/06
When the required I/O signals outnumber the maximum number of I/O
signals that can be supported by the internal I/O card, an external I/O unit
is connected. Connection can be made with or without FANUC I/O Link.
Number of input
signals
Number of output
signals
I/O B2
Sink output
104
72
I/O F1
DO common output
104
72
For J36, use a power cable with 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) conductors or greater.
The voltage drop on the cable should be 1 V or less.
112
B61393E/06
Control unit
PMCMODEL M P.C.B
M24 (MR20RFA)
1
SOUT
*SOUT
M60 (MR20RMD)
8
9
10
12
13
SOUT
15 *SIN
*SOUT
16
17
11
14 SIN
J39
M24
M60
20
15 *SIN
16
10
18
19
14 SIN
17
11
18
19
12
13
20
CP51
+24
0V
J36
3
CP14
CP51
+24
0V
Connector
SMS 3 PNS5
Connector of J39
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
M24(01)
M60(01)
M24(02)
M60(02)
M24(14)
M60(14)
M24(15)
M60(15)
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
Wire :
Twisted pair unified shielded cable and contact at least 7 lines thicker than 0.18mm2
Recommended cable : A66L00010041
113
B61393E/06
D Connector table
additional I/O B2
Control unit
M61
M78
0V
33
X1008.3
0V
33
X1000.0
0V
34
X1008.2
0V
34
X1000.2
0V
35
X1008.1
0V
35
X1000.4
0V
36
X1008.0
COMI1
36
X1000.7
X1007.5
37
X1007.6
X1000.5
37
X1001.2
X1005.7
38
X1005.5
X1001.0
38
X1001.5
X1005.6
39
X1005.4
X1001.3
39
X1002.0
X1006.7
40
X1006.5
X1001.6
40
X1002.3
X1006.6
41
X1008.7
X1002.1
41
X1002.6
10
X1006.4
42
X1009.7
10
X1002.4
42
X1003.1
43
X1009.6
11
X1002.7
43
X1003.3
44
X1009.5
12
X1003.2
44
X1003.5
45
X1009.4
13
X1003.4
45
X1003.7
46
X1009.3
14
X1003.6
46
X1004.1
47
X1009.2
15
X1004.0
47
X1004.3
19
20
21
22
X1008.4
X1005.3
X1005.2
X1005.1
23
X1005.0
24
X1006.3
25
26
27
X1006.2
X1008.6
X1008.5
19
X1000.1
20
X1000.3
21
X1000.6
22
X1001.1
23
X1001.4
24
X1001.7
25
X1002.2
26
X1002.5
27
X1003.0
28
COMI2
29
COMI3
30
+24E
31
+24E
32
+24E
11
X1006.1
12
X1006.0
13
X1007.7
14
X1007.4
15
X1007.3
16
X1007.2
48
X1009.1
16
X1004.2
48
X1004.5
17
X1007.1
49
X1009.0
17
X1004.4
49
X1004.7
18
X1007.0
50
0V
18
X1004.6
50
0V
28
29
30
31
32
+24E
+24E
+24E
+24E
M62
J40
M61
J42
M78
M80
0V
33
Y1022.7
0V
33
Y1027.0
0V
34
Y1022.6
0V
34
Y1027.2
0V
35
Y1022.5
0V
35
Y1027.4
0V
36
Y1022.4
0V
36
Y1027.7
Y1020.7
37
Y1022.3
Y1027.5
37
Y1028.2
Y1020.6
38
Y1022.2
Y1028.0
38
Y1028.5
Y1020.5
39
Y1022.1
Y1028.3
39
X1010.0
Y1020.4
40
Y1022.0
Y1028.6
40
X1010.3
Y1021.7
41
Y1020.3
X1010.1
41
X1010.6
10
Y1021.6
42
Y1024.7
10
X1010.4
42
X1011.1
11
Y1023.7
43
Y1024.6
11
X1010.7
43
X1011.3
12
Y1023.6
44
Y1024.5
12
X1011.2
44
X1011.5
13
Y1023.5
45
Y1024.4
13
X1011.4
45
X1011.7
14
Y1023.4
46
Y1024.3
14
X1011.6
46
X1012.1
15
Y1023.3
47
Y1024.2
15
X1012.0
47
X1012.3
16
Y1023.2
48
Y1024.1
16
X1012.2
48
X1012.5
17
Y1023.1
49
Y1024.0
17
X1012.4
49
X1012.7
18
Y1023.0
50
0V
18
X1012.6
50
0V
14
Y1026.5
15
Y1026.6
16
Y1026.7
19
Y1021.5
20
Y1021.4
21
Y1021.3
22
Y1021.2
23
Y1021.1
24
Y1021.0
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Y1020.0
Y1020.1
Y1020.2
19
Y1027.1
20
Y1027.3
21
Y1027.6
22
Y1028.1
23
Y1028.4
24
Y1028.7
25
X1010.2
26
X1010.5
27
X1011.0
28
COMI4
29
COMI5
30
+24E
31
+24E
32
+24E
J41
M62
J44
M80
M79
1
Y1025.0
Y1025.1
Y1025.2
Y1025.3
Y1025.4
Y1025.5
Y1025.6
Y1025.7
Y1026.0
10
Y1026.1
11
Y1026.2
12
Y1026.3
13
Y1026.4
17
18
19
20
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable for J40 to J44.
Recommended cable : A66L00010042 (7/0.18, 50 cores)
A66L00010041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
114
0V
0V
J43
M79
Magnetic
cabinet and
operators
panel or
machine side
B61393E/06
D Connector table
additional I/O F1
Control unit
M261 (MR50RMD)
M278 (MR50RMD)
0V
33
X1008.3
0V
33
X1000.0
0V
34
X1008.2
0V
34
X1000.2
0V
35
X1008.1
0V
35
X1000.4
0V
36
X1008.0
COMI 1
36
X1000.7
X1007.5
37
X1007.6
X1000.5
37
X1001.2
X1005.7
38
X1005.5
X1001.0
38
X1001.5
X1005.6
39
X1005.4
X1001.3
39
X1002.0
X1006.7
40
X1006.5
X1001.6
40
X1002.3
X1006.6
41
X1008.7
X1002.1
41
X1002.6
10
X1006.4
42
X1009.7
10
X1002.4
42
X1003.1
43
X1003.3
44
X1003.5
45
X1003.7
46
X1004.1
47
X1004.3
19
20
21
22
X1008.4
X1005.3
X1005.2
X1005.1
23
X1005.0
24
X1006.3
25
26
27
X1006.2
X1008.6
X1008.5
43
X1009.6
11
X1002.7
44
X1009.5
12
X1003.2
45
X1009.4
13
X1003.4
46
X1009.3
14
X1003.6
47
X1009.2
15
X1004.0
19
X1000.1
20
X1000.3
21
X1000.6
22
X1001.1
23
X1001.4
24
X1001.7
25
X1002.2
26
X1002.5
27
X1003.0
28
COMI 2
29
COMI 3
30
+24E
31
+24E
32
+24E
11
X1006.1
12
X1006.0
13
X1007.7
14
X1007.4
15
X1007.3
16
X1007.2
48
X1009.1
16
X1004.2
48
X1004.5
17
X1007.1
49
X1009.0
17
X1004.4
49
X1004.7
18
X1007.0
50
0V
18
X1004.6
50
0V
28
29
+24E
30
+24E
31
+24E
32
+24E
M262 (MR50RMD)
33 Y1027.0
COMO 3
33 Y1022.7
0V
COMO 2
34 Y1022.6
0V
COMO 1
35 Y1022.5
COMO 8
COMO 0
36 Y1022.4
COMO 7
Y1020.7
37 Y1022.3
Y1027.5
Y1020.6
38 Y1022.2
Y1020.5
39 Y1022.1
Y1028.3
Y1020.4
40 Y1022.0
Y1028.6
Y1021.7
41 Y1020.3
X1010.1
10
Y1021.6
42 Y1024.7
10
X1010.4
11
Y1023.7
43 Y1024.6
11
X1010.7
12
Y1023.6
44 Y1024.5
12
X1011.2
13
Y1023.5
45 Y1024.4
13
X1011.4
14
Y1023.4
46 Y1024.3
14
X1011.6
15
Y1023.3
47 Y1024.2
15
X1012.0
16
Y1023.2
48 Y1024.1
16
X1012.2
48 X1012.5
17
Y1023.1
49 Y1024.0
17
X1012.4
49 X1012.7
18
Y1023.0
50 COMO 4
18
X1012.6
50
Y1021.5
20
Y1021.4
21
Y1021.3
22
Y1021.2
23
Y1021.1
24
Y1021.0
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Y1020.0
Y1020.1
Y1020.2
J42
M278
M280 (MR50RMD)
19
J40
M261
Y1028.0
19
Y1027.1
20
Y1027.3
21
Y1027.6
22
Y1028.1
23
Y1028.4
24
Y1028.7
25
X1010.2
26
X1010.5
27
X1011.0
28
COMI 4
29
COMI 5
30
+24E
31
+24E
32
+24E
34 Y1027.2
35 Y1027.4
36 Y1027.7
37 Y1028.2
38 Y1028.5
J41
M262
39 X1010.0
40 X1010.3
41 X1010.6
42 X1011.1
43 X1011.3
J44
44 X1011.5
45 X1011.7
M280
46 X1012.1
47 X1012.3
M279 (MR20RMD)
1
Y1025.0
Y1025.1
Y1025.2
Y1025.3
Y1025.4
Y1025.5
Y1025.6
Y1025.7
Y1026.0
10
Y1026.1
11
Y1026.2
12
Y1026.3
13
Y1026.4
14
Y1026.5
15
Y1026.6
16
Y1026.7
17
0V
18
19 COMO 6
20 COMO 5
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable for J40 to J44.
Recommended cable : A66L00010042 (7/0.18, 50 cores)
A66L00010041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
115
J43
M279
Magnetic
cabinet and
operators
panel or
machine side
B61393E/06
Signal address
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
X1000#0
M78
M278
33
X1000#1
M78
M278
19
X1000#2
M78
M278
34
X1000#3
M78
M278
20
X1000#4
M78
M278
35
X1000#5
M78
M278
05
X1000#6
M78
M278
21
X1000#7
M78
M278
36
X1001#0
M78
M278
06
X1001#1
M78
M278
22
X1001#2
M78
M278
37
X1001#3
M78
M278
07
X1001#4
M78
M278
23
X1001#5
M78
M278
38
X1001#6
M78
M278
08
X1001#7
M78
M278
24
X1002#0
M78
M278
39
X1002#1
M78
M278
09
X1002#2
M78
M278
25
X1002#3
M78
M278
40
X1002#4
M78
M278
10
X1002#5
M78
M278
26
X1002#6
M78
M278
41
X1002#7
M78
M278
11
X1003#0
M78
M278
27
X1003#1
M78
M278
42
X1003#2
M78
M278
12
116
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
M78
M278
04
M78
M278
28
B61393E/06
Signal address
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
X1003#3
M78
M278
43
X1003#4
M78
M278
13
X1003#5
M78
M278
44
X1003#6
M78
M278
14
X1003#7
M78
M278
45
X1004#0
M78
M278
15
X1004#1
M78
M278
46
X1004#2
M78
M278
16
X1004#3
M78
M278
47
X1004#4
M78
M278
17
X1004#5
M78
M278
48
X1004#6
M78
M278
18
X1004#7
M78
M278
49
X1005#0
M61
M261
23
X1005#1
M61
M261
22
X1005#2
M61
M261
21
X1005#3
M61
M261
20
X1005#4
M61
M261
39
X1005#5
M61
M261
38
X1005#6
M61
M261
07
X1005#7
M61
M261
06
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
M78
M278
29
X1004#0 to X1004#7 are direct current input signals B (for fast signal
input).
117
B61393E/06
Signal address
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
X1006#0
M61
M261
12
X1006#1
M61
M261
11
X1006#2
M61
M261
25
X1006#3
M61
M261
24
X1006#4
M61
M261
10
X1006#5
M61
M261
40
X1006#6
M61
M261
09
X1006#7
M61
M261
08
X1007#0
M61
M261
18
X1007#1
M61
M261
17
X1007#2
M61
M261
16
X1007#3
M61
M261
15
X1007#4
M61
M261
14
X1007#5
M61
M261
05
X1007#6
M61
M261
37
X1007#7
M61
M261
13
X1008#0
M61
M261
36
X1008#1
M61
M261
35
X1008#2
M61
M261
34
X1008#3
M61
M261
33
X1008#4
M61
M261
19
X1008#5
M61
M261
27
X1008#6
M61
M261
26
X1008#7
M61
M261
41
X1009#0
M61
M261
49
X1009#1
M61
M261
48
X1009#2
M61
M261
47
X1009#3
M61
M261
46
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
Always sink in
input
ut
118
B61393E/06
Signal address
I/OB2
I/OF1
No.
X1009#4
M61
M261
45
X1009#5
M61
M261
44
X1009#6
M61
M261
43
X1009#7
M61
M261
42
X1010#0
M80
M280
39
X1010#1
M80
M280
09
X1010#2
M80
M280
25
X1010#3
M80
M280
40
X1010#4
M80
M280
10
X1010#5
M80
M280
26
X1010#6
M80
M280
41
X1010#7
M80
M280
11
X1011#0
M80
M280
27
X1011#1
M80
M280
42
X1011#2
M80
M280
12
X1011#3
M80
M280
43
X1011#4
M80
M280
13
X1011#5
M80
M280
44
X1011#6
M80
M280
14
X1011#7
M80
M280
45
X1012#0
M80
M280
15
X1012#1
M80
M280
46
X1012#2
M80
M280
16
X1012#3
M80
M280
47
X1012#4
M80
M280
17
X1012#5
M80
M280
48
X1012#6
M80
M280
18
X1012#7
M80
M280
49
I/OF1
I/OB2
M80
119
No.
M280
Pins 01, 02 of
M80/M280
29
B61393E/06
Table 6.3.1 (c) Signal pin assignment and common signal pin assignment for output signals
Expansion I/O card B2 is fixed to sink output.
Expansion I/O card F1 can be set to either sink output or source output by setting the common
signal accordingly.
Signal pin
Signal pin
Signal address
I/OB2
No.
I/OF1
No.
Y1020#0
M62
25
M262
25
Y1020#1
M62
26
M262
26
Y1020#2
M62
27
M262
27
Y1020#3
M62
41
M262
41
Y1020#4
M62
08
M262
08
Y1020#5
M62
07
M262
07
Y1020#6
M62
06
M262
06
Y1020#7
M62
05
M262
05
Y1021#0
M62
24
M262
24
Y1021#1
M62
23
M262
23
Y1021#2
M62
22
M262
22
Y1021#3
M62
21
M262
21
Y1021#4
M62
20
M262
20
Y1021#5
M62
19
M262
19
Y1021#6
M62
10
M262
10
Y1021#7
M62
09
M262
09
Y1022#0
M62
40
M262
40
Y1022#1
M62
39
M262
39
Y1022#2
M62
38
M262
38
Y1022#3
M62
37
M262
37
Y1022#4
M62
36
M262
36
Y1022#5
M62
35
M262
35
Y1022#6
M62
34
M262
34
Y1022#7
M62
33
M262
33
120
Common
I/OF1
No.
COMO0
M262
04
COMO1
M262
03
COMO2
M262
02
B61393E/06
Signal pin
Signal pin
Signal address
I/OB2
No.
I/OF1
No.
Y1023#0
M62
18
M262
18
Y1023#1
M62
17
M262
17
Y1023#2
M62
16
M262
16
Y1023#3
M62
15
M262
15
Y1023#4
M62
14
M262
14
Y1023#5
M62
13
M262
13
Y1023#6
M62
12
M262
12
Y1023#7
M62
11
M262
11
Y1024#0
M62
49
M262
49
Y1024#1
M62
45
M262
45
Y1024#2
M62
47
M262
47
Y1024#3
M62
46
M262
46
Y1024#4
M62
48
M262
48
Y1024#5
M62
44
M262
44
Y1024#6
M62
43
M262
43
Y1024#7
M62
42
M262
42
Y1025#0
M79
01
M279
01
Y1025#1
M79
02
M279
02
Y1025#2
M79
03
M279
03
Y1025#3
M79
04
M279
04
Y1025#4
M79
05
M279
05
Y1025#5
M79
06
M279
06
Y1025#6
M79
07
M279
07
Y1025#7
M79
08
M279
08
121
Common
I/OF1
No.
COMO3
M262
01
COMO4
M262
50
COMO5
M279
20
B61393E/06
Signal pin
Signal pin
Signal address
I/OB2
No.
I/OF1
No.
Y1026#0
M79
09
M279
09
Y1026#1
M79
10
M279
10
Y1026#2
M79
11
M279
11
Y1026#3
M79
12
M279
12
Y1026#4
M79
13
M279
13
Y1026#5
M79
14
M279
14
Y1026#6
M79
15
M279
15
Y1026#7
M79
16
M279
16
Y1027#0
M80
33
M280
33
Y1027#1
M80
19
M280
19
Y1027#2
M80
34
M280
34
Y1027#3
M80
20
M280
20
Y1027#4
M80
35
M280
35
Y1027#5
M80
05
M280
05
Y1027#6
M80
21
M280
21
Y1027#7
M80
36
M280
36
Y1028#0
M80
06
M280
06
Y1028#1
M80
22
M280
22
Y1028#2
M80
37
M280
37
Y1028#3
M80
07
M280
07
Y1028#4
M80
23
M280
23
Y1028#5
M80
38
M280
38
Y1028#6
M80
08
M280
08
Y1028#7
M80
24
M280
24
122
Common
I/OF1
No.
COMO6
M279
19
COMO7
M280
04
COMO8
M280
03
B61393E/06
6.3.2
System Using FANUC
I/O Link
I/O signals can be added by using FANUC I/O Link. To use FANUC I/O
Link, an optional PMCM PC board with I/O Link is required. The PC
board is mounted in the PMC slot (connector name: CS3) of the control
unit.
Observe the restrictions and precautions described below.
1) When the PMCM with I/O Link is fitted it will no longer be possible
to use I/O units already linked to the PMCM. Such units must
therefore be replaced with I/O units fitted with the I/O Link.
Table 6.3.2
Name
Nonconnectable
I/O unit
Expansion I/O
Expansion I/OB2
Expansion I/OB3
I/O unit
I/O unit
I/O unitMODEL A
123
B61393E/06
6.3.2.1
Connection diagram
External power
supply
(DC24V)
FS0C
ESP, DEC, SKIP and other signals directly controlled by the CNC
I/OC
CP14
FD
Mate
Power unit
J36 power cable
PMCM
JD1B2
JD1A
K1X
I/O Link
(SLAVE)
JD1A2
The FD mate is
the master I/O link.
I/O Link
(MASTER)
@ Maximum 16 units
@ DI/DO units for FS0C:
32/32 and 64/64
JD1B
JD1A1
I/O Link
(SLAVE)
K1X
JD1B
FS0C
I/OC
Power unit
K1X
JD1A
GROUP #0
S
S
S
K1X
CP5
I/OB3
PMCM
JD1B2
I/O Link
(SLAVE)
K1X
JD1B
Power Mate
I/O Link
(SLAVE)
JD1A
JD1A1
GROUP #n (nv16)
124
I/O Link
(SLAVE)
JD1A
JD1A2
I/O Link
(MASTER)
CP32
I/OUnit
@ Maximum 16 units
@ DI/DO units for FS0C:
Maximum 1024/1024
B61393E/06
FDMate
(Master)
or Previous group
(Eg:FS0C)
JD1A
PMCM with
I/O Link (Slave)
Connector HONDA
PCRE20FS
JD1B2
01 SIN
11
0V
01 SIN
11
0V
02 *SIN
12
0V
02 *SIN
12
0V
03 SOUT
13
0V
03 SOUT
13
0V
04 *SOUT
14
0V
04 *SOUT
14
0V
05
15
05
15
06
16
06
16
07
17
07
17
08
18
08
18
09
19
09
19
10
20
10
20
K1X
JD1A2
K1X
01 SIN
11
02 *SIN
12 0V
0V
03 SOUT
13 0V
04 *SOUT
14 0V
05
15
06
16
07
17
08
18
09
19
10
20
Go to next group
b) When FS0 is master and I/OB3, Power Mate and I/O unit are
slaves
FS0C
Expansion I/OB3
Power Mate
I/O UNIT (Slave)
PMCM with
I/O Link (Master)
JD1A1
Connector HONDA
PCRE20FS
01 SIN
11
02 *SIN
12 0V
03 SOUT
13 0V
04 *SOUT
14 0V
05
0V
JD1B
01 SIN
11
02 *SIN
12 0V
03 SOUT
13 0V
04 *SOUT
14 0V
15
05
15
06
16
06
16
07
17
07
17
08
18
08
18
09
19
09
19
10
20
10
20
K1X
125
0V
B61393E/06
I/OB3
+24V
0V
3
J36
CP51
+24V
0V
NOTE
For a power supply unit that qualifies for CE marking, a
different connector is used. For details, see Section 5.4,
Connection of the Input Unit Builtin Power Supply Unit AI
(Qualifying for CE Marking).
d) I/O UnitMODEL A power cable connection
Prepare a power supply other than the Series 0 power unit and use
the interface module (AIF01A) connector CP32 to make the
required connections.
I/O UnitMODEL A
Separate power supply
Connector JAPAN FCI
SMS3PNS5
DC24V
126
AIF01A
CP32
+24V
0V
B61393E/06
JD1A
SIN (1)
(3) SOUT
*SIN (2)
(4) *SOUT
SOUT (3)
(1)
SIN
*SOUT (4)
(2)
*SIN
0V (11)
(11)
0V
0V (12)
(12)
0V
0V (13)
(13)
0V
0V (14)
(14)
0V
6.3.2.2
Turning the power on
and off
127
B61393E/06
The PMCM addresses of DI/DO connected via the FANUC I/O Link are
as shown in the table below.
Since the expansion I/OB3 can also be connected to the I/O Link, it also
uses the same addresses.
Care must be taken, on the other hand, with the expansion I/OB2 since
this unit uses different addresses.
6.3.2.3
DI/DO addresses
Table 6.3.2.3
DI/DO
Address
DGN. No.
DI
(128BYTE=1024 points)
X3072X3199
50725199
DO
(128BYTE=1024 points)
Y3200X3327
52005327
DI
(8BYTE=64 points)
X1100X1107
31003107
DO
(8BYTE=64 points)
X1200X1207
32003207
Master
Slave
#6
#5
64
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
IOMDGN
IOMDGN
1 : I/O Link DI/DO diagnostic display.
0 : No I/O Link DI/DO diagnostic display.
6.3.2.4
I/O module data
I/O module data is required to set in FANUC I/O Link. Refer to FANUC
PMCMODEL K/L/M/P PROGRAMMING MANUAL for details.
128
B61393E/06
The K1X cable shown in the feneral connection diagram can be extended
by means of an optical I/O Link adaptor to a maximum of 200m using
optical fiber cable.
6.3.2.5
Optical I/O Link adaptor
(1) Dimensions
66.0
connector for
connection to
unit
JD1
FANUC
optical connector
COP1
7.0
45.0
40.0
18.0
(2) Weight
Main unit: Approx. 100g
(3) Connection
(a) Connection diagram
Unit
Unit
JD1A
JD1B
Interunit
connection
cable (K3X)
Optical cable
(K4X)
Optical I/O
Link adaptor
129
Interunit
connection
cable (K3K)
Optical I/O
Link adaptor
B61393E/06
0V
Unit side
JD1A,JD1B
SIN (01)
(03)
SOUT
0V
*SIN (02)
(04)
*SOUT
0V
SOUT (03)
(01)
SIN
15
0V
*SOUT (04)
(02)
*SIN
06
16
0V
+5V (09)
(09)
+5V
07
17
08
18
+5V (18)
(18)
+5V
+5V (20)
(20)
+5V
0V (11)
(11)
0V
0V (12)
(12)
0V
0V (13)
(13)
0V
0V (14)
(14)
0V
0V (15)
(15)
0V
0V (16)
(16)
0V
SIN
11
0V
02
*SIN
12
03
SOUT
13
04
*SOUT
14
05
01
09
10
+5V
+5V
19
20
+5V
130
B61393E/06
131
B61393E/06
132
B61393E/06
7.1
CONNECTING THE
DISPLAY UNIT
7.1.1
Outline
The display unit of the CNC is used to display information such as CNC
programs and parameters to the operator and to assist the operator in the
operation of the machine.
For the Series 0, CRT, PDP, EL, and LCD display units are available. This
section describes how to connect these display units to the control unit.
Outline drawings are given in the appendix.
Each display unit can be provided as a unit incorporating an MDI
keyboard, for example a CRT/MDI unit. The MDI section can be
connected in the same way as a separate MDI unit. For an explanation of
making this connection, see the subsequent chapter.
Some display units are available either as a standard type or as a type
conforming to European safety standards (qualifying for CE marking).
Since the type qualifying for CE marking uses a different power supply
unit, the connection of the CE marking type differs from that of the
standard type in some respects. The unit qualifying for CE marking with
the MDI keyboard has keys of different colors, and may use symbolic
keys.
The unit qualifying for CE marking has a stud or hole for grounding.
Ground the unit to a housing in the vicinity, using a line containing
conductors of 2 mm2 or greater.
Table 7.1.1 Display units qualifying for CE marking
CE marking
type
Unit
9 monochrome
CRT
Provided
9 color CRT
Not provided
14 color CRT
Provided
PDP
Provided
EL
Not provided
LCD
Provided
133
7.1.2
Video Signal Interface
B61393E/06
For each display unit, either of the following two video signal interfaces
is used:
Type
Display unit
D Type A
Control unit
Memory card
CCX5
CN1
Graphics card
CCX4
(MR20RM)
(MR20RMD)
1
RVDO
HSYN
VSYN
GVDO
BVDO
0V
0V
10 0V
11 0V
12 0V
13
14
RVDO
15
HSYN
VSYN
17
GVDO
18
BVDO
19
20
16
H20.F H20.F
0V
0V
10 0V
11 0V
12 0V
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Cable wiring
RVDO
0V
GVDO
0V
BVDO
0V
HSYN
0V
VSYN
0V
1
8
1
8
4
11
4
11
5
12
5
12
2
9
2
9
3
10
3
10
Shield
Ground plate
134
RVDO
0V
GVDO
0V
BVDO
0V
HSYN
0V
VSYN
0V
B61393E/06
D Type B
Control unit
Memory card
CCX5
Graphics card
CCX4
JA1
(MR20RMD)
1
RVDO
HSYN
VSYN
GVDO
BVDO
0V
0V
10 0V
11 0V
12 0V
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
(PCREV20MDT)
1
RVDO
11
0V
12 VSYN
GVDO
13
0V
14 0V
BVDO
15
0V
16 0V
17
18 HSYN
19
10
20
Hirose
Cable wiring
Honda 20pin MR connector (female)
RVDO
0V
GVDO
0V
BVDO
0V
HSYN
0V
VSYN
0V
1
8
1
2
4
11
3
4
5
12(18)
5
6
2
9
18
16
3
10
12
14
Shield
FI40A20S (Connector)
FI20CV5 (Housing)
RVDO
0V
GVDO
0V
BVDO
0V
HSYN
0V
VSYN
0V
Ground plate
: 50 m
: A02B0098K870 (5m)
135
B61393E/06
Unit
Material, specifications
Code
A66L00010371
Manufacturer
C0IREFV (0)CX75SB5X0.14SQ
Cables
Internal
conductor
Size
Configuration
Material
Approximate outside diameter
Insulation
External
conductor
(braided)
Material (color)
0.14
Conductors/mm 7/0.16
*
mm
*
Thickness
mm
0.71
mm
1.90
Material
Wire diameter
Density
Thickness
Jacket
mm2
*
mm
%
mm
Material
Color
Thickness
Approximate outside diameter
0.15
mm
2.6
mm
7.1
mm
0.05
Braided shield
mm
Sheath
80 or higher (typ.82%)
Thickness
mm
0.3
Outside diameter
mm
7.8
Material, color
Standard thickness
mm
mm
9.2"0.3
/km
Up to 143
136
B61393E/06
Unit
M/km
Material, specifications
1000 or higher
75"5
nF/km
56
dB/km
53
Estimated mass
Kg/Km
105
Standard length
200
Package
Bunch
Black
White
Green
Blue
Filler
Tying tape
Braided shield
Sheath
137
Internal conductor
Insulation
External conductor (braided)
Jacket
7.1.3
Connecting the Display
Unit Power Supply
B61393E/06
The required supply voltage varies with the display unit. Also, some
display units, while requiring the same supply voltage, may use different
connectors.
Use a power cable containing conductors of 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) or greater.
(1) 9 monochrome CRT
CP15 (SMS6RN4)
9 CRT unit
(monochrome)
Cable side connector (CP15)
Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS6PN5
Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M23T3 or
RC16MSCT3
CN2 (SMS6RN4)
1
J38
0V
0V
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
0V
9 CRT unit
(monochrome)
Cable side connector (CP15)
Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS6PN5
Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M23T3 or
RC16MSCT3
J38
CN2 (SMS6RN4)
1
2
3
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
NOTE
When the power supply unit qualifying for CE marking is
used, a different connector is used. For details, see Section
5.4, Connection of the Input Unit Builtin Power Supply
Unit AI (Qualifying for CE Marking).
138
B61393E/06
(2) 9 color CRT, 14 color CRT (standard type), PDP (standard type), and
EL
Display unit
Cable side connector
Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS3PN5
Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M23T3 or
RC16MSCT3
CN2
(SMS3RKSTK2)
200A
200A
200B
200B
CN2
200A
200A
200B
200B
139
B61393E/06
+24V
0V
CN2
(B2PVH)
1
+24V
0V
Conventional power
supply unit B
CP15 (SMS6RN4)
CN2
(B2PVH)
1
2
3
0V
(0V)
+24V
(+24V)
+24V
0V
NOTE
For the cable connector (CN2) on the PDPunit side, use
swaging tool YC16 available from Nihon Crimp Terminal.
(5) LCD
CP15 (SMS6RN4)
CN5
+24V
0V
0V
0V
+24V
(+24V)
140
B61393E/06
7.1.4
Connecting the Soft
Key Cable of a
Separate Display Unit
Some separate display units have soft keys. These units have flat cables
for the soft keys. Connect the soft key cable to connector KM2 of a
separate MDI unit.
Separate display unit
7.1.5
ON/OFF Switch on the
Display Unit
ON
OFF
TP2
(M4 screw terminal)
1
ON
OFF
COM
14 CRT/MDI unit
ON/OFF switch
Input unit
TP2
(M4 screw terminal)
1
ON1
ON2
OFF1
OFF2
TP2
(M4 screw terminal)
EON
ON
EOF
OFF
COM
COM
When connecting the cable to the input unit, remove the metal
jumper connecting EOF and COM.
141
B61393E/06
Cableside connector
Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS6PN5
Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M23T3 or
RC16MSCT3
ON
OFF
COM
CP3
(SMS6RW4D28)
1
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
14 CRT/MDI unit
ON/OFF switch
Power supply unit AI
TP2
(M4 screw terminal)
1
ON1
ON2
OFF1
OFF2
Cableside connector
Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS6PN5
Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M23T3 or
RC16MSCT3
142
CP3
(SMS6RW4D28)
1
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
B61393E/06
COM
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
14 CRT/MDI unit
ON/OFF switch
Power supply unit AI
(CE marking type)
TP2
(M4 screw terminal)
1
ON1
ON2
OFF1
OFF2
143
CP4
ON
OFF
COM
AL
FA
FB
7.1.6
Adjusting the LCD
B61393E/06
The LCD has controllers for fine adjustment of the video signal.
The controllers are required for eliminating slight disagreements between
the NC unit and LCD. The controllers must be adjusted at installation or
when the display circuit hardware of the NC, display unit, or cable is
replaced to eliminate an error.
Never adjust any controllers other than those described below.
VR1
VRP1
SW1
(2) Adjustment
(a) Setting the mode and the horizontal position
By adjusting SW1, the mode and the horizontal position can be
changed as indicated in the table below. In inverted mode, black
characters are displayed on a white background. The default
setting is 9.
8level
4level
gray scale gray scale
Mode
Horizontal
position
Inverted
Inverted
8level
4level
gray scale gray scale
1 dot to the
right
Standard
1 dot to the
left
2 dots to
the left
B61393E/06
TM1
SW1
(2) Adjustment
(a) Setting the horizontal position
S By adjusting SW1, the horizontal position can be changed as
described below:
When SW1 is turned to the next position in the + direction, the
screen shifts to the right by one dot.
When SW1 is turned to the next position in the direction, the
screen shifts to the left by one dot.
S The entire screen can be displayed.
The entire screen display can be obtained by a single setting.
(b) Eliminating flicker
Flicker adjustment pin TM1 is used. Adjustment pin TM1 can be
set to either of positions A and B. Adjustment pin TM1 is
factoryset to the B position. If flicker is apparent, set adjustment
pin TM1 to the A position.
145
B61393E/06
7.2
CONNECTING THE
MDI UNIT
7.2.1
MDI Unit Interface
Control unit
MDI unit
Memory card
M3
KM1
(MR20RMD)
1
*KCM08
*KCM00
*KCM01
*SW06
*SW04
*SW02
*SW00
8
9
10
11
(MR20RFM)
*KCM02
*KCM03
*SW07
*SW05
12
*SW03
13
*SW01
14
*KCM04
*KCM08
15
*KCM05
*KCM00
16
*KCM06
*KCM01
17
*KCM07
*SW06
18
*SW04
19
*SW02
20
*SW00
H20.F H20.M
8
9
10
11
*KCM02
*KCM03
*SW07
*SW05
12
*SW03
13
*SW01
14
*KCM04
15
*KCM05
16
*KCM06
17
*KCM07
18
19
20
Cable wiring
*KCM08
*KCM00
*KCM01
*SW06
*SW04
*SW02
*SW00
*KCM02
*KCM03
*SW07
*SW05
*SW03
*SW01
*KCM04
*KCM05
*KCM06
*KCM07
(01)
(01)
(02)
(02)
(03)
(03)
(04)
(04)
(05)
(05)
(06)
(06)
(07)
(07)
(08)
(08)
(09)
(09)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(14)
(14)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
Shield
: A02B0050K803 (7 m) or A02B0098K803 (7 m)
146
*KCM08
*KCM00
*KCM01
*SW06
*SW04
*SW02
*SW00
*KCM02
*KCM03
*SW07
*SW05
*SW03
*SW01
*KCM04
*KCM05
*KCM06
*KCM07
B61393E/06
7.3
CONNECTING AN I/O
DEVICE
7.3.1
Reader/Punch Interface
CNC
Relay connector
(DBM25S)
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR20FH)
1
(TTY1)
(TTY2)
3
4
(TTY3)
ER
6
7
RD
SD
10 (0V)
11
14 +24V
15
16 CD
17 SG
18 DR
12
19 CS
13
20 RS
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
SG
CD
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
23
24
25
+24V
NOTE
The machine tool builder should provide the reader/punch
relay board and cable, or use a punch panel. A unified
shield cable must be used.
The following sections illustrate the connections to ASR33,
PPR, a portable tape reader, and the FANUC FLOPPY
CASSETTE.
147
7.3.2
B61393E/06
ASR33
CNC
M5 MR20FH
1
TTY1
TTY2
3
4
5
6
7
TTY3
8
9
10 0V
11
12
13
14 (+24V)
15
16
M5
17
18
19
20
NOTE
1 The connection cable is not available as an optional item of
the reader/punch interface. Use a unified shield cable.
2 When the ASR33 interface is used, set the reader/punch
interface parameters.
148
B61393E/06
(2) Signals
CNC
+5V
+15V
10K
Input command
information
560W
0.5W
TTY1
TTY3
0V
SN75463
Logic 0: 100 mA
Logic 1: 100 A
Logic 1
Logic 0
Start bit
Bits 1 to 8 (single character) transferred
Punch (print) of a single character 99msec%
9msec1%
149
B61393E/06
7.3.3
PPR Connection
Relaying connector signal layout
1
FG
SD
14
RD
15
RS
16
CS
17
DR
18
SG
19
10
11
20
21
22
23
ER
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
12
13
CD
24
25
+24V
CNC
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
1
2
3
6
7
RD
SD
10
4
5
ER
11
12
13
14 +24V
15
16 CD
PPR
FG
17 SG
18 DR
19 CS
Relaying
cable
20 RS
Accessory
for PPR
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
4 When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface
(baud rate is 4800 baud).
150
B61393E/06
7.3.4
Portable Tape Reader
Connection
Relaying connector signal layout
1
FG
14
SD
RD
15
16
RS
17
CS
DR
18
SG
19
10
11
20
21
22
23
ER
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
12
13
CD
24
25
+24V
CNC
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
1
2
3
6
7
RD
SD
10
4
5
ER
11
12
13
14 +24V
15
16 CD
17 SG
18 DR
19 CS
20 RS
Portable
tape
reader
FG
Relaying
cable
Accessory
for portable
tape reader
Plug receptacle
WF3012E (MATSUSHITA
ELECTRIC WORKS CO., LTD.)
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
4 When connecting the portable tape reader, set the corresponding parameter to use reader
puncher interface (baud rate is 4800 baud).
151
B61393E/06
7.3.5
FANUC FLOPPY
CASSETTE Connection
Relaying connector signal layout
1
FG
SD
14
RD
15
RS
16
17
CS
18
DR
SG
19
10
11
12
13
CD
20
21
22
ER
23
24
25
+24
CNC
Control unit
Relaying
cable
6
7
RD
SD
10
4
5
ER
11
12
13
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
14 +24V
FANUC
FLOPPY
CASSETTE
15
16 CD
FG
17 SG
18 DR
Accessory
for FLOPPY
CASSETTE
19 CS
20 RS
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface when connecting FANUC cassette.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 Connect the FANUC cassette to either M5 or M74.
Do not use both pins; the power capacity may exceed that of +24V and blow the fuse.
152
B61393E/06
7.3.6
Connection of Tape
Reader without Reels
Tape reader
CNC
DB-25S-T
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
1
2
3
6
7
RD
SD
14 +24V
15
ER
17 SG
11
18 DR
12
19 CS
13
20 RS
FG
SD
RD
Connector :
DB-25P
Lock metal
D110278
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
16 CD
10
4
5
DR
SG
16
18
19
20
21
9
10
11 RDY
12
15
17
JAPAN FCI
SMS3PK5
14
13
22
23
24
25
M3 screw terminal
200A
200B
200A
200B
Cable wiring
Control unit
SD
RD
ER
RS
CS
DR
CD
SG
(0V)
Tape reader
(9)
(3)
(8)
(2)
(5)
(6)
RD
SD
DR
(20)
(19)
(11)
(18)
RDY
(16)
(7)
(17)
SG
FG
(1)
FG
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
2 Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
153
B61393E/06
7.3.7
Connection of Tape
Reader with Reels
CNC
Tape reader
CD8 (MR20RM)
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
1
2
3
6
7
RD
SD
14 +24V
15
16 CD
10
4
5
ER
MR20LFH
13
14
ER
15
16
19 CS
13
12
3
5
18 DR
12
11
2
4
17 SG
11
20 RS
17 SG
RD
18 DR
SD
19 CS
10
20 RS
CP41
1
Cable wiring
Control unit
Tape reader
CD8
SD (9)
RD (8)
(9)
CS (5)
RS (20)
(19)
DR (19)
CD (18)
(18)
ER (16)
SG (17)
(0V)
(5)
RD
(8)
SD
CS
(20)
(17)
RS
DR
ER
SG
FG
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
2 Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
154
B61393E/06
7.3.8
RS232C Interface
Specification
RS232C Interface
signals
CNC
Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Recieve data)
RS (Request to Send)
CS (Enable to send)
ER (Ready)
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)
155
B61393E/06
Signal description of
RS232C interface
Signal RS232C
circuit
name number
SD
103
I/O
Description
Output Sending
data
Input
Stop bit
Start bit
ON
OFF
Receiving data
12345678
RD
104
RS
105
CS
106
Input
Sending When both this signal and the DR sigpermitted nal are set, the NC can send data.
If external device processing is delayed
by a punching operation, etc., NC data
sending can be stopped by turning off
this signal after sending two characters,
including the data being sent currently.
If this signal will not be used, make
sure to strap this signal circuit to the RS
signal circuit.
DR
107
Input
Data set
ready
ER
108.2
CD
109
SG
102
Signal
grounding
FG
101
Frame
grounding
Output Sending
request
When external device is ready to operate, this signal is set. This signal
should usually be connected to the signal indicating external device power
supply being on. (ER signal of external
device). See Note below.
The NC transfers data when this signal
is set. If the signals turned off during
data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the
DR signal will not be used, make sure
to strap this signal circuit to the ER signal circuit.
Signal
quality
signal
Since this signal is not used in connections with external device, the signal
circuit must be strapped, inside the
connecting cable, to the ER signal circuit.
NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
3V or lower
+3 or higher
Function
OFF
ON
Signal Condition
Marking
Spacing
156
B61393E/06
Transmission Method of
RS232C interface
Startstop
B1
B2
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Data bit
(8 bit including one parity bit)
Start bit
Codes
B3
Stop bits
(2 bits)
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
1
NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
B61393E/06
Table7.3.8
ISO code
Character
EIA code
4
3
4
1
Character
K
L
DEL
HT
LF or NL
CR
SP
.
$
>
Tab
Address N
Address O
Address P
Address R
Address S
Address T
Address U
Address X
?
ER
(247)
Address Z
Delete (cancel erroneous hole)
*
Tabulator
End of block
Carriage return
Space
/
Plus sign
Minus sign
158
&
Address Y
Address V
Address W
BS
Address L
Address Q
Address K
Address J
Address M
Address I
Del
Address G
Address F
Address E
Address H
Address D
Address C
Address B
Address A
Numeral 9
?
Numeral 8
Numeral 7
(245)
<
CR or EOB
SP
&
Numeral 6
Numeral 5
Numeral 3
Blank
(
)
NUL
BS
Q
S
Numeral 2
Numeral 1
Numeral 4
8
A
Numeral 0
Meaning
1
4
7
9
Decimal point
*
Sharp
Dollar symbol
Ampersand
Apostrophe
Asterisk
Comma
Semicolon
Equal mark
Question mark
Commerical at mark
Quotation mark
B61393E/06
NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 7.3.8.
Condition1
CR
o ....................
LF
: ....................
Condition1
Left parenthesis (of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis )of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7
when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.
NOTE
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output
from the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NC
tape.
110
11
(Max.)
159
=10 characters/second
B61393E/06
10ms or longer
100ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC1
CD3
DC1
SD(Output)
DC3
ER code
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer
160
B61393E/06
10ms or longer
100ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2
DC4
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
CS(Input)
Within 2 characters
1ms or longer
Fig. A
100ms or longer
10ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2
DC4
SD(Output)
DC3
DC1
RD(Input)
Within 10 characters
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
1ms or longer
Fig. B
161
B61393E/06
Connection between
RS232C interface and
external device
CNC
162
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
External device
side
B61393E/06
CNC
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
External device
side
Serial
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR
163
B61393E/06
7.3.9
Parameters Related to
the Reader/Punch
Interface
SETTING
#7
NFED
#6
0002
#7
NFED
#6
0012
#7
NFED
#6
0050
#5
#5
#5
#4
#4
#4
#3
#3
#3
RSASCI
#2
ASR33
#1
#2
ASR33
#1
#2
#1
#0
STP2
(I/O=0)
#0
STP2
(I/O=1)
#0
STP2
(I/O=2)
BRATE0
(I/O=0)
0553
BRATE1
(I/O=1)
0250
BRATE2
(I/O=2)
B61393E/06
#7
0038
#6
Set value
Baud rate
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
50
100
110
150
200
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
#5
RSCMD1 DEVFL1
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
(I/O=0)
RSCMD2 DEVFL2
DEVFL1
(DEVFL2)
Bubble Cassette
Floppy Cassete
New interface
165
B61393E/06
7.4
MANUAL PULSE
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
Control unit
M12 HONDA MR20RMD
1
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
HA1
HB1
10
11
12
14
15
16
J24
M3 screw terminal
17
18
+5V
+0V
HA1
HB1
19
13
20
HONDA
MR20LFH
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
HA2
HB2
10
11
12 HA3
13 HB3
14 0V
15 0V
J25
16 0V
17 +5V
M3 screw terminal
3
+5V
+0V
HA2
HB2
18 +5V
19 +5V
20
+5V
+0V
HA3
HB3
NOTE
Connection of Series 00 is different from above connection.
See Appendix J.
166
B61393E/06
Control unit
+5V
M12(4)
M12(5)
M12(6)
+5V
0V
M12(3)
HA1
M12(8)
HB1
M12(1)
M12(2)
HA1
M12(9)
HB1
+5V
M21(4)
M21(5)
M21(6)
+5V
0V
M21(3)
HA2
M21(8)
HB2
M21(1)
M21(2)
HA2
M21(9)
HB2
+5V
M21(17)
M21(18)
M21(19)
+5V
0V
M21(16)
HA3
M21(12)
HB3
M21(14)
M21(15)
HA3
M21(13)
HB3
167
B61393E/06
The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance from
causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2V (total for both the 0
V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.2 y 0.1
0.1 :
R:
m:
L:
R
m
2L
168
B61393E/06
7.5
HIGHSPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
(HA1)
(HB1)
10 (SVC)
11 (0V)
12
13
14 HSKIP
15
16
17
18
19
20
Control unit
+5V
Proximity switch
3.3K
HSKIP
M12(14)
RV
0V
M12(01 to 03)
Grounded by the
ground plate
NOTE
1 The M12 connector is shared by the analog spindle
interface and manual pulse generator interface.
2 The function is optional.
169
B61393E/06
Serial spindle
Memory card
JA7B
JA7A
COP5
Serial
spindle
amplifier
( series)
Motor
1st spindle
P/C
Optical fiber
Electric cable
JY2
JA7B
JA7A
Serial
spindle
amplifier
( series)
Serial spindle +
Rotary tool
Motor
2nd spindle
P/C
Optical I/O
Link adaptor
Memory card
JA7B
JA7A
COP5
Serial
spindle
amplifier
( series)
1st spindle
P/C
Optical fiber
Electric cable
Motor
JA7B
JA7A
Serial
spindle
amplifier
( series)
Motor
2nd spindle
Analog signal
M12 or M26
Inverter
Motor
Rotary tool
NOTE
Optical I/O Link adapter in
is required when serial
spindle amplifier is series.
In other cases it can be connected directly with optical fiber
170
B61393E/06
Analog spindle
Memory card
Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)
P/C
M27
M12 or M26
Analog signal
Analog spindle
amplifier
Motor
Spindle
171
8.1
B61393E/06
SERIAL SPINDLE
INTERFACE
Memory card
COP5
or
5th/6th axis
card
COP6
Light
To spindle motor
Serial spindle
amplifier
Light
To spindle motor
Electric signal
series spindle
amplifier module
Memory card
COP5
or
5th/6th axis card
COP6
FS0C
COP
Optical cable
K4X
*SIN
11
0V
SIN
12
0V
SIN
11
0V
*SIN
12
*SOUT 13
0V
0V
SOUT
13
SOUT
0V
14
0V
*SOUT 14
0V
15
0V
15
0V
16
0V
16
0V
17
17
8
9
18
+5V
10
+5V
19
20
9
+5V
18
+5V
10
Connector
PCRE20FA
Housing
PCRV20LA
+5V
19
20
+5V
Length designation
or A66L60010008#L2R003 (2m)
172
B61393E/06
*SIN
(1)
SIN
(2)
*SOUT
(3)
SOUT
(4)
+5V
(9)
+5V
(18)
+5V
(20)
0V
(11)
0V
(12)
0V
(13)
0V
(14)
0V
(15)
0V
(16)
Shield
173
(4)
*SOUT
(3)
SOUT
(2)
*SIN
(1)
SIN
(9)
+5V
(18)
+5V
(20)
+5V
(11)
0V
(12)
0V
(13)
0V
(14)
0V
(15)
0V
(16)
0V
8.2
ANALOG SPINDLE
INTERFACE
B61393E/06
The speed of the analog spindle is specified by analog voltage output. The
analog output for the first spindle can be output from pin 10 of M12 or
pin 7 of M26. Choose either pin.
Control unit
M12 (MR20RMD)
1
(0V)
(0V)
(0V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
(HA1)
(HB1)
10
SVC
11
0V
12
14
15
To spindle control
circuit
16
17
18
19
13
20
M26 (MR20RFD)
1
15
17
11
18
12
6
SVC
To spindle control
circuit
16
10
14
19
13
20
0V
Control unit
SVC
(Spindle speed command)
0V
Cable material
Recommended cable
Ground plate
NOTE
1 M12 is also used as the connector for the first manual pulse
generator.
2 In addition to the spindle speed analog voltage signal
(SVC), use the spindle enable signal (ENB). Use the same
cable as that indicted above.
174
B61393E/06
8.3
POSITION CODER
INTERFACE
MRE20RMD
M27
1
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
SC
15
*SC
16
PA
17
*PA
18
PB
19
*PB
Signal name
Description
SC, *SC
PA, *PA
PB, *PB
20
CNC
0V
(1)(2)(3)
+5V
(4)(5)(6)
PA
(16)
*PA
(17)
Position
coder input PB
(18)
*PB
(19)
SC
(14)
*SC
(15)
(K)
(H)
0V
+5V
Position coder
(A)
(N)
(C)
(R)
(B)
(P)
PA
*PA
PB
*PB
SC
*SC
NOTE
1 The current drain of the position coder is 0.35 A. Determine the number of 0V and +5V lines
to be connected so that the total voltage drop between the NC and position coder does not
exceed 0.2 V, total for both ways.
2 With the 0TTC, a second position coder can be used. Use the M29 connector of the 5th/6th
axis card. The M29 connector has the same pin assignment as the M27 connector.
When the second position coder is not used, connect the first position coder to M27 and M29
in parallel.
175
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
SERVO CONNECTIONS
176
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.1
This section describes the servo interface between the Series 0 and the
digital control AC servo amplifier and servo motor.
OUTLINE
For an explanation of each servo amplifier unit and servo motor, refer to
the relevant manual.
The Series 0 supports three types of axis control cards according to the
type of the pulse coder built into the servo motor or type of the servo
interface.
D Axis control card for A/Bphase pulse coders (Type A interface)
D Axis control card for serial pulse coders (Type A interface)
D Axis control card for type B interface
Axis control cards for serial pulse coders can also be connected to an
A/Bphase pulse coder.
NOTE
In a closed loop system using a separate pulse coder, the
axis control cards for the A/Bphase pulse coders and those
for serial pulse coders use different connectors for their
feedback cables.
D Connector names
Axis control card for A/Bphase pulse coders
Axis name
Command
Semi
closed
loop
Closed loop
Command
Feedback
Position
feedback
Velocity
feedback
Semi
closed
loop
Closed loop
Feedback
Position
feedback
Velocity
feedback
1st axis
M34
M35
M35
M36
M184
M185
M186
M185
2nd axis
M37
M38
M38
M39
M187
M188
M189
M188
3rd axis
M44
M45
M45
M46
M194
M195
M196
M195
4th axis
M47
M48
M48
M49
M197
M198
M199
M198
5th axis
M64
M65
M65
M66
M204
M205
M206
M205
6th axis
M67
M68
M68
M69
M207
M208
M209
M208
7th axis
M134
M135
M135
M136
M224
M225
M226
M225
8th axis
M137
M138
M138
M139
M227
M228
M229
M228
For the 0TTC, the first and second axes for tool post 2 correspond to the
fifth and sixth axes in the above table.
177
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
Closed loop
Command
Feedback
Position feedback
Velocity feedback
1st axis
JS1A
JFn
M186
JFn
2nd axis
JS2A
JFn
M189
JFn
3rd axis
JS3A
JFn
M196
JFn
4th axis
JS4A
JFn
M199
JFn
5th axis
6th axis
Not used ty
e B interface
type
7th axis
8th axis
When an axis control card for a type B interface is used, the JFn connector
on the servo amplifier side is used as the feedback or velocity feedback
connector. n varies with the servo amplifier being used. A type B
interface can be used for the first to fourth axes, but not for the fifth to
eighth axes.
D Semiclosed loop
system
Series 0 axis control
card
Command
Servo amplifier
Power
Feedback
Battery
unit
Pulse
coder
Servo
motor
The battery unit is not required when an incremental pulse coder is used.
178
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
D Semiclosed loop
system
Series 0 axis control
card
Command
Feedback
Servo amplifier
Power
Relay
unit
Battery
unit
D Semiclosed loop
system
Series 0 axis control
card
Command
Feedback
Pulse
coder
Servo
motor
Servo amplifier
Power
Submicron
detection board
Pulse
coder
179
Servo
motor
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
D Semiclosed loop
system
B61393E/06
Servo amplifier
Power
Feedback
Battery
unit
Pulse
coder
Servo
motor
The battery unit is not required when an incremental pulse coder is used.
Use a servo amplifier that supports a type B interface. When a servo amplifier
which supports both types of interface is used, set it to use the type B interface.
Servo amplifier
Power
Velocity feedback
Position feedback
Battery
unit
Separate
pulse coder
Pulse
coder
The battery unit is not required when an incremental pulse coder is used.
180
Servo
motor
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
Power
CN1
Velocity feedback
Position feedback
Relay
unit
Separate
pulse coder
Pulse
coder
Servo
motor
Battery
unit
Velocity feedback
Power
CN1
Submicron
detection
board
Pulse
coder
Servo
motor
Position feedback
Separate
pulse coder
Servo amplifier
Power
Velocity feedback
Position feedback
Battery
unit
Separate
pulse coder
Pulse
coder
Servo
motor
The battery unit is not required when a separate type incremental pulse coder is used.
181
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.2
This section describes each servo amplifier interface, taking that for the
first axis as an example.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
INTERFACE
9.2.1
S Series Servo Amplifier
Series 0 (control unit)
M34 or M184
(MR20RF)
CN1
(MR20RM)
01 *PWMAn
02 COMAn
03 *PWMBn
04 COMBn
05 *PWMCn
06 COMCn
07 *DRDYn
08
IRn
09
GDRn
10
ISn
11
GDSn
12 *MCONn
13
GNDn
14 *PWMDn
n:axis number
J21n
15 COMDn
15 COMDn
16 *PWMEn
16 *PWMEn
17 COMEn
17 COMEn
18 *PWMFn
18 *PWMFn
19 COMFn
19 COMFn
20
20
14 *PWMDn
08
IRn
09
GDRn
10
ISn
11
GDSn
12 *MCONn
13
GNDn
01 *PWMAn
02 COMAn
03 *PWMBn
04 COMBn
05 *PWMCn
06 COMCn
07 *DRDYn
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
12
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
12
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
IRn
GDRn
*PWMAn
COMAn
*PWMBn
COMBn
*PWMCn
COMCn
GNDn
*MCONn
ISn
GDSn
*PWMDn
COMDn
*PWMEn
COMEn
*PWMFn
COMFn
*DRDYn
Shield
Recommended cable material
A66L00010041
CAUTION
To protect the signals from external noise, assign the cables central pairs to each pair of current
feedback signal and ground signal (i.e., IRn and GDRn, and ISn and GDSn). Otherwise,
external noise may result in uneven feed or abnormal sound.
182
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.2.2
C Series Servo Amplifier
and Servo Amplifier
Module (Type A Interface)
14 *PWMDn
15 COMDn
02
16 *PWMEn
03 *PWMAn 13 *PWMDn
17 COMEn
04 COMAn
18 *PWMFn
05 *PWMBn 15 *PWMEn
19 COMFn
06 COMBn
20
07 *PWMCn 17 *PWMFn
01 *PWMAn
02 COMAn
03 *PWMBn
04 COMBn
05 *PWMCn
06 COMCn
07 *DRDYn
08
IRn
09
GDRn
10
ISn
11
GDSn
12 *MCONn
13
GNDn
GDRn
12
GDSn
14 COMDn
16 COMEn
08 COMCn
18 COMFn
09
19
10 *MCONn 20 *DRDYn
Connector: MR20LMH (HONDA, 20pin, male)
12
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
Shield
A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG10pairs)
183
*MCONn
ISn
GDSn
*PWMDn
COMDn
*PWMEn
COMEn
*PWMFn
COMFn
*DRDYn
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
CAUTION
To protect the signals from external noise, assign the cables central pairs to each pair of current
feedback signal and ground signal (i.e., IRn and GDRn, and ISn and GDSn). Otherwise,
external noise may result in uneven feed or abnormal sound.
9.2.3
a Servo Amplifier
Module (Type B
Interface) and b Servo
Amplifier Module
Servo Amplifier
Axis control card for type B
interface
JS1A
(PCREV20MDT)
01 IRn
11 ISn
02 GDRn
12 GDSn
03 :PWMAn 13 :ENBLn
04 0V
14 0V
05 :PWMCn 15 PDn
06 0V
16 :PDn
07 :PWMEn 17 PREQn
18 :PREQn
08 0V
09 :DRDYn 19 0V
10 :MCONn 20 0V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ISn
GDSn
:ENBLn
0V
PDn
:PDn
PREQn
:PREQn
0V
0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Shield
Ground plate
184
IRN
GDRN
:PWMAN
0V
:PWMCN
0V
:PWMEN
0V
:DRDYN
:MCONN
ISN
GDSN
:ENBLN
0V
PDN
:PDN
PREQN
:PREQN
0V
0V
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
NOTE
1 The total length of the cable between the CNC and amplifier
and that between the amplifier and motor shall not exceed
50m.
2 As the current feedback lines (IRn and ISn), use the middle
twisted pair of the recommended cable. If any other pair is
used, abnormal noise or oscillation may occur.
3 Use a servo unit which supports the typeB interface. When
using a servo unit which supports both the typeA and
typeB interfaces, select the typeB interface. For details,
refer to the manual supplied with the servo unit. If the
interface setting is incorrect, a servo alarm (AL401 V
READY OFF) will be issued.
185
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3
A/B PHASE PULSE
CODER INTERFACE
9.3.1
LowResolution A/B
Phase Pulse Coder
(2000P to 3000P)
(Builtin Incremental
Pulse Coder)
Series 0 (control unit)
M35 or M185
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
16
17
18
19
n: axis number
J22n
PCAn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
PCBn
Cn1
*PCAn
*PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
SHLD
+5V
+5V
Cn4
Cn8
0V
Cn2
OHnA
*PCBn
OHnB
0V
20
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(08)
(09)
(04, 05, 06)
(01, 02, 03)
Shield
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
: Others
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.1 mm2
Recommended cable specification Straight type A02B0074K802 (14m) or A02B0098K822 (14m)
Elbow type
A02B0074K803 (14m) or A02B0098K823 (14m)
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
186
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3.2
LowSpeed,
HighResolution A/B
Phase Pulse Coder
(10000P to 25000P, 12
m/min)
(Builtin Incremental
Pulse Coder)
Series 0 (control unit)
M35 or M185
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
n:axis number
J22n
14
PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
15
*PCZn
*PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
16
PCAn
Cn1
Cn2
Cn4
17
*PCAn
Cn8
+5V
0V
18
PCBn
SHLD
OHnA
OHnB
19
*PCBn
+5V
0V
20
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(08)
(09)
(04, 05, 06)
(01, 02, 03)
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.1 mm2
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
187
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3.3
HighSpeed,
HighResolution A/B
Phase Pulse Coder
(20000P to 30000P, 24
m/min)
(Builtin Incremental
Pulse Coder)
M35 or M185
(MR20RM)
CN1 (right)
(MR20RF)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
01
0V
15
*PCZn
02
0V
16
PCAn
03
0V
17 *PCAn
04
+5V
18
PCBn
05
+5V
19 *PCBn
06
+5V
20
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17 *PCAn
18
PCBn
19 *PCBn
20
(14)
(14)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
(18)
(18)
(19)
(19)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(08)
(08)
(09)
(09)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
188
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
CN1 (left)
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
(MS3102A2214P)
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
An
17
*An
Cn8
18
Bn
SHLD
19
PCZn
*PCZn
An
*An
Bn
*Bn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
*An
Bn
*Bn
PCZn
*PCZn
Cn1
Cn2
Cn4
+5V
0V
OHnA
OHnB
*Bn
+5V
0V
20
An
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(08)
(09)
(04, 05, 06)
(01, 02, 03)
Shield
Cable (when the cable length is 14 m or less)
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
189
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3.4
A/B Phase Pulse Coder
(Builtin Absolute
Pulse Coder)
D When using the relay
unit
Relay unit
M35 or M185
(MR20RM)
CF1A
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
01
0V
15
*PCZn
02
0V
16
PCAn
03
0V
17 *PCAn
04
+5V
18
PCBn
05
+5V
19 *PCBn
06
+5V
20
07
REQn
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17 *PCAn
18
PCBn
19 *PCBn
20
REQn
(14)
(14)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
(18)
(18)
(19)
(19)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(08)
(08)
(09)
(09)
(20)
(20)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
REQn
+5V
0V
Shield
Cable material :
:
:
:
+5V
0V
Cn1 to Cn8
Others
Three or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2
Three or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
190
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
Relay unit
CF1B
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0VA
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+6VA
07
(MS3102A2214P)
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
J8n
14
PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
15
*PCZn
*PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
16
PCAn
Cn1
Cn2
Cn4
17
*PCAn
Cn8
+5V
0V
18
PCBn
OHnA
OHnB
19
*PCBn
REQn
+6VA
0VA
20
REQn
(14)
(E)
(15)
(F)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(B)
(18)
(C)
(19)
(D)
(10)
(K)
(11)
(J)
(12)
(H)
(13)
(G)
(08)
(P)
(09)
(R)
(20)
(S)
(04, 05)
(L)
(01, 02)
(M)
(06)
(T)
(03)
(U)
(N)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
REQn
+5V
0V
+6VA
0VA
SHLD
Shield
Cable material :
:
:
:
For each, two or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2
+5V, 0V
+6VA, 0VA For each, one or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2
Cn1 to Cn8
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
Others
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
A06B6050K055 (14m)
A06B6050K056 (14m)
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways,
including the cable between the axis control card and the relay unit.
191
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
D Direct connection
M35 or M185
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0VB
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
+6VB
n: axis number
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
16
17
J22nB
PCAn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
18
PCBn
19
*PCBn
20
REQn
(MS3102A2214P)
B
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
Cn1
Cn2
Cn4
Cn8
+5V
0V
SHLD
OHnA
OHnB
REQn
+6VB
0VB
(14)
(E)
(15)
(F)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(B)
(18)
(C)
(19)
(D)
(10)
(K)
(11)
(J)
(12)
(H)
(13)
(G)
(08)
(P)
(09)
(R)
(20)
(S)
(L)
(01, 02)
(M)
(07)
(T)
(03)
(U)
(N)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
REQn
+5V
0V
+6VB
0VB
SHLD
Shield
Cable material :
:
:
:
:
:
+5V,
+6VB
0V
0VB
Cn1 to Cn8
Others
A02B0096K801 (14m)
A02B0096K802 (14m)
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
192
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3.5
LowResolution A/B
Phase Separate Pulse
Coder (2000P to 3000P)
(Separate Incremental
Pulse Coder)
M36 or M185
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
n: axis number
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
J24n
14
15
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
PCAn
*PCAn
16
PCAn
17
*PCAn
18
PCBn
19
*PCBn
PCBn
Cn1
*PCBn
SHLD
+5V
Cn4
Cn8
0V
Cn2
OHnA
OHnB
0V
+5V
20
(MS3102A2029PW)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(D)
(18)
(B)
(19)
(E)
(10)
(M)
(11)
(L)
(12)
(P)
(13)
(C)
(08)
(R)
(09)
(S)
(J, K)
(N, T)
(H)
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.1 mm2
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
193
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
M35 or M186
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
n: axis number
08
09
10
11
12
13
J23n
(MS3102A2029P)
14
PCZn
PCAn
PCBn
+5V
15
*PCZn
*PCAn
*PCBn
PCZn
16
PCAn
*PCZn
+5V
17
*PCAn
+5V
18
PCBn
0V
0V
19
*PCBn
0V
M
R
20
Cable connection
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
+5V
0V
Connector: MS3106B2029S or
MS3108B2029S
(14)
(F)
(15)
(G)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(D)
(18)
(B)
(19)
(E)
(C, J, K)
(N, P, T)
(H)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
+5V
0V
G
Shield
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.1 mm2
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
194
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3.6
HighSpeed,
HighResolution A/B
Phase Separate Pulse
Coder (20000P to
30000P, 24 m/min)
(Separate Incremental
Pulse Coder)
M36 or M185
(MR20RM)
CN1 (right)
(MR20RF)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
01
0V
15
*PCZn
02
0V
16
PCAn
03
0V
17 *PCAn
04
+5V
18
PCBn
05
+5V
19 *PCBn
06
+5V
20
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17 *PCAn
18
PCBn
19 *PCBn
20
(14)
(14)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
(18)
(18)
(19)
(19)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(08)
(08)
(09)
(09)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
195
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
M35 or M186
(MR20RM)
CN2 (right)
(MR20RF)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
11
12
13
14
PCZn
01
0V
15
*PCZn
02
0V
16
PCAn
03
0V
17 *PCAn
04
+5V
18
PCBn
05
+5V
19 *PCBn
06
+5V
20
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17 *PCAn
11
18
12
PCBn
19 *PCBn
13
20
(14)
(14)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
(18)
(18)
(19)
(19)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(08)
(08)
(09)
(09)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
196
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
OHnA
09
OHnB
10
Cn8
11
Cn4
12
Cn2
13
Cn1
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
An
17
*An
Cn8
18
Bn
19
*Bn
An
*An
Bn
*Bn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
Bn
*Bn
PCZn
*PCZn
Cn1
Cn2
Cn4
+5V
0V
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
Connector
Cable connection
*PCZn
*An
20
PCZn
An
MS3106B2214S or
MS3108B2214S
(14)
(E)
(15)
(F)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(B)
(18)
(C)
(19)
(D)
(10)
(K)
(11)
(J)
(12)
(H)
(13)
(G)
(08)
(P)
(09)
(R)
(L, T)
(M, U)
(N)
PCZn
*PCZn
An
*An
Bn
*Bn
Cn8
Cn4
Cn2
Cn1
OHnA
OHnB
+5V
0V
SHLD
Shield
When the cable length is 14 m or less
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
For each, six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.2 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
197
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.3.7
A/B Phase Separate
Pulse Coder (Separate
Absolute Pulse Coder)
D Velocity feedback
connection
D Position feedback
connection
Relay unit
M35 or M186
(MR20RM)
CF1A
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
PCZn
01
0V
15
*PCZn
02
0V
16
PCAn
03
0V
17 *PCAn
04
+5V
18
PCBn
05
+5V
19 *PCBn
06
+5V
20
07
REQn
08
09
10
14
PCZn
15
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17 *PCAn
11
18
12
PCBn
19 *PCBn
13
20
REQn
(14)
(14)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
(18)
(18)
(19)
(19)
(20)
(20)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
REQn
+5V
0V
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: Cn1 to Cn8
: Others
Six or more vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2
Vinylcoated wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
A02B0074K804 (2m)
198
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
Relay unit
CF1B
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+6VA
07
(MS3102A2214P)
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
15
*PCZn
*PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17
*PCAn
+5V
18
PCBn
SHLD
19
*PCBn
REQn
20
REQn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
REQn
+5V
0V
+6VA
0VA
0V
R
+6VA
0VA
Cable connection
PCZn
(14)
(E)
(15)
(F)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(B)
(18)
(C)
(19)
(D)
(20)
(S)
(04, 05)
(L)
(01, 02)
(M)
(06)
(T)
(03)
(U)
(N)
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
REQn
+5V
0V
+6VA
0VA
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V
: +6VA, 0VA
: Others
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways,
including the cable between the axis control card and the relay unit.
199
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
D Direct connection
M35 or M186
(MR20RM)
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
+6VB
(MS3102A2214P)
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
15
*PCZn
*PCBn
PCZn
*PCZn
16
PCAn
17
*PCAn
+5V
18
PCBn
SHLD
19
*PCBn
REQn
20
REQn
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
+5V
0V
+6VB
0VB
0V
R
+6VB
0VB
Cable connection
REQn
(20)
(S)
(14)
(E)
(15)
(F)
(16)
(A)
(17)
(B)
(18)
(C)
(19)
(D)
(L)
(01, 02)
(M)
(07)
(T)
(03)
(U)
(N)
REQn
PCZn
*PCZn
PCAn
*PCAn
PCBn
*PCBn
+5V
0V
+6VB
0VB
SHLD
Shield
Cable material :
:
:
:
+6VB, 0VB
+5V, 0V
Others
REQn
One or more wires each haveing a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
Two or more wires each haveing a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
One or more wires each haveing a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
200
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
Input signal
requirements
A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal
Td
Td
Td
Tp
Z phase signal
Tw
Tw 1/4 frequency of A phase or B phase
201
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
Time requirements
B61393E/06
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF21
to JF24
TD 0.28 sec
The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and
B phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when the
potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B,
when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower
than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 s. The period and pulse
width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above
requirements.
Receiver circuit
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS, INC.: SN75115
PCA
Aphase
signal
110
*PCA
560
5V
Relationship between
the direction of rotation
of the servo motor and
that of the separate
pulse coder
If the separate pulse coder rotates in the opposite direction to that of the
servo motor, reconnect the interface cable of the separate pulse coder as
described below.
(1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
(2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
202
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.4
SERIAL PULSE
CODER INTERFACE
9.4.1
Serial Pulse Coder A or
B
Series 0C (control unit)
Axis control card for serial pulse coder
M185
(MR20RM)
14
REQ
15
*REQ
16
SD
17
*SD
18
19
20
08
09
10
11
12
13
Pulse coder
(MS3102A2214P)
J23n
01
0V
*SD
02
0V
REQ
03
0VB
04
+5V
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
+6VB
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
+6VB
SD
SHLD
P
T
*REQn
0V
R
+6VB
0VB
Connector: MS3106B2214S or
MS3108B2214S
Cable connection
SD
(16)
(A)
(17)
(B)
(14)
(E)
(15)
(F)
(04)
(L)
(05)
SD
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
(06)
(01)
(M)
(02)
(03)
(U)
(07)
(T)
(N)
Shield
0V
0VB
+6VB
SHLD
Two or more wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
(when the cable length is 14 m or less)
One or more wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
Twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
203
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.4.2
Serial Pulse Coder C
(Model 0S or Above)
Series Motor
(3/3000 to 150/2000)
Series 0C (control unit)
Axis control card for serial pulse coders
M185
(MR20RM)
14
REQ
15
*REQ
16
SD
17
*SD
18
19
20
08
09
10
11
12
13
Pulse coder
(MS3102A2229P)
J23n
01
0V
SD
02
0V
*SD
REQ
03
0VB
*REQn
+5V
04
+5V
+5V
05
+5V
0V
06
+5V
0VB
07
+6VB
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
+6VB
(16)
(A)
(17)
(D)
(14)
(F)
(15)
(G)
(04)
(J)
(05)
(K)
(06)
(01)
(N)
(02)
(T)
(03)
(S)
(07)
(R)
(H)
Shield
0V
+6VB
Connector: MS3106A2029SW or
MS3108B2029SW
Cable connection
SD
SHILD
SD
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0VB
+6VB
SHLD
Two or more wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
(when the cable length is 14 m or less)
One or more wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
Twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
204
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.4.3
Serial Pulse Coder C
(Model 10S to 00SP)
Series Motor
(1/3000, 2/2000, or
2/3000)
Series 0C (control unit)
Axis control card for serial pulse coders
M185
(MR20RM)
14
REQ
15
*REQ
16
SD
17
18
19
20
*SD
01
08
09
10
11
12
13
Pulse coder
0V
K22
REQ
*REQ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
+6VB
0V
9
10
0V
0V
03
0V
SHLD
+5V
REQ
05
+5V
*REQ
06
+5V
07
+6VB
+5V
(12)
(17)
(13)
(14)
(5)
(15)
(6)
(04)
(8)
(05)
(15)
(06)
(01)
(1)
(02)
(2)
(3)
(03)
(10)
(07)
(14)
(4)
Shield
: +6VB, 0VB
: SD, *SD, REQ, *REQ
11
SD
13
*SD
14
+6VB
15
+5V
(16)
0VB
12
04
Cable connection
*SD
0V
02
SD
SD
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
0VB
+6VB
SHLD
Two or more wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
(when the cable length is 14 m or less)
One or more wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
Twisted pair wires each having a crosssectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5, total for both ways.
205
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
9.5
CONNECTION OF THE
BATTERY UNIT FOR
AN ABSOLUTE
PULSE CODER
B61393E/06
The battery unit for an absolute pulse coder can be connected to the Series
0 in either of two ways: via a relay unit or directly.
9.5.1
Connection Using the
Relay Unit
Relay unit
Battery unit
CA7
01
02
03
04
+6VB
05
06
0V
Cable connection
Battery unit
Relay unit
M3
terminal
(1)
+6VB
(6)
0V
Shield
NOTE
1 A single relay unit can distribute power from the battery to
up to four pulse coders.
2 A single battery unit can supply power to up to six pulse
coders.
3 Replace the battery with a new one once a year.
206
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.5.2
Connection without a
Relay Unit
The battery unit can be connected directly to each axis control card, from
which the battery power is distributed to each pulse coder.
Battery connector name
1st4th axis control card
5th/6th axis
control card
7th/8th axis
control card
1st
axis
5th
axis
7th
axis
Connector
name
2nd
axis
3rd
axis
4th
axis
CPA9
6th
axis
CPA10
8th
axis
CPA11
For the Series 0TTC, the first and second axes for tool post 2 correspond
to the fifth and sixth axes in the above table.
Battery unit
02
+6VB
0V
03
Cable connection
Battery unit
Relay unit
M3
terminal
(1)
+6VB
(2)
0V
Shield
NOTE
1 A single battery unit can supply power to up to six pulse
coders.
2 Replace the battery with a new one once a year.
207
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
9.6
HANDLING OF
UNUSED AXES
(CLAMPING)
B61393E/06
The user can select any of the supported axes as the axes to be controlled.
A cable for a servo amplifier or motor need not be connected to those axes
that are not to be used. Leaving the connector for an unused axis open,
however, causes the CNC to enter a servo alarm state. This section
describes how to handle (clamp) unused axes.
NOTE
Servo parameters must also be set for clamped axes. Set
the same servo parameters as those for any axis to be used.
9.6.1
Handling of the
Command Connectors
of Unused Axes
(7)
*DRDYn
(12)
Jumper
*MCONn
208
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
B61393E/06
9.6.2
Handling of the
Feedback Connectors
of Unused Axes
D When an series servo
motor is not used
(4, 5, 6)
+5V
(16)
Resistor
1/4 W, 100W
(18)
Resistor
1/4 W, 100W
PCAn
PCBn
PCZn
*PCAn
*PCBn
*PCZn
(14)
Resistor
1/4 W, 100W
(17)
(19)
(15)
(1, 2, 3)
0V
OH1n
OH2n
(8)
(9)
The above example sets PCAn, PCBn, and PCZn to high and
*PCAn, *PCBn, and *PCZn to low. The reverse connection is
also allowed: PCAn, PCBn, and PCZn to low and *PCAn,
*PCBn, and *PCZn to high.
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
9.7
COMBINATION OF
AXIS CARDS FOR
SERIAL PULSE
CODERS AND
DIGITAL SERVO
FUNCTIONS
Name
B61393E/06
This section describes the supported combinations of axis cards for serial
pulse coders and digital servo functions.
A02B0098H045 (A16B22000391)
A02B0098H046 (A16B22000390)
A02B0098J030 (A16B22000800)
A02B0098J033 (A16B22000800)
A02B0098J199 (A16B22000791)
A02B0098J198 (A16B22000790)
9046
9040
9030
(1)
(2)
(3)
<Combination of axis cards for serial pulse coders and digital servo
function series 9046 (1)>
Use this combination when using an AC servo motor series as the servo
motor. A motor of the AC servo motor series cannot be used together
with a motor of another series.
<Combination of axis cards for serial pulse coders and digital servo
function series 9040 (2)>
Use this combination when using other than an AC servo motor series
as the servo motor. This combination does not, however, apply to those
motors listed in (3) below. Serial pulse coders and A/Bphase pulse
coders can be used together, provided the motors are used in a valid
configuration.
<Combination of axis cards for serial pulse coders and digital servo
function series 9030 (3)>
Use this combination when using any of the following motors as the servo
motor. These motors cannot be used together with those for serial pulse
coders, or with series motors.
Motor model
20 10
Motor No.
210
10
30
6L(A06B0563BXXX)
10
13
17
B61393E/06
10
211
10.1
B61393E/06
This describes the connecting with the analog interface card. It is possible
to connect 4 analog input channels, 2 spindles and 1 position coder.
OUTLINE
Series 0C
L/A
15V power cable
(connection to FANUC)
CPB1
CPA6
Rear:
First M121
Second M122
Front:
First M123
Second M124
Interface connector
M121:
M122:
M123:
M124:
212
B61393E/06
10.2
ANALOG INPUT
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Number of inputs
Analog of input
Digital output
Input/output response
Analog input
Digital output
+10 V
+2000
+5 V or +20 mA
+1000
0 V or 0 mA
5 V or 20 mA
1000
10 V
2000
Resolution ability
5 mV, 20A
Total heat
Under "0.5%
Under 1 mS
Maximum input
voltage/current
"15 V,
Insulation
Noninsulated
Connector
"40 mA
NOTE
This response time is the delay time of the card only. The
actual response time will be the value derived from adding
the scan time decided by the system configuration to the
above described value.
213
B61393E/06
10.3
INSTALLATION
POSITION
214
B61393E/06
10.4
CONNECTION
BETWEEN
MACHINES
M121 : MR20RFD
14
1
8
15
9
16
For spindle 1, 2
10
4
17
11
18 0V
V02
12
19
13
20 0V
V01
M122 : MR20RFD
1
14
8
15
9
16
For spindle 2
10
4
17
11
18
12
19
13
7
V02
20
0V
14
IP1
15
IP2
16
IP3
17
IP4
M123 : MR20RFD
1
2
3
4
VP1
8
COM1
COM2
VP2
VP3
10 COM3
VP4
11 COM4
12
13
7
18
19
20
M124 : MR20RMD
1
0V
14
PCZ
15
*PCZ
16
PCA
17
*PCA
18
PCB
19
*PCB
8
2
3
0V
9
0V
+5V
+5V
10
11
12
+5V
13
20
215
DV1
V01 M121(7)
B61393E/06
Spindle 1
0V M121(20)
0V M121(18)
Spindle 2
DV2
V02 M122(7)
0V M122(20)
DV1, DV2 :
RV
RV
RV
MAX.10V, 2mA
Zout 100W
PCZ
M124(14)
*PCZ
M124(15)
PCA
M124(16)
*PCA
M124(17)
PCB
M124(18)
*PCB
M124(19)
+5V
+5V
Position coder
M124
(4, 5, 6)
0V M124
(1, 2, 3)
NOTE
It is possible to make the connection cables for spindles 1 and 2 into one cable by including
the spindle 1 connection cable so as to destroy the spindle 2 connection cable.
216
B61393E/06
M123
Voltage input
VP1
IP1
14
COM1
Channel #0
0 to
10V
1MW
1MW
250W
VP2
Channel #1
1MW
15
IP2
COM2
1MW
Multiplexer
250W
Voltage input
VP3
0 to
20mA
Channel #2
1MW
IP3
16
Note
COM3
10
1MW
250W
Be certain to compress
VPnIPn at voltage input.
VP4
Channel #3
1MW
IP4
COM4
17
11
1MW
250W
NOTE
Use a 2 core pair shield cable for the connection cable.
217
AMP
A/D
Converter
11
B61393E/06
218
B61393E/06
11.1
OUTLINE
Name
SUB CPU card
Remarks
Included in the multiaxis
card. The fifth and sixth
axes can be controlled as
PMC axes.
Connection slot
SUB
SP
Some remote buffer cards can also be used for the FANUC DNC2
interface. FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol which enables the
exchange of a wide range of data between the CNC and a personal
computer which is connected to the CNC via the RS232C interface. Its
hardware connection is the same as that for the remote buffer. For its
specifications and other information, refer to the FANUC DNC2
Descriptions (B61992).
Table 11.1 (b) lists three remote buffer software functions.
219
B61393E/06
Highspeed
remote buffer A
Highspeed
remote buffer B
Protocol A
Available
Available
Available
Extended protocol A
Available
Available
Available
Protocol B
Available
Available
Available
NC format data
Binary data
NC format data
RS232C
or RS422
RS422
RS422
For RS422
800m (9600 bps max.)
50m (19.2 kbps min.)
For RS422
800m (9600 bps max.)
50m (19.2 kbps min.)
For RS422
800m (9600 bps max.)
50m (19.2 kbps min.)
15m/min
12m/min
Data format
Interface
RS232C baud rate
NOTE
1 Protocol A is the handshake system that repeats data transfer between two communicating
devices.
2 Extended protocol A is almost the same system as protocol A except that it can transfer the NC
program at high speed.
3 Protocol B is the system that controls communication between two devices by control codes
output from the remote buffer.
220
B61393E/06
11.2
INSTALLING TO THE
P.C. BOARD
11.2.1
Installing to the P.C.
Board in Case of
Control Unit A
As shown in the figure below, install the remote buffer card into the left
side of the master printed circuit board. The (A02B0098K121) flat
metal bracket for the remote buffer card (A02B0098K121) contains the
two flat cables and bracket.
JB2
JB1
JA2 JA1
11.2.2
Installing to the P.C.
Board in Case of
Control Unit B
Install the remote buffer card to the slot SP (CS1) according to above
mentioned Table 11.1 (a).
221
B61393E/06
11.3
OUTLINE DRAWING
11.3.1
Outline Drawing in
Case of Control Unit A
222
11.3.2
Outline Drawing in
Case of Control Unit B
Slot SUB
Slot SP
223
B61393E/06
11.4
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE
(RS232C)
Remote buffer card
M77:MR20MH
1
2
3
RD
SD
11
12
6
7
8
10
SG
HONDA TSUSHIN
MR20FH
13
DBM25S
14
15
FG
16 CD
SD
17 ER
RD
18 DR
RS
19 CS
CS
DR
SG
CD
20 RS
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 ER
21
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Host side
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
NOTE
When using the FANUC DNC2 interface with an IBM PCAT as the host computer, the host
computer negates its RS (to low) upon transition to the reception phase. In this case, therefore,
CS on the CNC side must be connected to ER on the CNC side.
224
B61393E/06
Cable wiring
RD
DR
CS
CD
SD
ER
RS
SG
18
20
19
16
17
20
SD
ER
RS
CD
RD
DR
CS
SG
FG
Shield
225
B61393E/06
11.5
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE (RS422)
Remote buffer card
M73:MR20MH
1
SD
*SD
TR(ER)
*TR(*ER)
RS
*RS
SG
TT
*TT
14 CS
10 RD
11 *RD
12 DM(DR)
13
*DM(*DR)
SD
*SD
TR(ER)
*TR(*ER)
RS
*RS
SG
10 RD
11 *RD
12 DM(DR)
13 *DM(*DR)
17
18 RT
RD
19 *RT
RS
RT
CS
SD
10
14 CS
11 DM
15 *CS
12 TR
16
13
17
14
18
15
19
16
20
17 TT
22 *SD
23
24 *RD
25 *RS
26 *RT
27 *CS
28
29 *DM
30 *TR
31
32
33
34
18
19 SG
Conceptional diagram of
signal connection
20
21
FG
16
20
15 *CS
M77:MR20MH
1
HONDA TSUSHIN
MR20FH
35 *TT
36
37
The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and host
computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential signal
transmission standard RS422, two wires of signal lines are used for those
signals.
Host side
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
TR
TR
DM
DM
TT
TT
RT
RT
SG
SG
FG
226
B61393E/06
Actual example of
RS422 signal wiring
Cable wiring
RD
*RD
RT
*RT
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
SG
SD
*SD
TT
*TT
RS
*RS
TR
*TR
10
11
22
18
17
19
35
14
15
25
12
12
13
30
19
24
26
27
11
29
1
SD
*SD
TT
*TT
RS
*RS
TR
*TR
SG
RD
*RD
RT
*RT
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
FG
Shield
NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 The connection of TT, *TT, RT, and *RT is required only
when an external clock is used.
3 When using an external clock, connect the cable to the M73
connector. Either the M73 or M77 connector can be used
if an external clock is not used.
4 The M77 connector is also used for the RS232C interface.
Those pins for which nothing is indicated in the connector
table must be left open.
227
B61393E/06
D Description of RS422
interface signals
Signal name
Input/output
Description
SD
103
Output
RD
104
Input
RS
105
Output
Request to send
The remote buffer uses this signal to post reception enabled status. The remote buffer can receive data while
both this signal and the TR signal are set to ON.
CS
106
Input
Clear to send
This signal is used to check whether the host computer is
busy. The remote buffer assumes that the host computer
can receive data if both this signal and the DM signal are
set to ON.
TR
108.2
Output
Terminal ready
This signal, if set to ON, indicates that the remote buffer
is ready for operation. In other words, the SD signal is valid only while this signal is set to ON.
RR
109
Input
Receiver ready
This signal, if set to ON, indicates that the host computer
can transmit data to the remote buffer. When this signal
is not used, always connect it to the TR signal on the remote buffer.
TT
113
Output
Transmission timing
The transmission clock for the remote buffer is output using this signal. When a baud rate of 38400 or higher is
used, always connect this signal to the RT signal on the
host computer.
RT
115
Input
Reception timing
The reception clock for the remote buffer is input using this
signal. When a baud rate of 38400 or higher is used, always connect this signal to the TT signal on the host computer.
SG
102
Signal ground
FG
101
Protective ground
Transmitted data
Received data
NOTE
The ON and OFF states of the signals are defined as follows:
Function
Signal Condition
Driver
A< B
A> B
OFF
ON
Marking
Spacing
A
A
Receiver
B
228
B61393E/06
11.6
CONNECTION TO
BATTERY UNIT
Japan FCI
SMS3PWS-5
Battery unit
Remote buffer
CPA8
1
M4 screw terminal
2
0V
4.5V
4.5V
0V
Connect the remote buffer to the battery unit on the memory printed
circuit board, using the supplied cable.
NOTE
The terminal block on the battery unit uses screw terminals.
To connect the battery cable for the remote buffer to these
terminals, first disconnect the battery cable for the memory
printed circuit board or other components, with the CNC
power turned on. Disconnecting the battery cable while the
CNC power is turned off will result in the loss of the data,
such as memories, stored on the remote buffer.
229
12
B61393E/06
DNC1 INTERFACE
230
B61393E/06
12.1
OUTLINE
Name
Drawing number
B61782E
12.2
ORDER
SPECIFICATIONS
Name
Order specification
Remarks
A13B0156C100
A13B0156C200
A total of 2 resistors
necessary for the whole
system.
CAUTION
When mounting the DNC1 card on control unit A, check
whether the FANUC Series 0C uses a 16bit or 32bit
master PC board.
Avoid connecting a 16bit DNC1 card to a 32bit master PC
board, or a 32bit DNC1 card to 16bit master PC board.
If the control unit is tuned on while the wrong DNC1 card is
connected to the master PC board, a short circuit will occur
in the control unit. The control unit will be damaged.
NOTE
Select an appropriate power supply, referring to Chapter 5,
Power Supply Unit.
231
B61393E/06
12.3
EXTERNAL
CONFIGURATION OF
MOUNTING
12.3.1
External Configuration
of Mounting for Control
Section A
DNC1 card
6M5
installation
port
232
B61393E/06
12.3.2
External Configuration
of Mounting for Control
Section B
4M5
installation port DNC1 card
233
B61393E/06
12.4
PRINTED BOARD
MOUNTING
12.4.1
Printed Circuit Board
Mounting for Control
Section A
Install the DNC1 card on the lefthand side of the master printed circuit
board, as illustrated below. Two plait cables and sheet metal are included
in control section A assembly sheet metal (A02B0098K121).
DNC1 card
JB2
JB1
JA2 JA1
12.4.2
Printed Circuit Board
Mounting for Control
Section B
234
B61393E/06
12.5
CONNECTION
DRAWING
12.5.1
Overall Connection
Example for Mode 1
(Multipoint)
Terminal resistor unit 1
Tap 1
Primary station
FDMate
K1
2
CD3
K2
3
No.1
K3
CD 3
Secondary
station
FS0C
Tap 2
2
K2
3
No.2
K3
CD 3
Secondary
station
FS0C
Tap 3
K2
3
No.3
K3
CD 3
Tap 4
3
Terminal resistor unit2
235
Secondary
station
FS0C
B61393E/06
NOTE
1 As shown in the drawing, the number of taps necessary accord with the number of stations.
2 Connectors 1, 2 and 3 in any one tap have the same interface and therefore it does not matter
where the connection is made.
3 As shown in the drawing, a terminal resistor unit is necessary at both ends of the tap of the whole
system.
4 Signal wiring for cables K2, K3 is the same but differs for cable K1.
Refer to the next page. Note however that the maximum wiring length for K2 and K3 are
different.
Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B61782E.
12.5.2
Detailed Drawing of
Connector for Mode 1
(Multipoint)
D Primary station printed
circuit board side
connector (CD3)
MR20RMD (MALE)
14
08
15
09
10 TRD2(+)
17
TRD2()
18
12
13
TRD1()
04
05
07
20
D Tap connector
(1, 2, 3)
02
06
19
TRD1(+)
03
16
11
01
SG
MR20RMD (MALE)
14
08
15
09
10 TRD1(+)
17
18
12
19
13
20
236
TRD2(+)
02
TRD2()
03
16
11
01
TRD1()
04
05
06
07
SG
B61393E/06
12.5.3
Detailed Drawing of
Connection Cable for
Mode 1 (Multipoint)
Primary station side
Tap side
Detailed drawing of cable K1
H20.F
TRD1
TRD1
TRD2
TRD2
(+)
()
(+)
()
SG
H20.F
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(07)
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(07)
TRD2
TRD2
TRD1
TRD1
SG
(+)
()
(+)
()
Tap side
H20.F
TRD2
TRD2
TRD1
TRD1
(+)
()
(+)
()
SG
H20.F
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(07)
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(07)
TRD2
TRD2
TRD1
TRD1
SG
(+)
()
(+)
()
Connect an earth wire more than 5.5m2 between the control apparatuses
that are connected by the DNC1 signal cable.
237
B61393E/06
12.5.4
Overall Connection
Example for Mode 2
(Pointtopoint)
Terminal resistor unit 1
Tap 1
Station
FDMate
K4
CD3
K5
3
Station
FS0C
K6
CD 3
Tap 2
3
Terminal resistor unit 2
NOTE
1 As shown in the drawing, the number of taps necessary accord with the number of stations.
2 Connectors 1, 2 and 3 in any one tap have the same interface and therefore it does not matter
where the connection is made.
3 As shown in the drawing, a terminal resistor unit is necessary at both ends of the tap of the
station.
4 Signal wiring for cables K5, K6 is the same but differs for cable K4.
Refer to the 12.5.6. Note however that the maximum wiring length for K5 and K6 are different.
Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B61782E.
238
B61393E/06
12.5.5
Detailed Drawing of
Connector for Mode 2
(Pointtopoint)
D Station printed circuit
board side connector
(CD3)
D Tap connector (1, 2, 3)
MR20RMD (MALE)
14
15
01
CS
08
TT
09
*TT
10
RD
11
*RD
12
DM
13
*DM
*CS
16
17
18
19
20
239
RT
*RT
02
SD
*SD
03
ER
04
*ER
05
RS
06
*RS
07
SG
B61393E/06
12.5.6
Detailed Drawing of
Connection Cable for
Mode 2
(Pointtopoint)
Station side
Tap side
Detailed drawing of cable K4
H20.F
SD
*SD
RD
*RD
TT
*TT
RT
*RT
RS
*RS
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
TR
*TR
SG
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(08)
(09)
(18)
(19)
(05)
(06)
(14)
(15)
(12)
(13)
(03)
(04)
(07)
H20.F
(01) SD
(02) *SD
(10) RD
(11) *RD
(08)
TT
(09) *TT
(18)
RT
(19) *RT
(05) RS
(06) *RS
(14) CS
(15) *CS
(12) DM
(13) *DM
(03) TR
(04) *TR
(07) SG
240
B61393E/06
Tap side
H20.F
SD
*SD
RD
*RD
TT
*TT
RT
*RT
RS
*RS
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
TR
*TR
SG
H20.F
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(08)
(09)
(18)
(19)
(05)
(06)
(14)
(15)
(12)
(13)
(03)
(04)
(07)
(01)
(02)
(10)
(11)
(08)
(09)
(18)
(19)
(05)
(06)
(14)
(15)
(12)
(13)
(03)
(04)
(07)
SD
*SD
RD
*RD
TT
*TT
RT
*RT
RS
*RS
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
TR
*TR
SG
NOTE
Connect an earth wire more than 5.5m2 between the control apparatuses that are connected
by the DNC1 signal cable.
241
B61393E/06
12.6
EXTERNAL
CONFIGURATION OF
TAP AND TERMINAL
RESISTOR UNIT
D Tap (A13B0156C100)
50
25
25
65
5
1
32.5
100
35
120
16.0
47.0
242
B61393E/06
13
243
13.1
OUTLINE
B61393E/06
The Series 0TTC is a CNC which can control two paths. It has been
designed for use with lathes which operate two tool posts independently
and which cut a workpiece by simultaneously using the two tool posts.
One of the two paths is controlled with the same system configuration as
that of the 0TC. The other path is controlled by an added multiaxis card.
Here, the former path is referred to as tool post 1 or the main path, while
the latter path is referred to as tool post 2 or the subpath.
Basically, the main path controls the axes connected to the 1st to 4th axis
printed circuit board and the analog or serial spindle connected to the
memory printed circuit board. The subpath controls the axes connected
to the 5th/6th axis printed circuit board and the analog or serial spindle.
13.2
RESTRICTIONS
244
B61393E/06
13.3
CONNECTION
The connection of the Series 0TTC is basically the same as that of the
Series 0TC with a multiaxis card.
To connect the spindle for tool post 2, use the M28 connector for an analog
spindle, or the COP6 connector for a serial spindle. The connection
interface is the same as that for tool post 1. To connect the spindle position
coder for tool post 2, use the M29 connector. These connectors are located
on the 5th/6th axis control printed circuit board. If the second position
coder is not used, however, connect the first position coder to the M29
connector, and also to the M27 connector on the memory printed circuit
board, in parallel.
In addition, eight input signals from the machine are used for the Series
0TTC. Use the M28 connector for these signals. This connector is also
used for the velocity command for the analog spindle.
M28 (MR20RFD)
01
02
03
04
0V
09
MIT1S
0V
14
XAES
15
+MIT1S
16
+MIT2S
17
*+LZS
10 MIT2S
COMS
11
SKIPS
18
12
06
245
ZAES
0V
05
07
08
19
13
SVCS
20
0V
B61393E/06
Control unit
Multiaxis card (5th/6th axis PCB)
Terminal No.
Automatic tool compensation
signal (X2axis)
Bit No.
Address No.
Filter and level
conversion circuit
Resistor
Skip signal
246
B61393E/06
14
WARNING
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safe
machine tools.
The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated by
closing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and
spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC
controller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and
spindle motors are decelerated to a stop.
Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to be
applied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,
however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under the
force of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with a
brake.
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motordriving power
to the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue running
under its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stop
signal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindle
motor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power is
shut off.
The FANUC control amplifier series products are designed to satisfy
the above requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to the
power supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor power
MCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to the
power supply module on and off.
The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a software
limit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detect
overtravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servo
feedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limit
switch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stop
the machine.
Fig. 10 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signal
with this CNC controller and series control amplifier.
247
B61393E/06
Emergency
stop button
+X
+Y
+Z
+4
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
EMG
Relay
CNC control unit
emg1
+24
*ESP
SVM
SPM
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
L3
Spark killer
SK
3
200VAC
Coil
L1
L2
L3
Circuit breaker 1
MCC
AC reactor
Fig. 14
WARNING
To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a
manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to the corresponding
documentation as well as this manual. Design the
emergency stop sequence such that, if the emergency stop
signal contact opens while the spindle motor is rotating, the
spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
248
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
251
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A.1
UNITS OF CNC
Name of dimensions
Fig. U1 (a)
Fig. U1 (b)
Specifications
Color
MDI
Key
Fig. U2 (a)
9CRT/MDI unit
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
English
English
English
English
English
English
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
T series
M series
T series
T series
M series
M series
T series
T series
M series
M series
A02B0091C041, C042
A02B0098C041, C042
A02B0098C045#TAR
A02B0098C045#TBR
A02B0098C045#MAR
A02B0098C045#MBR
A02B0098C046#TAR
A02B0098C046#TBR
A02B0098C046#MAR
A02B0098C046#MBR
Fig. U2 (b)
9CRT/MDI unit
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
English
English
English
English
English
English
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
T series
M series
T series
T series
M series
M series
T series
T series
M series
M series
A02B0091C052
A02B0092C052
A02B0098C055#TAR
A02B0098C055#TBR
A02B0098C055#MAR
A02B0098C055#MBR
A02B0098C056#TAR
A02B0098C056#TBR
A02B0098C056#MAR
A02B0098C056#MBR
Fig. U2 (c)
9CRT/MDI unit
Monochrome
Small
English
0PD
A02B0099C094#PBR
Fig. U2 (d)
9CRT/MDI unit
Color
Color
Small
Small
English
English
T series
M series
A02B0098C104
A02B0099C104
Fig. U2 (e)
9CRT/MDI unit
Color
Color
Full key
Full key
English
English
T series
M series
A02B0098C084
A02B0099C084
Fig. U2 (f)
Fig. U2 (g)
14CRT/MDI unit
Color
Color
Color
Full key
Full key
Full key
English
M series
English
M series
Symbolic M series
A02B0092C200
A02B0098C210#MBR
A02B0098C211#MBR
Fig. U2 (h)
EL/MDI unit
Monochrome
Monochrome
Small
Small
English
English
T series
M series
A02B0091C062
A02B0092C062
Fig. U2 (i)
PDP/MDI unit
200VAC input type
Monochrome
Monochrome
Small
Small
English
English
T series
M series
A02B0098C065
A02B0099C065
Fig. U2 (j)
PDP/MDI unit
24VDC input type
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Small
SmalI
Small
Small
English
English
Symbolic
Symbolic
T series
M series
T series
M series
A02B0098C068#TBR
A02B0098C068#MBR
A02B0098C069#TBR
A02B0098C069#MBR
Fig. U2 (k)
PDP/MDI unit
200VAC input type
Monochrome
Monochrome
Full key
Full key
English
English
T series
M series
A02B0098C075
A02B0099C075
Fig. U2 (l)
PDP/MDI unit
24VDC input type
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
English
English
Symbolic
Symbolic
T series
M series
T series
M series
A02B0098C078#TBR
A02B0098C078#MBR
A02B0098C079#TBR
A02B0098C079#MBR
252
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Name of dimensions
Specifications
Color
MDI
Key
Function
Fig. U2 (m)
7.2LCD/MDI unit
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Small
Small
Small
Small
English
English
Symbolic
Symbolic
T series
M series
T series
M series
A02B0098C091#TBR
A02B0098C091#MBR
A02B0098C091#TBS
A02B0098C091#MBS
Fig. U2 (n)
7.2LCD/MDI unit
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
English
English
Symbolic
Symbolic
T series
M series
T series
M series
A02B0098C092#TBR
A02B0098C092#MBR
A02B0098C092#TBS
A02B0098C092#MBS
Fig. U2 (o)
Detachable
9CRT/MDI unit
Monochrome
Monochrome
Small
Small
English
English
T series
M series
A02B0098C121, C122
A02B0099C121, C122
Fig. U3 (a)
Separate type
9CRT unit
Monochrome
Fig. U3 (b)
Separate type
9CRT unit
Color
Fig. U3 (c)
Separate type
EL unit
Monochrome
Common A02B0091C138
Fig. U3 (d)
Separate type
PDP unit
200VAC input type
Monochrome
Common A02B0098C135
Fig. U3 (e)
Separate type
PDP unit
24VDC input type
Monochrome
Common A02B0098C136
Fig. U3 (f)
Separate type
7.2LCD unit
Monochrome
Common A02B0098C093
Fig. U3 (g)
Separate type
8.4LCD unit
Color
Color
Common A02B0098C098
M series A02B0098C099
Fig. U3 (h)
Separate type
8.4 LCD unit
Color
Color
Fig. U4 (a)
Separate type
MDI unit
Common A02B0098C088
M series A02B0098C089
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
English
English
Symbolic
English
English
Symbolic
T series
T series
T series
M series
M series
M series
A02B0091C133
A02B0098C145#TAR
A02B0098C145#TB
A02B0092C133
A02B0098C145#MAR
A02B0098C145#MB
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
Full key
English
English
Symbolic
English
English
Symbolic
Englich
Symbolic
T series
T series
T series
M series
M series
M series
M series
M series
A02B0091C135
A02B0098C146#TAR
A02B0098C146#TB
A02B0092C135
A02B0098C146#MAR
A02B0098C146#MB
A02B0098C147#MAR
A02B0098C147#MB
Fig. U4 (b)
Separate type
MDI unit
Fig. U5 (a)
A8600201T001
253
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
Name of dimensions
B61393E/06
Specifications
Fig. U5 (b)
A8600202T001
Fig. U5 (c)
A8600202T004 to T015
Punch panel
A02B0072C061 to C069
Fig. U6
Fig. U7 (a)
Position coder
(Max.4000 rpm)
(Max.6000 rpm)
A86L00270001#102
A86L00270001#002
Fig. U7 (b)
Fig. U8 (a)
Fig. U8 (b)
A06B6050K060
Fig. U9 (a)
Additional I/O B2
Additional I/O F1 (DO common output type)
A20B10010731
A20B10020310
Fig. U9 (b)
A20B10040500
A20B20010880
Fig. U10
A80L00010176
Fig. U11
Input unit A2
A14B0076B001
Fig. U12
FANUC PPR
Fig. U13
Fig. U14
Fig. U15
Fig. U16
Fig. U17
FA card adaptor
Fig. U18
(Max.10000 rpm)
See Appendix D.
A8600309T302
A02B0091C141
A02B0091C161
A02B0098C170#TB
A02B0099C161#TB
A02B0092C141
A02B0092C161
A02B0099C150#MB
A02B0099C161#MB
254
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
255
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
256
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Connector KMI
Weight : 4.2kg
Installation dimension
18.5
153
Connector KMI
Earth stud
(M4)
(Note)
The earth stud is
prepared only for
CE marking
For the model
qualifying for CE
marking, the area
within 8 mm of
the outside edge
of the rear of the
metal panel is left
unpainted.
The panel surface is colored
gray (Munsell N3)
and finished to a
GS30 level of
smoothness.
257
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
KM1
Installation dimension
Weight 4.5kg
(Note)
The earth stud is
prepared only for
CE marking.
For the model
qualifying for CE
marking, the area
within 8 mm of
the outside edge
of the rear of the
metal panel is left
unpainted.
30
20
258
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
KM1
Installation dimension
Weight 4.5kg
30
20
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig. U2 (c) For 0PD 9CRT/MDI unit (Monochrome, full key type) dimension
259
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(Reference)
Pedestal
(Reference)
8M3
Installation dimension
Weight Approx.8kg
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
260
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Pedestal
(Reference)
(Reference)
Installation dimension
261
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 21 kg
Earth
stud
(M4)
262
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
2M4(Bottom)
(Mounting hole
for stand)
Unit stand
(Example)
Notices of mount
263
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 2.8kg
Earth stud
(M4)
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
264
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Weight : 2.9kg
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
265
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
95
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Weight : 2.9kg
CN2
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
266
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Weight : 3.3kg
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
267
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 3.3kg
Hole
for installation earth
cable (M4)
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
268
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(Note)
This dimension is depth of LCD unit.
The connector of MDI cable is left
out of consideration.
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
(Note)
Weight : 1.9kg
Hole
for installation earth
cable (M4)
269
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
(Note)
This dimension is depth of LCD unit.
The connector of MDI cable is left
out of consideration.
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(Note)
Weight : 2.2kg
30
270
Hole
for installation earth
cable (M4)
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
HONDA MR
connector
20P2pcs
Cable length :
Approx.1.5m
Rear of unit
271
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 4kg
Panel
cut
figure
272
5 14
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Weight : 7.8kg
Panel
cut
figure
293
273
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 2.1kg
Stud(M4) for
earth
Panel cut
figure
274
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Weight : 2.7kg
Panel
cut figure
Screw (M4)
for earth
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig. U3 (d) Remote type PDP unit (A02B0098C135)
275
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 2.7kg
95
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Panel
cut figure
CN2
Screw (M4)
for earth
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig. U3 (e) Remote type PDP unit (A02B0098C136)
276
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Weight : 1.4kg
Connector for
soft key
Panel cut figure
277
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Weight : 1.9kg
In case of A02B0098C099
In case of A02B0098C098
Connector for
soft key
278
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
In case of A02B0098C088
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the area within 8 mm of the outside edge of the rear
of the metal panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
279
In case of A02B0098C089
Weight 1.9 kg
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(Note)
The Earth stud is prepared only
for CE marking.
For the model qualifying for CE
marking, the area within 8 mm of
the outside edge of the rear of
the metal panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored
gray (Munsell N3) and finished to
a GS30 level of smoothness.
Weight : 0.7kg
22.0
Stud for
earth(M4)
18.5
280
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(Note)
The earth stud is prepared only for CE marking.
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the
area within 8 mm of the outside edge of the rear
of the metal panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3)
and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Weight : 1.1kg
Stud for
earth(M4)
22.5
18.0
281
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
M3 screw terminal
282
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
8.35
M4X8.0
30.0
50.0
80.0
55.0
60.0
PULSE GENERATOR
FANUC LTD
0V 5V A
120.0
11.0
On 72
M3 screw terminal
283
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
38.0
25
90
39.0
100.0
140
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
25
90
39.0
100.0
140
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
284
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Length:
200mm
Crimped
terminal
for M4 flame
ground
HONDA TUSHIN
MR20RM
Painting :
PMEN1.53G
285
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
+0
0.11
68
0.009
0.025
14.3
16
0.006
0.017
50
15
+0.14
0
Connector
45.4
+0.012
0
+0.05
0
V56
V68
Unit : mm
NOTE
Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows :
(1)
Input axis inertia 1.0103 kg,cm,sec2 or less
(2)
Input axis starting torque 1000g,cm or less
(3)
Input axis permissible loads
Radial
(4)
Thrust
Operation
1kg or less
1kg or less
Idle
20kg or less
10kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the timing belt. Note that
the loads conform with the above allowable value.
Weight
1kg or less
286
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
MS connector: MS3102A2029P
B61393E/06
Fig. U7 (b)
position coder
Specification No.: A8600309T302 (10000 rpm maximum)
287
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Body
Cover
M4 Tap4
Mounting hole
(countersink)
288
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
Minus terminal
with 3M3 screw
holes
44.3 Mounting
holes
Arrow view A
289
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Space
M279
M79
Mou
nting
hole
M262
M62
M280
M80
M278
M78
Mou
nting
hole
M261
M61
Note
Note)
The names of connector I/OB2 is different
from the names of connector I/OF1.
Upper are names of connector I/OF1.
Lower are names of connector I/OB2.
290
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M261
M61
Space
M262
M62
M280
M80
M278
M78
Mou
nting
hole
M279
M79
Mounting
hole
Note)
The names of connector I/OB3 is different
from the names of connector I/OF3.
Upper are names of connector I/OF3.
Lower are names of connector I/OB3.
291
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Max. 155
Weight : 14kg
Unit : mm
Max.175
CAUTION
Switch off the main line switch when TB1 and TB2 are touched.
292
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Specification of control
transformer
TB1
550
480
460
440
415
TB1
380
240
230
200A
220
200 to 550V
200
200V
100V
5A
100A
1A
COM
200B
100B
293
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
294
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
295
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
296
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
297
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
298
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
299
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
300
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
301
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
302
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Signal cable
connector
Wiring
screw
M36
Cable
holder
Signal
cable
Fig. U19 (b) Tape reader without reels (With serial interface)
NOTE
Set the tape reader into it, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and
nuts. If this is not convinient, attach a M5 stud in 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
303
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
RS232C
interface
connector Power
connector
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Parallel
interface
connector
Stud
NOTE
Set the tape reader into it, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and
nuts. If this is not convinient, attach a M5 stud in 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
304
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
A.2
CONNECTOR
Name of external dimension
Fig. C1 (a)
PCRE20FS
Fig. C1 (b)
FI40 connector
FI402015S
Fig. C2 (a)
PCRV20LA/PCRV20LB
Fig. C2 (b)
FI20CV
Fig. C2 (c)
FCN240C20Y/S
Fig. C3 (a)
AMP connector(1)
AMP11781283
Fig. C3 (b)
AMP connector(2)
AMP21781283
Fig. C3 (c)
AMP connector(3)
AMP11782883
Fig. C3 (d)
AMP connector(4)
AMP21782883
Fig. C3 (e)
AMP connector(5)
AMP21781296
Fig. C3 (f)
AMP11752182/5
AMP11751962/5
Fig. C4 (a)
Fig. C4 (b)
Fig. C4 (c)
Fig. C4 (d)
Fig. C4 (e)
Fig. C5 (a)
SMS3PK5
Fig. C5 (b)
SMS3PN5
Fig. C5 (c)
SMS3PW5
Fig. C5 (d)
SMS6PN5
Fig. C5 (e)
SMS6PW5
Fig. C5 (f)
SMS6P1
Fig. C6
HIF3BB50D2.54R
Fig. C7
NFP10A0124
Fig. C8 (a)
Fig. C8 (b)
Fig. C9
305
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Connector body
HONDA TSUSHIN
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Usage
General
Connector cover
HONDA TSUSHIN
HONDA TSUSHIN
PCSE20LA (Metal)
PCRV20L (Plastic)
n
2
7.3
1.27
n1
2
Display
HONDA
15.1
1.27
PCRE20FS
306
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connector body
HIROSE FI402015S
Usage
Housing
HIROSE FI20CV
Dimension
16.25
11.43
15
1.27
5 4
1.7
9.2
7 6
5.5
2.2
10 9 8
(Note)
This connector is not contanted with
the position 11,13,15,17, and 19.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
13.35
19.2
Tab for
connection
of shield
4.3
(4)
8.5
1.8
(1)
2.4 2.4
A
Face AA
(Measure 10/1)
(2)
20
18
16
14
12
10
307
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
9.5
21
11.4
(1)
HONDA
37
(2)
30
(3)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Case
Cable clamp
Lock metal
Lock lever
Screw for mounting cable
clamp
308
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Case
Lock metal
Lock lever
Cable clamp
Screw for mounting cable clamp
210.3
11.50.3
9.50.2
(5)
(6)
(4)
370.5
17.50.3
(3)
300.3
(2)
309
(1)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
B61393E/06
9.5
21
11.4
(2)
F
C02002
37
Connector body
Usage
Dimension
APPENDIX
30
Cable clamp
Pan head screw
Locking lever
310
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Style
AMP11781283
Usage
For CE marking
Power supply unit
200VAC input
3
2
1
For CE marking
Power supply unit
200VAC output
3
2
200B
200A
Dimension
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
G
S
R
Location of key
Circuit No.
(25.5)
1
AMP
16.3
22.8
D3
6.55
4.05
3.1
10.16
5.08
Circuit No.
311
7.15
0.6
19.24
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Style
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
AMP21781283
Dimension
Circuit No.
(29.7)
1
22.8 0.3
16.3 0.3
D3
3
AMP
6.55 0.3
4.05
3.1
10.16
5.08
Circuit No.
312
7.15
0.6
0.3
(19.24)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
AMP11782883
For CE marking
Power supply unit
+24E Output
Dimension
0V
+24E
Circuit No.
(22.96)
1
3
AMP
16.3
22.8
D3
4.05
3.1
7.62
3.81
Circuit No.
313
7.15
0.6
16.7
6.55
Style
Usage
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Style
AMP21782883
Usage
For CE marking
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
0V
+24V
Circuit No.
314
7.15
6.55
0.6
Circuit No.
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Style
AMP21781296
Usage
For CE marking
Power supply unit
ON/OFF control
Dimension
B3
FB
A3
COM
B2
FA
A2
OFF
B1
AL
A1
ON
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (e) AMP connector (5)
315
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Style
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connector cable
Dimension
(21.8)
AA
2.9 0.4
2.90.5
1
17.8
(9.3)
2.9
Reel
3
0.5
4.2
(2.5)
0.2
BB
B
A
5.50.5
3.40.2
((1.7))
0.4
AMP
2.50.2
Plating code
(PLATING IDMARK)
2.6)
A
Crimped display
(PRESSER IDMARK)
316
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(2)
(4)
(1)
(3)
C
(5)
(D)
A
(B)
Symbol
Specification
(B)
(D)
No. of
terminals
39.3
44.9
39.8
17
20
67.9
73.5
44.8
18
50
MR20LMH (Plug)
MR20LFH (Jack)
MR50LMH (Plug)
MR50LFH (Jack)
Name
Symbol
(1)
Connector cover
(2)
Cable clamp
(3)
Stopper
(4)
(5)
Plug connector(MR20,50MH)
Jack connector(MR20,50FH)
317
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
318
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
13
2M2
A
B
18.1
2.4
(1)
8.5
(2)
14
15
16
17
10
18
11
19
12
20
13
HONDA
(3)
No. of
terminals
MR20RMH
32.8
27.8
20
MR50RMH
61.4
56.4
50
Name
Symbol
(1)
(2)
(3)
Connector(MR20, 50MH)
319
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
13
2M2
B
A
8.4
(2)
(3)
2
8
14
3
9
15
4
10
16
5
11
17
18
6
12
19
7
13
HONDA
10.9
19.9
2.4
(1)
20
No.of
terminals
MR20RFH
32.8
27.8
20
MR50RFH
61.4
56.4
50
Symbol
Name
Connector(MR20, 50FH)
320
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
HONDA
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
HONDA
19
33
34
20
35
21
36
22
37
23
38
24
39
25
40
26
41
27
42
28
43
29
44
30
45
14
18
19
18
20
HONDA
7
HONDA
13
19
20
321
MR20MH
(20 core plug)
6
12
MR50FH
(50core jack)
50
13
6
5
11
17
49
12
5
4
10
16
48
11
4
3
9
15
17
10
2
8
32
47
16
9
14
46
15
8
31
MR50MH
(50core plug)
MR20FH
(20 core jack)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
32 max.
19.060.2
5.08
B61393E/06
60.2
7.7
30
Specification
(Connector maker number)
Remarks
SMS3PK5
Black
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Solder type)
RC16MSCT3
Cables
Cross sectional area
Insulation diameter
Peeling length
: 0.75mm2(30/0.18)
: 2.8mm max
: 7.2mm
322
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
32 max.
5.08
B61393E/06
19.060.2
3
60.2
7.7
30
Specification
(Connector maker number)
Remarks
SMS3PNS5
Brown
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Solder type)
RC16MSCT3
Cables
Cross sectional area
Insulation diameter
Peeling length
: 0.75mm2(30/0.18)
: 2.8mm max
: 7.2mm
323
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Name
Connector housing for cable
Contact
(Crimp type)
Remarks
SMS3PWS5
White
RC16M23D28
Cables
Cross sectional area
Insulationdiameter
Peeling length
: 0.75mm2(30/0.18)
: 2.8mm max
: 7.2mm
324
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
48 max.
38 max.
5.08
B61393E/06
7 max.
24.9
Specification
(Connector maker number)
Remarks
SMS3PN5
Brown
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Soldering type)
RC16MSCT3
Cables
Cross sectional area
Insulation diameter
Peeling length
: 1.27mm2(50/0.18)
: 2.8mm max
: 7.2mm
325
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Specification
(Connector maker number)
Remarks
SMS6PW5
White
(Crimp type)
RC16M23D28
(Soldering type)
RC16MSCD28
Cables
Cross sectional area
Insulation diameter
Peeling length
: 1.27mm2 (50/0.18)
: 2.8mm max
: 7.2mm
326
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Specification
(Connector maker number)
Remarks
SMS6P1
Black
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Soldering type)
RC16MSCT3
Cables
Cross sectional area
Insulation diameter
Peeling length
: 1.27mm2(50/0.18)
: 2.8mm max
: 7.2mm
327
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
15.6
HIF3BB
1.27
1.27
14.4
HIF3BA
1.09
1.27
Protector
Connector body
A
D
3.6
6.0
6.0
2.54
6.0
Clamp
A
A
When assembled
Section BB
Section AA
2.54
1.27
3.81
D
3.8 (Note 1)
3.5
(Note 2)
2.7
8.5
0.3
0.95
10.5
7.0 3.5
7.0
(Note 3)
1.05
2.3
2.3
3.5
C
4.5
Dimensions
Model
Number
of pins
HIF3BB50D2.54R
50
68.07
60.96
62.23
63.6
20PINS
Row A
Row B
01
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
10
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
19
18
328
21
20
23
22
25
24
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
NFP10A0122
NFP10A0124
C
3.25
6.3
6.3
0.1
2.54
8.3
0.5
2.54
0.5
1.905
3.85
1.27
9.6
0.7
3.0
3.0
1.905
A
4.15
F
2.7
1.905
1.905
2.7
1.905
NFP10A0122
Alignment mark
1.905
NFP10A0124
17.2
12.9
27.7
3.5
6.5
4.5
0.5
1.27
22.4 hole
B
D
5.0
7.4
Name
NFP10A0122&0124 24.28
7.7
0.5
E
22.4 hole
5.065
1.27
0.8
Through hole
5.0
PC board hole dimensions
329
5.08
11.58
15.08 20.48
F
40.2
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H
J
A
B
C
53.0
38.3
47.0
D
E
F
7.8
12.6
41.3
G 10.7
H 1.2
J 0.8
A
C
B
AA Cross section
F
10
A
E
D
6.1
10
23.05
10
10.8
M2.6P0.45 screw
Small round
head screw
Interlock screw
1.2 groove
6.1
1.2
6.2
12.7
Spring washer
330
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Color : Cream
Note) When connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)
331
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
VARIOUS UNITS
Model
APPENDIX
Corresponding wire
B61393E/06
Cable diameter
including shields
(mm)
AWG#
0.33 to 0.83 22 to 18
1.7 to 3.0
Material
Surface
treatment
Brass
Phosphor
bronze
Tinning
Fig. C10 (a) Contact for 9 PDP power cable (24 VDC input type)
Specification VHR2N
Material
Nylon 6
UL94V0
Natural
Quantity/bag 1000
Fig. C10 (b) Housing for 9 PDP power cable (24 VDC input type)
332
Quantity
Reel
4500
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
333
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
B.1
TABLE OF CABLE
Cable
Usage
Maxlength (m)
J1
50
J2
50
J15
50
J16
50
J17
50
J18
50
J15A
50
J16A
50
J20*
J23
50
J23A
50
J24
J25
J26
50
J26A
50
J27
50
J28
50 to I/O device
J30
50
J31
50
J32
50
J36
J37
50
J38
50
J39
10
J40
50
J41
50
J42
50
J43
50
334
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Cable
Usage
Maxlength (m)
J44
J51
J52
J61
J81
Absolute pulse coder relay 1st axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J82
Absolute pulse coder relay 2nd axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J83
Absolute pulse coder relay 3rd axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J84
Absolute pulse coder relay 4th axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J85 to J88
Absolute pulse coder relay from 1st to 4th axis : Relay unit to Battery unit
J89
J141
50
J142
50
J143
J144
J210 to J217
50
J220 to J227
50
J230 to J237
50
J240 to J247
50
335
50
B.2
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
INTERFACE CABLE
(OUR SUPPLY)
Connection cable for
SERVO
Usage
Name
Specifications
Code
Length
J210
to J217
A02B
0074
K801
5m
J210
to J217
A02B
0098
K821
5m
J210
to J217
A02B
0098
K841
5m
A02B
0120
K844
1m
J220
to J227
A02B
0074
K802
14 m
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
Servo amplifiler
(S series)
Control unit
J220
to J227
A02B
0074
K803
14 m
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
High resolution servo
motor
(S series)
Control unit
J220
to J227
A02B
0074
K807
14 m
336
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Usage
Name
Specifications
Code
Length
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
High resolution servo
motor
(S series)
Control unit
J220
to J227
A02B
0074
K808
14 m
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
Servo motor
(S series)
Control unit
J220
to J227
A02B
0098
K822
14 m
J220
to J227
A02B
0098
K823
14 m
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
High resolution servo
motor (S series)
Control unit
J220
to J227
A02B
0098
K827
14 m
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
High resolution servo
motor (S series)
Control unit
J220
to J227
A02B
0098
K828
14 m
A02B
0096
K801
14 m
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
Servo motor
(S series)
Control unit
337
Usage
APPENDIX
Name
B61393E/06
Specifications
Code
Length
A02B
0096
K802
14 m
J220
to J227
A02B
0098
K860
14 m
J220
to J227
A02B
0098
K861
14 m
connector
J220
to J227
A06B
6050
K854
14 m
J220
to J227A
A02B
0074
K804
2m
J81
to J84
A06B
6050
K055
14 m
J81
to J84
A06B
6050
K056
14 m
338
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Usage
Name
Specifications
Code
Length
J89
A02B
0072
K902
4m
J23
A02B
0050
K801
7m
A06B
6050
K003
14 m
A06B
6050
K005
14 m
A06B
6050
K006
14 m
A06B
6050
K007
14 m
Cabtyre cable
10pair whole shielded(cable A)
Crimped terminal T1 254
HIROSE connector
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
4 core30/0 18 0 75SQ
Crimped terminal T24
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
4 core 37/0 26 2SQ
Crimped terminal T24
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
4 core 37/0 26 2SQ
Crimped terminal T24
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
4 core 45/0 32 3 5SQ
339
Usage
APPENDIX
Name
B61393E/06
Specifications
Code
Length
J15
to J18
A06B
6050
K008
14 m
A06B
6050
K009
14 m
A06B
6050
K010
14 m
A06B
6050
K824
14 m
A06B
6050
K825
14 m
A06B
6079
K800
14 m
Cabtyre cable
4 core 45/0 32 3 5SQ
Crimped terminal T5 54
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
4 core 72/0 32 5 5SQ
Crimped terminal T5 54
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
4 core 72/0 32 5 5SQ
J15
to J18
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
Cabtyre cable
Crimped terminal T24
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
340
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Usage
Name
Specifications
Code
Length
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
A06B
6079
K801
14 m
A06B
6079
K802
14 m
A06B
6079
K803
14 m
A06B
6079
K804
14 m
A06B
6079
K805
14 m
Cabtyre cable
Crimped terminal T24
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
Crimped terminal T24
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
Crimped terminal T84
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
Crimped terminal T84
(connector)
(clamp)
J15
to J18
Cabtyre cable
341
Usage
APPENDIX
Name
Specifications
B61393E/06
Code
Length
J15
to J18
A06B
6050
K822
14 m
J15
to J18
A06B
6050
K823
14 m
Name
J1
J2
J30
J32
J40
J41
J42
J44
J1
J2
J30
J32
J40
J41
J42
J44
Specifications
Cabtyre cable
50 core whole shielded(Cable B)
Code
Length
A02B
0029
K801
7m
A02B
0098
K801
7m
A02B
0029
K802
7m
Cabtyre cable
50 core whole shielded(Cable B)
J31
J39
J43
Cabtyre cable
10 core whole shielded(Cable A)
342
Usage
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Name
J31
J39
J43
Specifications
Cabtyre cable
10 core whole shielded(Cable A)
Code
Length
A02B
0098
K802
7m
A02B
0050
K802
7m
A02B
0050
K803
10 m
A02B
0098
K803
10 m
A02B
0098
K871
7m
A02B
0098
K870
5m
J24
J27
MDI unit
(Common to both small
type and full key type)
CRT/LCD
VIDEO signal cable
Control unit
14CRT(For CE)
LCD unit
J37
343
Usage
APPENDIX
Name
B61393E/06
Specifications
Code
Length
Monochrome CRT
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
CRT unit
J38
A02B
0072
K814
7m
Monochrome CRT
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
(For CE)
CRT unit
J38
A02B
0120
K820
5m
LCD unit
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
LCD unit
J38
A02B
0120
K820
5m
LCD unit
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
(For CE)
LCD unit
J38
A02B
0120
K823
5m
14color CRT
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
14color CRT unit
J38
A02B
0072
K815
7m
14color CRT
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
(For CE)
14color CRT unit
J38
A02B
0120
K821
5m
14color CRT
Power supply cable
Power supply unit
(For CE)
14 color CRT unit
(For CE)
J38
A02B
0200
K812
5m
A02B
0120
K830
5m
Fasten terminal
344
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Usage
Name
Specifications
Code
Length
Crimped terminalM4
A02B
0120
K831
5m
A03B
0807
K801
or
K802
10 m
or
5m
A03B
0807
K803
1m
A02B
0072
K817
7m
A02B
0120
K843
5m
A02B
0072
K823
7m
A02B
0120
K845
7m
M4 crimped terminal
345
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
B.3
CONNECTOR FOR
INTERFACE
(ATTACHED TO
CABLES)
Usage
(Connector No.)
M3
M12
M19
M21
M27
M35
M36
M38
M39
M45
M46
M48
M49
M60
M79
M185
M186
M188
M189
M195
M196
M198
M199
M219
CCX1 to 5
CX1
Name
Specifications
Connector
MR20FH
Cover
MR20L
Soldering
terminal
Connector with
cover(20pin
female
soldering
type)
A02B
0029
K890
Connector with
cover(20pin
female
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Cover
MR20L
Connector
MRP20F01
Terminal
MRPF112
(20 pcs.)
A02B
0029
K892
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector
MR20MH
M5
M24
M26
M34
M37
M44
M47
M184
M187
M194
M197
KM1
Code
Connector with
cover(20pin
male soldering
type)
A02B
0029
K898
Connector with
cover(20pin
male
crimp
type)
Cover
MR20L
Soldering terminal
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Cover
MR20L
Connector
MRP20M01
Terminal
MRPM112
(20 pcs.)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
346
A02B
0029
K900
Number
Usage
(Connector No.)
Name
Specifications
Connector
MR50FH
M1
M2
M18
M20
M61
M62
M78
M80
M1B
M2B
M201
M202
M218
M220
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Code
Cover
MR50L
Soldering Terminal
Connector with
cover
(50 pin
female
soldering
type)
A02B
0029
K891
Connector with
cover
(50 pin
female
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Cover:
MR50L
Connector
MRP50F01
terminal
MRPF112
(50 pcs.)
A02B
0029
K893
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector
MR50MH
Cover:
MR50L
Soldering
terminal
Connector with
cover
(50 pin
male soldering
type)
A02B
0029
K899
M1 to M2A
Connector with
cover
(50 pin
male
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Cover:
MR50L
Connector
MRP50M01
Terminal
MRPM112
(50 pcs.)
A02B
0029
K901
By HONDA TSUSHIN
CP2
CP11
Connector 6 pin
square
soldering
type
black
Housing
SMS6P1
Contact
RC16MSCT3 (6 pcs.)
347
A02B
0072
K891
Number
Usage
(Connector No.)
APPENDIX
Name
B61393E/06
Specifications
Code
Housing SMS6PN5
CP15
CN2
(CRT/MDI)
Contact
RC16MSCT3 (6 pcs.)
Connector 6 pin
female
soldering
type
brown
A02B
0061
K203
By JAPAN FCI
Housing SMS6PW5
Contact
RC16MSCT3 (6 pcs.)
Connector 6 pin
female
soldering
type
white
A06B
6047
H031
By JAPAN FCI
Housing SMS3PN5
CP14
CP51
Contact
RC16MSCT3 (3 pcs.)
Connector 3 pin
female
soldering
type
brown
A02B
0072
K893
By JAPAN FCI
348
Number
Usage
(Connector No.)
M1
M2
M18
M20
M61
M62
M78
M80
M1B
M2B
M201
M202
M218
M220
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Name
Connector with
cover (50
pin female soldering
type)
Specifications
Connector
MR50FH
Code
Cover
MR50NSB
Soldering terminal
A02B
0098
K891
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector with
cover (50
pin female
crimp
type)
Cover:
MR50NSB
Connector
MRP50F01
Terminal
MRPF112
(50 pcs.)
A02B
0098
K893
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector with
cover (50
pin male
soldering
type)
Connector
MR50MH
Cover
MR50NSB
Soldering terminal
A02B
0098
K899
By HONDA TSUSHIN
M1 to M2A
Cover
MR50NSB
Connector
MRP50M01
Connector with
cover (50
pin male
crimp
type)
Terminal
MRPM112
(50 pcs.)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
349
A02B
0098
K901
Number
Usage
(Connector No.)
M3
M12
M19
M21
M27
M35
M36
M38
M39
M45
M46
M48
M49
M60
M79
M185
M186
M188
M189
M195
M196
M198
M199
M219
CCX1 to 5
CX1
APPENDIX
Name
Connector with
cover (20
pin female soldering
type)
Specifications
Connector
MR20FH
Code
Cover:
MR20NSB
Soldering terminal
A02B
0098
K890
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector with
cover (20
pin female
crimp
type)
Cover:
MR20NSB
Connector
MRP20F01
Terminal
MRPF112
(20 pcs.)
A02B
0098
K892
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector
MR20MH
M5
M24
M26
M34
M37
M44
M47
M184
M187
M194
M197
KM1
B61393E/06
Cover:
MR20NSB
Soldering terminal
Connector with
cover (20
pin male
soldering
type)
A02B
0098
K898
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Cover:
MR20NSB
Connector
MRP20M01
Connector with
cover (20
pin male
crimp
type)
Terminal
MRPM112
(20 pcs.)
A02B
0098
K900
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector and
lock metal
Connector
DBM25S
350
A02B
0061
K201
Number
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
B.4
CABLE FOR
STANDARD
INTERFACE
Conductor
Name
Diameter
Composition
Electric characteristic
Sheath
thickness
ter
Total o
outer
dia.
Conductor
resistance
Allowable
current
Code*
Cable A
(10pair)
0.55 mm
7/0.18
1.5 mm
10.0 mm
110W/km
1.6 A
A66L00010041
Cable B
(50 core)
0.55 mm
7/0.18
1.7 mm
12.5 mm
106W/km
1.6 A
A66L00010042
Cable C
(5
air,
(5pair
6 core)
0.55 mm
7/0.18
1.0
1 0 mm
11.0
11 0 mm
116W/km
16W/km
1.5 mm
50/0.18
1.6 A
A66L00010157
10 A
Total shield
Individual shield
(For tachogenerator signal)
For power (50/0.18) (+5V3,0V3)
pair cable (7/0.18)
351
Usage
(Connector symbol)
APPENDIX
Name
B61393E/06
Specification
Code
AMP11781283
3
AMP
AMP,
3pin,
Black,
Type X
D3
Terminal
AMP11752185
(3 pcs)
A02B
0120
K321
AMP21781296
AMP,
6pin,
Black,
Type YY
Terminal
AMP11752182
(6 pcs.)
A02B
0120
K322
AMP21782883
AMP,
3pin,
Black,
Type Y
Terminal
AMP11752185
(3 pcs.)
A02B
0120
K323
AMP11782883
3
AMP
AMP,
3pin,
Black,
Type X
D3
352
Terminal
AMP11752185
(3 pcs.)
A02B
0120
K324
Number
Name
Connector with
cover
(20pin,
half
pitch, female,
solder
type)
Specification
Code
HONDA
Usage
(Connector symbol)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A02B
0120
K301
Cover
PCRV20LA
HONDA
Connector with
cover
(20pin,
half
pitch, female,
crimp
type)
Cover
PCRV20LA
HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
353
A02B
0120
K302
Number
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Cable connector
Use
Cable side
connector
General
(I/OLink)
Type
Pressure
contact for
separate
wires
Solder
contact
Manufacturer
Honda
Solder
contact
Case model
Applicable cable
name
outside diameter
PCRV20LA:
6mm
PCSE20LA
6mm
Hirose
FI3020S:
FI20CV2:
6.2mm
Fujitsu
FCN247J020
G/E:
FCN240C020
Y/S:
5.8mm
Molex
526222011:
526242015:
6.2mm
Honda
PCRE20FS
PCRV20LA:
6mm
PCSE20LA
6mm
Hirose
Coaxial
cable
Connector
model name
PCRE20FA
Hirose
Honda
FI4020S:
FI20CV2:
6.2mm
FI40A20S:
FI20CV5:
9.2mm
FI402015S:
FI20CV:
8.5mm
FI40A20S:
FI20CV5:
9.2mm (*)
PCRV20LA:
6mm
PCSE20LA
6mm
PCRE20FS
354
(*)
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
Solder contact
355
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Recommended
connectors and
applicable housings
Connector name
in Connection
Manual
PCRE20FA
Pressure contact
for separate
se arate wires
PCRE20FS
Solder contact
FANUCauthorized
connector
(manufacturer)
PCRE20FA
(Honda Tsushin)
FANUCauthorized
housing or case
(manufacturer)
PCRV20LA
(Honda Tsushin)
Remarks
Plastic housing
PCSE20LA
(Honda Tsushin)
Metal housing
FI3020S
(Hirose Electric)
FI20CV2
(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
FCN247J020G/E
(Fujitsu)
FCN240C020Y/S
(Fujitsu)
Plastic housing
526222011
(Molex)
526242015
(Molex)
Plastic housing
PCRE20FS
(Honda Tsushin)
PCRV20LA
(Honda Tsushin)
A66L00010284#10P
(Outside diameter: 6.2 mm)
Plastic housing
PCSE20LA
(Honda Tsushin)
Metal housing
FI4020S
(Hirose Electric)
FI20CV2
(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
FI402015S
15pin solder
contact
FI402015S
(Hirose Electric)
FI20CV
(Hirose Electric)
A66L00010286
(Outside diameter: 8.5 mm)
Plastic housing
FI40A20S
Solder contact
FI40A20S
(Hirose Electric)
FI20CV5
(Hirose Electric)
A66L00010367
A66L00010368
(Outside diameter: 9.2 mm)
Plastic housing
356
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
FANUCauthorized
connector
(manufacturer)
PCRE20FA
(Honda Tsushin)
Pressure tool
Remarks
PCSK2A
FHPT918A
Low price
JGPS0151/120
JGPS014
MFCK1
PCSK1
(Note)
FI3020CAT
FI3020/ID
Low price
FI3020CAT1
HHP502
FI3020GP
FCN237TT043/H
FCN237TT109/H
FCN247TT066/H
FHAT918A
FI3020S
(Hirose Electric)
FCN247J020G/S
(Fujitsu)
FCN237TT044/H
FCN237TT062/H
526222011
(Molex)
578295000
578305000
578235000
578245000
Low price
NOTE
1 The tools in the shaded boxes are available from FANUC (order number: A02B0120K391).
2 The tools are designed for use with the connectors of the corresponding manufacturers.
357
Material
Use
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Constitution
FANUC
specification
number
Manufacturer
Remark
10pair cable
General use
0.08mm2
10pair
6pair cable
CRT interface
(pressmount)
0.08mm2
6pair
20 m or less
6conductor
coaxial cable
CRT interface
(longdistance)
6conductor
coaxial
50 m or less
12conductor
composite cable
Pulse coder,
linear scale,
manual pulse
generator
0.5mm2
6conductor
0.18mm2
3pair
20 m or less
0.75mm2
6conductor
0.18mm2
3pair
30 m or less
Usable on
movable parts
1.25mm2
6conductor
0.18mm2
3pair
50 m or less
Usable on
movable parts
358
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
359
APPENDIX
D.1
B61393E/06
OUTLINE
Name
Specification drawing
number
Keyboard
Machine operators
o erator s panel
anel
T series
A02B0091C141
M series
A02B0092C141
T series
A02B0091C161
M series
A02B0092C161
T series
A02B0098C170#TB
M series
A02B0099C150#MB
T series
A02B0099C161#TB
M series
A02B0099C161#MB
Smallsize
I/OC5 C6
I/OC5,
C6, C7
Machine operators
o erator s panel
anel
Fullkey
Smallsize
I/OE1,
I/OE1 E2,
E2 E3
Machine operators panel
qualifying for CE marking
Fullkey
Name
Specification
A16B13100380
A16B13100381
A16B23000110
I/OC5 C6
I/OC5,
C6, C7
360
I/OE1 E2,
E2 E3
I/OE1,
A16B23000111
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D.2
OPERATION
D.2.1
General Description of
Operation
The operators panel is provided with a lot of keys, LEDs, rotary switches,
etc. For keys and LEDs, they are coded, and connected to the CNC with
smaller number of signal lines than the actual number of keys or LEDs.
Since coding and data transfer are executed by the management program
of the PMC automatically, it is only necessary to operate the key or bit
image by the PMC program. (See Fig. D.2.1.)
Bear in mind that the PMC management only executes the generation of
bit image for LED, but not any operation by the significance of bit. When
EDIT key is depressed, for instance, only one bit (F293.0)
corresponding to the EDIT key is turned to 1, but the CNC will not be
turned to EDIT mode. It is not turned to the EDIT mode until 1 is
transferred to the bit of EDIT mode by the PMC program. The same
applies to the LED, and all the ON/OFF operations must be processed by
program.
Bit
F292
Management
software
Bit
G242
Input
X..
Output
Y..
Keyboard
(Coding)
LED
(Coding)
LED
Input
X..
PMC
Program
(User)
F..
Input
X..
Output
Y..
(Constant)
Rotary
Switch,
etc.
(Constant)
Operators
panel
G..
(CNC)
361
D.2.2
Key Switch Signal
D.2.3
LED Signal
D.2.4
Emergency, Override,
Protect Key
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The key switch signal is generated by the bit image at the PMC address
(F292 F299) through the management software of the PMC. Whether
the necessary key is depressed can be known by checking the bit image
of the key switch by the PMC program of the user. While the key is
depressed, the bit corresponding to the key is turned to 1. In addition,
the key may be input up to two at the same time. Do not attempt to use
in such a manner that more than three keys need to be depressed at the
same time in using the keyboard input. If more than three keys are
depressed at the same time, the key will not be properly input. It takes
a maximum of approx. 60 msec. after depressing the key until the bit of
the key is turned to 1 (0).
Generate the LED signal by the bit image at the PMC address (G242
G249) through the PMC program of the user. While 1 is written at the
bit image of the LED, the corresponding LED is turned on automatically.
Similarly when 0 is written at the bit image, the LED is turned off.
When the power is turned on, all the LED are turned off. It takes a
maximum of approx. 200 msec. after 1 (0) is written in the bit image
by the PMC until the LED is actually turned on (of).
Since the contact signal of emergency stop button, override rotary switch
and protect key is directly input to the PMC, process such signal by the
PMC program.
362
B61393E/06
D.3
CONNECTION
D Type A (does not qualify
for CE marking)
APPENDIX
The machine operators panel has 2 kinds as typeA and typeB. When
it is connected with the I/O card which have sink type DO drivers, typeA
must be used. And when source type DO drivers, typeB must be used.
Connect the M1 and M2 connectors of the I/O card (I/OC5, C6, or C7) to
the 22 DI points and eight DO points of the machine. Between the M1A
and M1B connectors and the M2A and M2B connectors, signals are
relayed on a onetoone basis within the operators panel, with the
exception of those used in the operators panel. By connecting M1 to
M1A and M2 to M2A using onetoone cables, therefore, those signals
that are not used in the operators panel can be connected to the
generalpurpose DI/DO on the machine, through the M1B and M2B
connectors. The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is, however, also
connected to M1B.
+24 V is used as the power supply common and override common in the
operators panel. 0 V and +24 V of the M1 connector must be connected to
the operators panel. For +24 V operation, the operators panel consumes
approximately 0.5 A. Determine the cable material and number of wires
for 0 V and +24 V based on the current rating. If +24 V is also used for
DI/DO on the machine, that also must be considered. For 0 V and +24 V,
connect all the power supply pins to ensure a reliable connection.
The M1B and M2B connectors are not required when the lines are
branched between the I/O card and operators panel so that only required
signals are connected to the operators panel.
CNC I/OC5 to C7
M1
M1A
M1B
To machine
DI/DO
M2
M2A
To machine DI/DO
(when M1B and
M2B are not used)
D Type B (product
qualifying for CE
marking)
M2B
CKD, CDX1,
CDX2, CDX3
Connect the M201 and M202 connectors of the I/O card (I/OE1, E2, or
E3) to the 22 DI points and eight DO points of the machine. The
connection between the M201 and M1A connectors is the same as that
between M1 and M1A for type A. Sourcetype I/O cards E1 to E3 require
the connection of an external 24 V power supply. The connection between
the M202 and MB2A connectors, therefore, differs from that between M2
and M2A for type A.
CNC I/OE1 to E3 External 24 VDC
power supply
M201
M1A
M1B
To machine
DI/DO
M202
MB2A
To machine DI/DO
(when M1B and
MB2B are not used)
363
MB2B
CKD, CDX1,
CDX2, CDX3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M1A
M1B
0V
33
X21.3
0V
0V
34
X21.2
0V
0V
35
X21.1
0V
0V
36
X21.0
0V
X20.5
37
X20.6
X16.7
38
X16.5
X16.7
X17.7
39
X17.5
X17.7
X18.7
40
X18.5
X18.7
X17.1
41
X21.7
X17.1
10
X17.0
42
X22.7
10
X17.0
11
X16.1
43
X22.6
11
X16.1
12
X16.0
44
X22.5
12
X16.0
13
X20.7
45
X22.4
13
14
X20.4
46
X22.3
14
15
X20.3
47
X22.2
15
16
X20.2
48
X22.1
16
17
X20.1
49
X22.0
17
49
18
X20.0
50
18
50
0V
33
Y51.7
0V
0V
34
Y51.6
0V
0V
35
Y51.5
0V
0V
36
Y51.4
0V
Y48.7
37
Y51.3
Y48.7
Y48.6
38
Y51.2
Y48.6
Y48.5
39
Y51.1
Y48.5
Y48.4
40
Y51.0
Y48.4
Y49.7
41
Y49.4
Y49.7
10
Y50.5
42
Y53.7
10
Y50.5
11
Y52.7
43
Y53.6
11
Y52.7
12
Y52.6
44
Y53.5
12
Y52.6
13
Y52.5
45
Y53.4
13
Y52.5
14
Y52.4
46
Y53.3
14
Y52.4
15
Y52.3
47
Y53.2
15
Y52.3
16
Y52.2
48
Y53.1
16
Y52.2
17
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
17
18
Y52.0
50
NC8
18
19
X21.4
20
X16.3
21
X16.2
22
X17.3
23
X17.2
24
X18.3
25
X18.2
26
X21.6
27
X21.5
28
29
+24V
30
+24V
31
+24V
32
+24V
33
19
X21.4
20
X16.3
21
X16.2
22
X17.3
23
X17.2
24
X18.3
25
X18.2
26
X21.6
27
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
Y48.0
26
Y48.1
27
Y48.2
28
29
30
31
32
35
36
37
38
X16.5
39
X17.5
40
X18.5
41
42
43
28
29
+24V
30
+24V
31
+24V
32
+24V
M2A
34
X22.6
44
45
46
47
48
M2B
33
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
Y48.0
26
Y48.1
27
Y48.2
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Y49.4
42
Y53.7
43
Y53.6
44
Y53.5
45
Y53.4
46
Y53.3
47
Y53.2
48
Y53.1
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
Y52.0
50
28
29
30
31
32
Hatch marks signals are used in the Machine Operators Panel Control PCB. Other signals
are possible to use for machine side DI/DO through the connectors M1B and M2B.
NOTE
1 X21.4 is an emergency stop signal (*ESP). It is used in the Machine Operators Panel and also
connected to M1B.
2 The same name signals (except 0V) in M1A, M1B, MB2A, M2B are connected point to point
through the Machine Operators Panel Control PCB.
364
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M1A
M1B
0V
33
X21.3
0V
0V
34
X21.2
0V
0V
35
X21.1
0V
0V
36
X21.0
0V
X20.5
37
X20.6
X16.7
38
X16.5
X16.7
X17.7
39
X17.5
X17.7
X18.7
40
X18.5
X18.7
X17.1
41
X21.7
X17.1
10
X17.0
42
X22.7
10
X17.0
11
X16.1
43
X22.6
11
X16.1
12
X16.0
44
X22.5
12
X16.0
13
X20.7
45
X22.4
13
14
X20.4
46
X22.3
14
15
X20.3
47
X22.2
15
16
X20.2
48
X22.1
16
17
X20.1
49
X22.0
17
49
18
X20.0
50
18
50
0V
33
Y51.7
0V
0V
34
Y51.6
0V
0V
35
Y51.5
0V
0V
36
Y51.4
0V
Y48.7
37
Y51.3
Y48.7
Y48.6
38
Y51.2
Y48.6
Y48.5
39
Y51.1
Y48.5
Y48.4
40
Y51.0
Y48.4
Y49.7
41
Y49.4
Y49.7
10
Y50.5
42
Y53.7
10
Y50.5
11
Y52.7
43
Y53.6
11
Y52.7
12
Y52.6
44
Y53.5
12
Y52.6
13
Y52.5
45
Y53.4
13
Y52.5
14
Y52.4
46
Y53.3
14
Y52.4
15
Y52.3
47
Y53.2
15
Y52.3
16
Y52.2
48
Y53.1
16
Y52.2
17
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
17
18
Y52.0
50
NC8
18
19
X21.4
20
X16.3
21
X16.2
22
X17.3
23
X17.2
24
X18.3
25
X18.2
26
X21.6
27
X21.5
28
29
+24V
30
+24V
31
+24V
32
+24V
33
19
X21.4
20
X16.3
21
X16.2
22
X17.3
23
X17.2
24
X18.3
25
X18.2
26
X21.6
27
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
Y48.0
26
Y48.1
27
Y48.2
28
NC3
29
NC4
30
NC5
31
NC6
32
NC7
35
36
37
38
X16.5
39
X17.5
40
X18.5
41
42
43
28
29
+24V
30
+24V
31
+24V
32
+24V
MB2A
34
X22.6
44
45
46
47
48
MB2B
33
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
Y48.0
26
Y48.1
27
Y48.2
28
NC3
29
NC4
30
NC5
31
NC6
32
NC7
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Y49.4
42
Y53.7
43
Y53.6
44
Y53.5
45
Y53.4
46
Y53.3
47
Y53.2
48
Y53.1
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
Y52.0
50
NC8
Hatch marks signals are used in the Machine Operators Panel Control PCB. Other signals
are possible to use for machine side DI/DO through the connectors M1B and MB2B.
NOTE
1 X21.4 is an emergency stop signal (*ESP). It is used in the Machine Operators Panel and also
connected to M1B.
2 The same name signals (except 0V) in M1A, M1B, MB2A, MB2B are connected point to point
through the Machine Operators Panel Control PCB.
365
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
MB2A (01) to
(04), (50)
M202(01) to (04),
(50)
COMO0 to
COMO4
Y51.7
Y51.6
0V, NC8
M202 (33)
MB2A (33)
M202 (34)
MB2A (34)
Y51.7
Y51.0
Y**.*
Y**.*
Y51.6
MB2A (40)
M202 (40)
Y51.0
M202 (**)
MB2A (**)
Y**.*
Y**.*
MB2B (**)
M202 (**)
MB2A (**)
Y**.*
Y**.*
MB2B (**)
Machine side DO
(Without relay of MB2B)
Machine
side DO
Example connection 1
Machine Operators Panel
Control PCB (Type B)
I/O card E1 to E3
COMO3
COMO2
COMO1
COMO0
COMO4
Y51.7
Y51.6
M202 (01)
MB2A (29)
NC4
NC4
MB2B (29)
M202 (02)
MB2A (30)
NC5
NC5
MB2B (30)
M202 (03)
MB2A (31)
NC6
NC6
MB2B (31)
M202 (04)
MB2A (32)
NC7
NC7
MB2B (32)
M202 (50)
MB2A (50)
NC8
NC8
MB2B (50)
M202 (33)
MB2A (33)
M202 (34)
MB2A (34)
Y51.7
Y**.*
Y**.*
Y51.6
Y51.0
M202 (40)
MB2A (40)
Y51.0
M202 (**)
MB2A (**)
Y**.*
Y**.*
MB2B (**)
M202 (**)
MB2A (**)
Y**.*
Y**.*
MB2B (**)
Machine side DO
(Without relay of MB2B)
Example connection 2
366
Machine
side DO
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D.4
The DI/DO signals at the following addresses (PMC) are used exclusively
for the operators panel.
OPERATORS PANEL
CONNECTION
SIGNALS
D List of operators panel
PMC ADDRESS
X20
#7
KD7
#6
KD6
#5
KD5
#4
KD4
#3
KD3
#2
KD2
#1
KD1
#0
KD0
#7
KEY
#6
X21
#5
:RSV1
#4
:ESP
#3
:OV8
#2
:OV4
#1
:OV2
#0
:OV1
#7
KST
#6
X22
#5
RSV3
#4
RSV2
#3
KA3
#2
KA2
#1
KA1
#0
KA0
Y51
#7
LD7
#6
LD6
#5
LD5
#4
LD4
#3
LD3
#2
LD2
#1
LD1
#0
LD0
D.4.1
:ESP (X21.4)
Emergency Stop
24 V inside
+24V
MA12932
MA12932
:ESP
M1A19
M1B19
Emergency stop
button
Setting pin
SA1 A
Operators panel
A : M1B19 pin used
B : M1B19 not used
(Set to A at shipment from factory)
367
D.4.2
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The key switch signal is input directly. Execute processing by using the
PMC so that the protect mode is reset at KEY=1.
On the PC board for controlling the machine operators panel, the signal
can be used as a generalpurpose input signal.
D.4.3
The override codes are input according to the table below. Execute
processing by using the PMC.
:OV1:OV8
(X21.021.3) Override
Signal
:OV8
:OV4
:OV2
:OV1
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
150%
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
D.4.4
KD0KD7 (X20.020.7)
KA0KA3 (X22.022.3),
KST (X22.7)
LD0LD7 (Y51.051.7)
RSV1RSV3
(X21.5, X22.422.5)
D.4.5
F292F299,
G242G249
The above PMC addresses are used as bit images for reading the key or
turning the LED on/off.
(See items D.2.2 and D.2.3 and Table D.5.3.)
368
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
D.5
SELFDIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTION
D.5.1
Status Display LED
The operators panel PCB (the reverse side of the operators panel) is
equipped with a green status display LED. It indicates the following
statuses.
Flashing about every second : Normal
On (No flashing) :
Test mode
Other than above :
Fault
D.5.2
Test Mode
To set the operators panel to test mode, turn the power on while holding
down the keys corresponding to bits 0 and 1 of PMC address F292.
Bit 0 of F292 corresponds to A1 on the smallsize operators panel and
to A6 on the fullkey operators panel. Bit 1 of F292 corresponds to B1
on the smallsize operators panel and to B6 on the fullkey operators
panel.
As soon as the test mode is assumed, all the LEDs flash seven times
simultaneously. By this it is possible to check whether the LED is faulty
or not. If any of the keys is depressed thereafter, the LED of the depressed
key lights up. By this it is possible to check whether the key is faulty or
not. In the test mode, however, neither the depressed key is transferred
to the PMC nor is it possible to light the LED from the PMC.
To exit from test mode, press the keys corresponding to bits 0 and 2 of
F292 simultaneously.
Bit 2 of F292 corresponds to C1 on the smallsize operators panel and
to C6 on the fullkey operators panel.
369
D.5.3
Key Board Address
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The address (equivalent to bit) for key signal readin or LED ON/OFF is
as shown in the table below.
Table D.5.3 (a) Key board address for small type operators panel
7
F292/G242
F3
F2
F1
F293/G243
F4
F294/G244
D4
BIT
PMC ADDRESS
F295/G245
F296/G246
F8
F297/G247
D8
(Note)
D3
C4
F6
F5
C3
D1
C1
B1
A1
D2
C2
B2
A2
B4
B3
A4
A3
D5
C5
B5
A5
D6
C6
B6
A6
A8
A7
C8
B8
(Note)
F298/G248
F9
D9
C9
B9
A9
F299/G249
F10
D10
(Note)
C10
B10
(Note)
A10
Key coordinates
NOTE
1 This address list is the standard machine operators panel external diagram for Fig. D.7.1 (a)
and (b).
2 The key coordinate keys B8, D8, B10, D10 used in 0TC are not available.
F292/G242
E1
C1
A1
E6
D6
C6
B6
A6
F293/G243
E2
C2
A2
E7
D7
C7
B7
A7
F294/G244
E3
C3
A3
E8
D8
C8
B8
A8
F295/G245
E5
C4
A4
E9
D9
C9
B9
A9
F296/G246
D2
C5
A5
E10
D10
C10
B10
A10
F297/G247
D4
D5
B2
E11
D11
C11
B11
A11
F298/G248
D1
B1
B4
E12
D12
C12
B12
A12
F299/G249
D3
B3
B5
E13
D13
C13
B13
A13
PMC ADDRESS
Key coordinates
NOTE
This address list is the standard machine operators panel external diagram for Fig. D.7.1 (c)
and (d).
370
D.6
SETTING OF
OPERATORS PANEL
AVAILABILITY IN
REGISTERING PMC
LADDER PROGRAM
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
CURRENT PARAMETER
;
;
;
;
PMC TYPE =M
RAREA =0
NO.=
371
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D.7
EXPLANATIONS FOR
OPERATORS PANEL
D.7.1
Configuration
372
42 key (T series),
46 key (M series),
full key type
Prepared for all key switches
4 bits
1 bits
1 bits
1 pcs (only for full key type)
Override rotary
switch
Emergency stop
button
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Fig. D.7.1 (a) Front view of operators panel for 9 small type CRT/MDI unit (T series)
373
APPENDIX
Fig. D.7.1 (b) Front view of operators panel for 9 small type CRT/MDI unit (M series)
374
B61393E/06
Cordinate system
Key switch (sheet key)
in the key describes LED (red)
Program protectkey
APPENDIX
375
Manual pulse generator
B61393E/06
Fig. D.7.1 (c) Front view of operators panel for full key 9 CRT/MDI unit (T series)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Cordinate system
Fig. D.7.1 (d) Front view of operators panel for full key 9 CRT/MDI unit (M series)
376
Weight 1.9 kg
Panel cutout
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Fig. D.7.1 (e) Operators panel for 9 small type CRT/MDI unit
NOTE
The above figure applies to type A. For type B, connector M2A is replaced with MB2A, and M2B
with MB2B.
377
B61393E/06
Weight 1.9 kg
Panel cutout
APPENDIX
Fig. D.7.1 (f) Operators panel for 9 full key CRT/MDI unit
NOTE
The above figure applies to type A. For type B, connector M2A is replaced with MB2A, and M2B
with MB2B.
378
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Differences between
types A and B
Differences in the
silkscreen printing on
the panel, other than the
key sheets
Type A
Does not qualify for CE marking
Type B
Qualifies for CE marking
379
APPENDIX
380
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
381
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Symbol
Meanings
AUTO
EDIT
MDI
JOG
INC
JOG
MPG
MPG
1
MPG
2
HOME
TEACH
OFSET
MESUR
?
NC
CNC alarm:
LED is turned on when CNC alarm. Key pad does not have an meanings.
?
MC
MACHINE alarm:
LED is turned on when Machine alarm.
Key pad does not have any meanings.
SINGL
BLOCK
Single block:
Single block program execution for test operation.
BLOCK
DELET
Block delete:
Execution block is stopped and jump blocks following/to next end of block (;)
in AUTO mode (Optional block skip).
PRG
STOP
382
English
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Symbol
Meanings
OPT
STOP
OPTIONAL STOP:
When this signal is turned on, auto running operation is stopped after executing M01 block.
DRY
RUN
DRY RUN:
When this signal is turned on, axes feed speed will be JOG feed speed not
command speed on the program.
To check the moving of tool without workpiece.
PRG
TEST
MACHINE LOCK:
When this signal is tuned on and auto running operation, axes are not moved
but position screen on CRT is only executed.
To check the program.
MPG
X
WORK
LIGHT
MPG
INTRT
AXIS
INHBT
LOW
1
MEDL
10
WORK LIGHT:
WORK LIGHT on/off control
HANDLE INTERRUPTION:
Selecting this button in automatic operation, the moving value of manual handle feed is added to the moving value of program.
AXES INHIBIT:
The specific axis or all axes are stopped to move.
1,
MED
100
+X
TRVRS
TRAVERSE:
Executing jog feed in on this button the jog feed is executed in the rapid traverse.
CYCLE
START
CYCLE START:
Automatic operation is started.
CYCLE
STOP
CYCLE STOP:
Automatic operation is stopped.
383
English
CLNT
ON
CLNT
OFF
APPENDIX
Symbol
B61393E/06
Meanings
COOLANT ON:
Coolant is started.
COOLANT OFF:
Coolant is stopped.
CLNT
AUTO
COOLANT AUTO:
COOLANT ON/OFF control in AUTO operation.
SPDL
100%
SPDL
DEC
SPDL
INC
SPDL
CW
SPDL
CCW
SPDL
STOP
SPDL
JOG
SPINDLE STOP:
The rotation of spindle motor is stopped.
384
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D.8
MOUNTING OF
READER/PUNCHER
Rotary
Emergency
stop button
PCB
Protect key
Screw
M3 6 mm
M5
Front
Cable J28
(With plate B)
Plate B
Nut (M4)
Plate A
Blind face
Front
Plate A
385
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
When cable J28 is prepared by the machine tool builder, make the plate
B according to the following figure.
19
23
5
R1
75
65
47
23.1
42
11.0
2M3
Dimensions of plate B
Specification No.
Remarks
Cable J28
A02B0083K801
5m
(including plate B)
386
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D.9
PCB FOR MACHINE
OPERATORS PANEL
CONTROL
Increase of maximum I/O
numbers
When the PC board for controlling the machine operators panel is used,
the Series 0 supports the number of I/O points indicated in the table below.
The numbers in the table do not include the I/O points added by using the
FANUC I/O Link.
A
I/OC7
or
I/OE3
I/OB2
or
I/OF1
DI
104
104
64+6
22
256
DO
72
72
64
200
Number of Number of
operators
control
panel I/Os
signals
Maximum
number or
I/Os
E=A+B+CD
Input/output signal
regulation
D Input/output signal
regulation
NOTE
When the diode is inserted in series in the contact in order
to prevent a current detour, also set within the above
described voltage.
When the detour prevention diode is not inserted, up to 2
switches can simultaneously close the contact.
When more than 3 have closed the contact, the data cannot
be correctly exchanged.
2) *ESP/KEY/*OV1*OV8
Contact capacity
Under 1 mA (DC26.4V)
387
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
30 mA max.
3V max.
DC24V (approx. 0.5A) is supplied to the operators panel which uses this
operators panel control PCB by the CNC.
This power source can use the items described below.
1) This PCB
2) Keyboard
3) LED
4) Generaluse input 6 points
5) Other operators panel lamps, for LED (maximum 0.1A)
388
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
7M3 hole
Fig. D.9 (a) External dimensions of printed circuit board and brackets
389
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Interface
D Connector signal
arrangement
M1A
M2A
01
0V
33
X21.3
01
0V
33
Y51.7
02
0V
34
X21.2
02
0V
34
Y51.6
03
0V
35
X21.1
03
0V
35
Y51.5
04
0V
36
X21.0
04
0V
36
Y51.4
05
X20.5
37
X20.6
05
Y48.7
37
Y51.3
06
X16.7
38
X16.5
06
Y48.6
38
Y51.2
07
X17.7
39
X17.5
07
Y48.5
39
Y51.1
08
X18.7
40
X18.5
08
Y48.4
40
Y51.0
09
X17.1
41
X21.7
09
Y49.7
41
Y49.4
10
X17.0
42
X22.7
10
Y50.5
42
Y53.7
11
X16.1
43
X22.6
11
Y52.7
43
Y53.6
12
X16.0
44
X22.5
12
Y52.6
44
Y53.5
13
X20.7
45
X22.4
13
Y52.5
45
Y53.4
14
X20.4
46
X22.3
14
Y52.4
46
Y53.3
15
X20.3
47
X22.2
15
Y52.3
47
Y53.2
16
X20.2
48
X22.1
16
Y52.2
48
Y53.1
17
X20.1
49
X22.0
17
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
18
X20.0
50
18
Y52.0
50
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X21.4
X16.3
X16.2
X17.3
X17.2
X18.3
X18.2
X21.6
X21.5
28
29
30
31
32
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
Y48.0
26
Y48.1
27
Y48.2
28
29
30
31
32
NOTE
The signals within
are the signals used by this operators
panel control P.C.B.
M1B
01
02
0V
03
0V
04
19
20
21
05
06
X16.7
07
X17.7
08
X18.7
09
X17.1
10
X17.0
11
X16.1
12
X16.0
22
X21.4
X16.3
X16.2
X17.3
M2B
33
01
34
02
0V
35
03
0V
36
04
0V
37
05
Y48.7
33
38
X16.5
06
Y48.6
39
X17.5
07
Y48.5
40
X18.5
08
Y48.4
41
09
Y49.7
42
10
Y50.5
11
Y52.7
44
12
Y52.6
45
13
Y52.5
46
14
Y52.4
47
15
Y52.3
48
16
Y52.2
17
49
17
18
50
18
13
14
15
16
23
24
25
26
X17.2
X18.3
X18.2
X21.6
27
43
28
29
30
31
32
+24V
+24V
+24V
X22.6
390
19
Y50.2
20
Y50.3
21
Y50.0
22
Y49.3
23
Y49.1
24
Y49.0
25
Y48.0
26
Y48.1
27
Y48.2
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Y49.4
42
Y53.7
43
Y53.6
44
Y53.5
45
Y53.4
46
Y53.3
47
Y53.2
48
Y53.1
Y52.1
49
Y53.0
Y52.0
50
28
29
30
31
32
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
CDX1
CDX2
01
:ESP
01
COM3
02
COM1
02
:OV1
03
:OV2
04
:OV4
COM2
05
:OV8
KEY
06
CDX3
01
02
CDK
A
01
01
02 :KYD0 02 :KYD1
03 :KYD2 03 :KYD3
04 :KYD4 04 :KYD5
05 :KYD6 05 :KYD7
06 :KCY0 06 :KCY1
07 :KCY2 07 :KCY3
08 :KCY4 08 :KCY5
09 :KCY6 09 :KCY7
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
:LD0
13
14
:LD1
14
:LD9
15
:LD2
15
:LD10
16
:LD3
16
:LD11
17
:LD4
17
:LD12
18
:LD5
18
:LD13
19
:LD6
19
:LD14
20
:LD7
20
:LD15
21
:T01
21
:T02
22
:T11
22
:T12
23
:T21
23
:T22
24
:T31
24
:T32
25
:LD8
25
391
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Table D.9 (a) shows the connector standard name on the cable side.
Table D.9 (a)
Name
Cable length
Standard name
Manufacturer
M1A
MR50LMH
HONDA TSUSHIN
M1B
MR50LFH
HONDA TSUSHIN
M2A
MR50LMH
HONDA TSUSHIN
M2B
MR50LFH
HONDA TSUSHIN
CDK
FAS5017
YAMAICHI DENKI
CDX1
505102 Housing
2759GL Contact
NIHON MOREX
CDX2
505106 Housing
2759GL Contact
NIHON MOREX
CDX3
505102 Housing
2759GL Contact
NIHON MOREX
392
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
When the detour prevention diode is not inserted, up to 2 key switches can
be simultaneously inputted. A0 to H7 in Table D.9 (b) shows the key
switch numbers of Figure D.9 (f).
Table D.9 (b)
7
F292
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
F293
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
F294
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0
F295
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
F296
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
E0
F297
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
F0
F298
G7
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
G0
F299
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
BIT
PMC ADDRESS
:KCY0
:KCY1
:KCY2
:KCY3
:KCY4
:KCY5
:KCY6
:KCY7
:KYD7
:KYD6
:KYD5
:KYD4
:KYD3
:KYD2
:KYD1
:KYD0
CKDA6
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CKDB6
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
CKDA7
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0
CKDB7
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
CKDA8
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
E0
CKDB8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
F0
CKDA9
G7
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
G0
CKDB9
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
CKDB5
CKDA5
CKDB4
CKDA4
CKDB3
CKDA3
Detour prevention
diode
CKDB2
CKDA2
393
LEDPMC address
correspondence table
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A0H7 in Table D.9 (c) shows the LED numbers of Figure D.9 (g) and
Figure D.9 (h).
Table D.9 (c)
7
F242
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
F243
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
F244
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0
F245
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
F246
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
E0
F247
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
F0
F248
G7
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
G0
F249
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
BIT
PMC ADDRESS
394
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
:T31
:T21
:T11
:T01
:LD0
:LD1
CKDA24
CKDA23
CKDA22
CKDA21
CKDA13
A0
CKDA14
A1
CKDA15
A2
CKDA16
A3
CKDA17
A4
CKDA18
A5
CKDA19
A6
CKDA20
A7
:LD2
:LD3
:LD4
:LD5
:LD6
:LD7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Fig. D.9 (g)
395
:T32
:T22
:T12
:T02
:LD8
:LD9
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
CKDB24
CKDB23
CKDB22
CKDB21
CKDB13
E0
CKDB14
E1
CKDB15
E2
:LD10
CKDB16
E3
:LD11
CKDB17
E4
:LD12
CKDB18
E5
:LD13
CKDB19
E6
:LD14
CKDB20
E7
:LD15
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
H0
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
Fig. D.9 (h)
396
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
KEY/:ESP/:OV1 to
:OV8 connection
example
Emergency stop
signal
397
APPENDIX
398
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
E.1
CONNECTION OF
MACHINE
OPERATORS PANEL
INTERFACE UNIT
APPENDIX
Machine operators
panel I/F unit
E.1.1
Function Overview
Number of DI/DO points
Operators panel control
PCB allocation to the
I/O Link DI/DO
(Name of
DIor DO
module)
Number of matrix key switch
inputs
DI/DO=128/128
DI
DO
(OC02I) (OC02O)
64
DI
(OC03I)
32
64
32
32
96
DO
(OC03O)
96
64
DI/DO=256/256
96
32
128
96
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.2
System Configuration
Machine operators
panel
CNC
Note 2
FANUC
JD1B
I/O Link
(I/O Link)
CM26
CM15
JD1A
Other machine
interface
CM16
CM17
CPD1
(24V)
Note 1
Matrix DI/DO
:ESP, OTR, and
general-purpose
DI/DO
General-purpose
DI/DO
General-purpose
DI/DO
LM/SM
CNB1
Power ON/OFF
Power magnetics
cabinet
CNA1
:ESP , OTR
Input unit power
ON/OFF
CRT/MDI
Spindle amp LM/
SM
: OT release signal
NOTE
1 Power requirements
When 60% of the DI/DO points are on, this interface unit requires 1.0 A
(not including the current required by the CRT and MDI).
2 The cable connected to CM26 must be no longer than 30 cm.
400
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.3
Signal Assignment
Connector pin signal
assignment
CM15 (Matrix DI/DO)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
:ESP
OTR
DI00
DI04
DI03
DI05
DI12
+5E
DI11
B
DI06
DO06
DI07
DO07
DI16
DO16
DI17
D017
ECM1
ECM2
D102
+5E
DI01
DI10
DI14
DI13
DI15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
DI20
DI24
DI23
DI25
DI27
DO00
DI05
DO01
DI15
DO02
DO03
DO05
0V
DO10
DO12
DO14
+5E
B
DI22
+5E
DI21
DI26
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
DO04
0V
0V
DO11
DO13
DO15
+5E
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
0V
DO20
DO22
DO24
DO26
0V
DO30
DO32
DO34
DO36
0V
+5E
DI30
DI32
DI34
DI36
+5E
B
0V
DO21
DO23
DO25
DO27
0V
DO31
DO33
DO35
DO37
0V
+5E
DI31
DI33
DI35
DI37
+5E
10
8
6
4
2
0M
DO36
SM
0M
LM
ECM2
ECM1
SM
0M
LM
19
17
15
13
11
OTR
:ESP
COM
EOF
EON
20
18
16
14
12
LM
SM
0M
0M
05
06
07
08
EON
EOF
COM
0V
09
10
11
12
3
+5V
0V
2
0V
5
0V
1
+24V
4
+24V
Pins shaded by
are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the
same name are connected directly to one another.
NOTE
1 LM and SM also function as input terminals to the A/D
converter.
2 OM is connected to 0 V on the PCB.
401
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
+5V
TXB
RXB
10
8
6
4
2
:TXB
:RXB
19
17
15
13
11
0V
0V
0V
20
18
16
14
12
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
TXA
RXA
10
8
6
4
2
:TXA
:RXA
A
0V
:MND1
:KYD0
:KYD1
:KYD2
:KYD3
:KYD4
:KYD5
:KYD6
:KYD7
:KYC0
:KYC1
:KYC2
:KYC3
:KYC4
:KYC5
:KYC6
:KYC7
:KYC8
:KYC9
:KYCA
:KYCB
:BZMD
0V
:LD0
:LD8
:LD1
:LD9
:LD2
:LD10
:LD3
:LD11
:LD4
:LD12
:LD5
:LD13
:LD6
:LD14
:LD7
:LD15
LC1L
LC2L
LC3L
LC4L
0V
LC1H
LC2H
LC3H
LC4H
0V
402
19
17
15
13
11
0V
0V
0V
20
18
16
14
12
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
DInx
General-purpose DI
LM
DOnx
General-purpose DO
SM
:ESP
Emergency stop
0M
ECM1
:ESP
:KYDx
OTR
OT release
:KYCx
ECM2
:LDx
common signal
:MNDI
NOTE
See Subsection E.1.4 for details of connection and signal
meanings.
403
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.4
Interface
Generalpurpose DI
+5E
DI00DI37
RV
0V
0.75V or lower
Generalpurpose DO
+24V
DO00DO37
Photocoupler
+
FET
0V
0.03A
0.1mA
0.1V
NOTE
When using an LED at the DO point, connect an external
resistor that meets the requirements of the LED.
404
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Matrix DI
D Key switch addresses
:KYC0
CM26A06
KY07
KY06
KY05
KY04
KY03
KY02
KY01
KY00
BZ0
:KYC1
CM26B06
KY17
KY16
KY15
KY14
KY13
KY12
KY11
KY10
BZ1
:KYC2
CM26A07
KY27
KY26
KY25
KY24
KY23
KY22
KY21
KY20
BZ2
:KYC3
CM26B07
KY37
KY36
KY35
KY34
KY33
KY32
KY31
KY30
BZ3
:KYC4
CM26A08
KY47
KY46
KY45
KY44
KY43
KY42
KY41
KY40
BZ4
:KYC5
CM26B08
KY57
KY56
KY55
KY54
KY53
KY52
KY51
KY50
BZ5
:KYC6
CM26A09
KY67
KY66
KY65
KY64
KY63
KY62
KY61
KY60
BZ6
:KYC7
CM26B09
KY77
KY76
KY75
KY74
KY73
KY72
KY71
KY70
BZ7
:KYC8
CM26A10
KY87
KY86
KY85
KY84
KY83
KY82
KY81
KY80
BZ8
:KYC9
CM26B10
KY97
KY96
KY95
KY94
KY93
KY92
KY91
KY90
BZ9
:KYCA
CM26A11
KYA7
KYA6
KYA5
KYA4
KYA3
KYA2
KYA1
KYA0
BZA
:KYCB
CM26B11
KYB7
KYB6
KYB5
KYB4
KYB3
KYB2
KYB1
KYB0
BZB
:KYD7
CM26B05
:KYD6
CM26A05
:KYD5
:KYD4
:KYD3
:KYD2
:KYD1
:KYD0
CM26B04
CM26A04
CM26B03
CM26A03
CM26B02
CM26A02
:BZMD
CM26A12
:MNDI
CM26B01
0V
CM26A01
When :MNDI =
When :MNDI =
405
D Mode selection
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
KY03
KY01
KY23
KY21
:KYC1
:KYC2
:KYC3
:KYD3
:KYD2
:KYD1
:KYD0
[Method 2]
D Attaching detour prevention diodes to enable three simultaneous
inputs
Action : Connect the :MNDI signal
(see item D Key switch addresses) to 0V.
406
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
NOTE
A diode must be connected in series with a switch, as shown
below.
Detour prevention
diode
:KYCn
:KYDn
- This PCB can raise a key input confirmation sound on key inputs. The
condition to raise a key input confirmation sound is set in 8-bit units,
or in :KYCn units. If :BZMD and common :KYCn are
disconnected, a KYnx input causes the key input confirmation sound
to sound. If they are connected, a KYnx input does not cause the key
input confirmation sound to sound.
To sound the key input confirmation sound, the DO (PMC address DO
+ 00.7 BIT) MD07 must have been turned to 1 (see Section E.1.5).
NOTE
1 A diode is necessary to connect :BZMD and common, as
shown below.
2 This setting cannot be changed when power is supplied.
3 The key input confirmation sound sounds at the moment a
current path is formed between common signal :KYCn
and data signal :KYDx. It does not sound when the path
is disconnected. If key switches are used, the alarm sounds
at the moment a key is pressed. It does not sound when a
key is released or when a key is held pressed.
:KYCn
:BZMD
407
Example
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
:KYC1
:KYC2
:KYC3
:BZMD
D Signal specification
Contact rating
Note )
NOTE
This voltage must be maintained even when detour
prevention diodes are used.
408
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Matrix DO
D LED addresses
CM26-A24
CM26-A23
CM26-A22
CM26-A21
CM26-A13
L1L0
CM26-A14
CM26-A15
L1L1
CM26-A16
L1L3
CM26-A17
L1L4
CM26-A18
L1L5
CM26-A19
L1L6
CM26-A20
L1L7
L1L2
L2L0
L2L1
L2L2
L2L3
L2L4
L2L5
L2L6
L2L7
L3L0
L3L1
L3L2
L3L3
L3L4
L3L5
L3L6
L3L7
L4L0
L4L1
L4L2
L4L3
L4L4
L4L5
L4L6
L4L7
NOTE
The timing for the common signals are shown below. Their
duty cycle is 2 ms for LEDs being on and 6 ms for LEDs
being off.
LC4L (H)
LC3L (H)
LC2L (H)
LC1L (H)
8ms
409
LC4H
LC3H
LC2H
LC1H
:LD8
:LD9
:LD10
:LD11
:LD12
:LD13
:LD14
:LD15
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
CM26-B24
CM26-B23
CM26-B22
CM26-B21
CM26-B13
L1H0
CM26-B14
L1H1
CM26-B15
L1H2
CM26-B16
L1H3
CM26-B17
L1H4
CM26-B18
L1H5
CM26-B19
L1H6
CM26-B20
L1H7
L2H0
L2H1
L2H2
L2H3
L2H4
L2H5
L2H6
L2H7
L3H0
L3H1
L3H2
L3H3
L3H4
L3H5
L3H6
L3H7
L4H0
L4H1
L4H2
L4H3
L4H4
L4H5
L4H6
L4H7
D Internal circuit
+5V
100 W
410
CM26
LCnL (H)
CM26
:LDx
LnL(H)x
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Signal specifications
Forward current
30mA max
Reverse voltage
3V max
Analog inputs received from the outside are forwarded without change to
output terminals.
D Connection diagram
(example)
Analog inputs from the spindle amp being output for load meter and speed
meter indications.
Spindle
amp
LM
1, 2
0M
0M
SM
5, 6
CNA1
LM
0M
0M
SM
Load
meter
(Operators
panel
Speed
meter
CNB1
Machine operators
panel interface unit
D Analog signal
specifications
Analog inputs received on the Machine operators panel interface unit are
converted to five-bit digital values, which are sent to the CNC though the
I/O link.
See Section E.1.5 for PMC addresses.
LM conversion data : LM03 to LM07
SM conversion data : SM03 to SM07
0V to +15V
0V to +10V
Note)
NOTE
Any voltage higher than +10V is converted to the same
digital value as +10V is.
D A/D conversion
specifications
Conversion error
5%
(max)
Resolution
5 bit
(min)
411
D Emergency stop
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
A09
17
B09
:ESP
24V
ECM1
ECM1
CM15
CNA1
Machine operators
panel interface unit
D OT release
:ESP
Power magnetics
cabinet
19
OTR
B10
10
ECM2
ECM2
CM15
ECM
CNA1
Machine operators
panel interface unit
412
OTR
OTR
Power magnetics
cabinet
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
ON switch
EON
OFF switch
ECF
11
EON
13
ECF
15
COM
COM
CM15
CNA1
Machine operators
panel interface unit
Input unit
NOTE
The LM, OM, SM, D036, ECM, EON, EOF, COM, ESP, and
OTR signals are all assigned to the pins of one connector
(CNA1).
They can be connected to the machine using only one
cable.
413
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.5
PMC Addresses
BIT NUMBER
PMC
ADDRESS
DI+00
DI+01
DI+02
DI+03
DI+04
DI+05
DI+06
DI+07
DI+08
DI+09
DI+10
DI+11
DI+12
DI+13
DI+14
DI+15
DI+16
DI+17
DI+18
DI+19
DI+20
DI+21
DO+00
DO+01
DO+02
DO+03
DO+04
DO+05
DO+06
DO+07
DO+08
DO+09
DO+10
DO+11
DO+12
7
KY07
KY17
KY27
KY37
KY47
KY57
KY67
KY77
DI07
DI17
DI27
DI37
LM07
SM07
6
KY06
KY16
KY26
KY36
KY46
KY56
KY66
KY76
DI06
DI16
DI26
DI36
LM06
SM06
5
FUSE
KY05
KY15
KY25
KY35
KY45
KY55
KY65
KY75
DI05
DI15
DI25
DI35
LM05
SM05
4
KY04
KY14
KY24
KY34
KY44
KY54
KY64
KY74
DI04
DI14
DI24
DI34
LM04
SM04
3
KY03
KY13
KY23
KY33
KY43
KY53
KY63
KY73
DI03
DI13
DI23
DI33
LM03
SM03
KY02
KY12
KY22
KY32
KY42
KY52
KY62
KY72
DI02
DI12
DI22
DI32
KY01
KY11
KY21
KY31
KY41
KY51
KY61
KY71
DI01
DI11
DI21
DI31
KY00
KY10
KY20
KY30
KY40
KY50
KY60
KY70
DI00
DI10
DI20
DI30
KY86
KY96
KYA6
KYB6
KY85
KY95
KYA5
KYB5
KY84
KY94
KYA4
KYB4
KY83
KY93
KYA3
KYB3
KY82
KY92
KYA2
KYB2
KY81
KY91
KYA1
KYB1
KY80
KY90
KYA0
KYB0
MD07
L1L7
L2L7
L3L7
L4L7
L1H7
L2H7
L3H7
L4H7
DO07
DO17
DO27
DO37
MD06
L1L6
L2L6
L3L6
L4L6
L1H6
L2H6
L3H6
L4H6
DO06
DO16
DO26
DO36
FUSE
L1L5
L2L5
L3L5
L4L5
L1H5
L2H5
L3H5
L4H5
DO05
DO15
DO25
DO35
L1L4
L2L4
L3L4
L4L4
L1H4
L2H4
L3H4
L4H4
DO04
DO14
DO24
DO34
L1L3
L2L3
L3L3
L4L3
L1H3
L2H3
L3H3
L4H3
DO03
DO13
DO23
DO33
L1L2
L2L2
L3L2
L4L2
L1H2
L2H2
L3H2
L4H2
DO02
DO12
DO22
DO32
L1L1
L2L1
L3L1
L4L1
L1H1
L2H1
L3H1
L4H1
DO01
DO11
DO21
DO31
L1L0
L2L0
L3L0
L4L0
L1H0
L2H0
L3H0
L4H0
DO00
DO10
DO20
DO30
FUSE
DInx
General-purpose DI
LM0x
SM0x
KYnx
Ky signal (matrix)
LnL (H) x
DOnx
General-purpose DO
MD07
Buzzer mode selection (It is possible to sound the buzzer at the matrix DI input by turning this to 1.
MD06
Buzzer ON/OFF setting (The buzzer sounds as this is turned to 1 and stops as it is turned to 0. This operation is
performed irrespective of MD07.)
414
B61393E/06
E.1.6
Major Connection
Precautions
APPENDIX
D Use flat cables for connectors CM15, CM16, CM17, and CM26.
When splitting and connecting flat cables to the machine operators
panel or other equipment, be careful not to break or short the
conductors.
D All signals with the same name described in Section E.1.3 are
connected to one another.
D One of the holes for mounting the PCB is also used for grounding.
Before mounting the PCB, check the location of that hole with the
diagram in Section E.1.10.
E.1.7
State of the LEDs on
the Machine Operators
Panel Interface Unit
L1 (green) :
Monitors +5E. When on, it indicates that the fuse is intact.
When off, it indicates that the fuse has blown.
L2 (green) :
Monitors key scanning. When blinking, it indicates that the keys are
being scanned normally. When on or off, it indicates key scanning is at
halt.
L3 (red) :
When on, it indicates that an alarm condition has occurred. When off, it
indicates that there is no alarm condition. It monitors :INT0 and
:INT1.
415
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.8
Connector
(on the Cable Side)
Specifications
Connector
Major use
Specification
CM15,
CM16,
CM17
General-purpose
DI/DO
HIF3BA-34D-2.54R :
Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
CNA1
Signal forwarding
(to the machine)
PCR-E20FS :
Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN CO.,
LTD.
CNB1
Signal forwarding
(to the machine
operators panel)
MVSTBR2.5/12-ST-5.08 :
Manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT
GmbH & Co.
JD1A,
JD1B
PCR-E20FS :
Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN CO.,
LTD.
CPD1
Power supply
CM26
Matrix DI/DO
HIF3BB-50D-2.54R :
Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
NOTE
1 Several types of connectors are available for use at the
other end of the cable leading to connector CNB1. Refer to
brochures of PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co..
The connector used on the machine operators panel
interface unit side is MSTBVA2.5/12-G-5.08.
2 Crimped type cable connector is available for CA40. For
purchase from FANUC, please specify as below.
A02B-0029-K890 : Solder type
A02B-0029-K892 : Crimped type
416
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.9
Machine Operators
Panel Interface Unit
Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector
Locations)
22
89
A1
17
10
60
15
11
CNA1
B17
JD1B
CM15
A1
22
A1
JD1A
CM16
16
41
B17
75
150
CM17
CNB1
A1
B25
CPD1
CM26
B17
124
89
26
310
Unit: mm
Tolerance: 5 (mm)
CPD1
CND1
CNA1
CA40
JD1A
JD2B
10mm
Applox. 100mm
1.6mm
417
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.10
Machine Operators
Panel Interface Unit
Mounting Dimension
Diagram
Mounting hole position
18
114
CM17
150
110
20
CM26
20
CM16
296
310
Unit : mm
418
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
diagram below.
12
10
10
15
18
25
10
CM26
130
CM17
130
14
20
10
10
10
CM15
CM16
12
14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number 03A and beyond.
It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
diagram below.
14
10
13
12
8
126
CM17
124
21
14
CM26
CM16
10
12
CM15
13
17
13
14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number 03A and beyond.
419
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.11
Fuse Mounting
Position
CM15
JD1B
CM16
JD1A
CM17
FU2
FU3
CPD1
FU1
CM26
FU1
+24V fuse (general-purpose DO, this supplies printed board power protection)
FU2
FU3
NOTE
FU2 is not mounted on Revision 05A or later.
420
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
E.1.12
Option Card 1
D Outline
OVER RIDE
TURRET No.
1
%
0
100
150 %
SPINDLE SPEED
9
1000
D Function Overview
rpm
2000
3000 rpm
NOTE
Following usage cannot be done.
Use a levelmeter which includes 40 LEDs.
Use four levelmeter which includes 10 LEDs.
421
APPENDIX
422
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Block diagram of
operators panel
:LEDAa:LEDAg
:LEDBa:LEDBg
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED8
LED7
LED6
LED5
LEDCOM1
LEDCOM4
LEDCOM7
LEDCOM9
:LEDCa:LEDCg
:LEDDa:LEDDg
7
7
LED12
LEDCOM2
LEDCOM5
LEDCOM8
LEDCOM10
:LEDEa:LEDEg
:LEDFa:LEDFg
LED11
LED9
LED16
LED15
LED14
LED13
7
7
LED20
LEDCOM3
LEDCOM6
:LM01:LM20
LED10
LED19
LED18
LED17
20
LEVEL METER 1
LMCOM1
LMCOM2
423
LEVEL METER 2
Address allocation
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
PMC address, that is allocated for 7 segment LED data and levelmeter
data, is as follows.
PMC
ADDRESS
DO+00
DO+01
S
S
S
DO+13
DO+14
DO+15
DO+16
DO+17
DO+18
DO+19
DO+20
DO+21
DO+22
DO+23
Levelmeter 1 data
DO+24
Levelmeter 2 data
DO+28
DO+29
(DO : The first address of area that allocated for this PCB)
shows the area where this PCB is actuary uses.
424
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
BCD data
BCD data
...
0 0 0 0
...
0 1 1 1
...
0 0 0 1
...
1 0 0 0
...
0 0 1 0
...
1 0 0 1
...
0 0 1 1
...
1 1 1 1
(Zerosuppress)
...
0 1 0 0
...
0 1 0 1
...
0 1 1 0
425
Example
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
DISPLAY
LED8
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
Zerosuppress
LED16
LED15
LED14
LED13
LED12
LED11
LED10
LED20
LED9
LED19
LED18
LED17
PMC
ADDRESS
DO+13
DO+14
DO+15
DO+16
DO+17
DO+18
DO+19
DO+20
DO+21
DO+22
426
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Levelmeter display
Binary data
427
......
0 0 0 0 0
......
0 0 0 0 1
......
0 0 0 1 0
......
0 0 0 1 1
......
0 0 1 0 0
......
0 0 1 0 1
......
0 0 1 1 0
......
0 0 1 1 1
......
0 1 0 0 0
......
0 1 0 0 1
......
0 1 0 1 0
......
0 1 0 1 1
......
0 1 1 0 0
......
0 1 1 0 1
......
0 1 1 1 0
......
0 1 1 1 1
......
1 0 0 0 0
......
1 0 0 0 1
......
1 0 0 1 0
......
1 0 0 1 1
......
1 0 1 0 0
Connector table
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
CM18
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
:LEDAa
:LEDAc
:LEDAe
:LEDAg
:LEDBa
:LEDBc
:LEDBe
:LEDBg
:LEDCa
:LEDCc
:LEDCe
:LEDCg
:LEDDa
:LEDDc
:LEDDe
:LEDDg
:LEDEa
:LEDEc
:LEDEe
:LEDEg
:LEDFa
:LEDFc
:LEDFe
:LEDFg
CM19
B
:LEDAb
:LEDAd
:LEDAf
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
:LEDBb
:LEDBd
:LEDBf
:LEDCb
:LEDCd
:LEDCf
:LEDDb
:LEDDd
:LEDDf
:LEDEb
:LEDEd
:LEDEf
A
:LM20
:LM18
:LM16
:LM14
:LM12
:LM10
:LM08
:LM06
:LM04
:LM02
B
:LM19
:LM17
:LM15
:LM13
:LM11
:LM09
:LM07
:LM05
:LM03
:LM01
LEDCOM1
LEDCOM3
LEDCOM5
LEDCOM7
LEDCOM9
LMCOM1
LEDCOM2
LEDCOM4
LEDCOM6
LEDCOM8
LEDCOM10
LMCOM2
:LEDFb
:LEDFd
:LEDFf
:LED_a:LED_g
:LM20:LM01
428
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
:LED_b
:LED_c
:LED_d
:LED_e
:LED_f
:LED_g
a
f
b
COMMON
g
e
c
d
LEDCOM_
NOTE
Type of 7 segment LEDs must be COMMON ANODE TYPE.
(2) levelmeter
Connect the lowest level LED with signal :LM01, the second level
with signal :LM02, @@@@, the highest level with signal :LM20.
:LM20
:LM19
:LM18
:LM17
:LM16
:LM15
:LM14
:LM13
:LM12
:LM11
:LM10
:LM09
:LM08
:LM07
:LM06
:LM05
:LM04
:LM03
:LM02
:LM01
lower level
higher level
LMCOM_
NOTE
Type of LEDs must be COMMON ANODE TYPE.
429
Connector specification
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
HIF3BB34D2.54R (HIROSE)
C
M
1
9
C
M
P
1
C
M
P
1
C
M
1
8
HIF3BB50D2.54R (HIROSE)
Order specification
A02B0099J290
430
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Assemblage
Option card 1
Flat cable
Spacer
431
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
432
B61393E/06
F.1
GENERAL
F.2
SETTING OF I/O
SIGNALS
APPENDIX
433
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
F.3
CONNECTION
F.3.1
The connection diagram is shown below. For the details of the signal
cable, refer to the FANUC PMCM with I/O Link.
Connection of the
Control Unit and
Operators Panel
Connection Unit C1
PMCM
Operators
panel connection unit C1
JD1B
K1X
CS3
JD1A1
M11
M12
To I/O Unit or Power Mate
Power
magnetic
cabinet
JD1A
M13
M14
Power
supply
CAP
J36
CP14
CP61
Optical I/O
Link adapter
PMC
M
K3X
JD1
Optical I/O
Link adapter
K4X
JD1
JD1A1
Operators
panel
connection
unit C1
K3X
JD1B
COP1
COP1
Optical cable
434
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
F.3.2
Signal Connection
between Operators
Panel Connection Unit
C1 and Machine Side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
Xn+0.0
Xn+0.2
Xn+0.4
Xn+0.6
Xn+1.0
Xn+1.2
Xn+1.4
Xn+1.6
Xn+2.0
Xn+2.2
Xn+2.4
Xn+2.6
Xn+3.0
Xn+3.2
Xn+3.4
Xn+3.6
Xn+4.0
Xn+4.2
Xn+4.4
Xn+4.6
Xn+5.0
Xn+5.2
Xn+5.4
Xn+5.6
0V
B
Xn+0.1
Xn+0.3
Xn+0.5
Xn+0.7
Xn+1.1
Xn+1.3
Xn+1.5
Xn+1.7
Xn+2.1
Xn+2.3
Xn+2.5
Xn+2.7
Xn+3.1
Xn+3.3
Xn+3.5
Xn+3.7
Xn+4.1
Xn+4.3
Xn+4.5
Xn+4.7
Xn+5.1
Xn+5.3
Xn+5.5
Xn+5.7
CM12 (FAP5007#4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
Xn+6.0
Xn+6.2
Xn+6.4
Xn+6.6
Xn+7.0
Xn+7.2
Xn+7.4
Xn+7.6
Xn+8.0
Xn+8.2
Xn+8.4
Xn+8.6
Xn+9.0
Xn+9.2
Xn+9.4
Xn+9.6
Xn+10.0
Xn+10.2
Xn+10.4
Xn+10.6
Xn+11.0
Xn+11.2
Xn+11.4
Xn+11.6
0V
CM13 (FAP5007#4)
B
Xn+6.1
Xn+6.3
Xn+6.5
Xn+6.7
Xn+7.1
Xn+7.3
Xn+7.5
Xn+7.7
Xn+8.1
Xn+8.3
Xn+8.5
Xn+8.7
Xn+9.1
Xn+9.3
Xn+9.5
Xn+9.7
Xn+10.1
Xn+10.3
Xn+10.5
Xn+10.7
Xn+11.1
Xn+11.3
Xn+11.5
Xn+11.7
A
+5V
Ym+0.0
Ym+0.2
Ym+0.4
Ym+0.6
Ym+1.0
Ym+1.2
Ym+1.4
Ym+1.6
Ym+2.0
Ym+2.2
Ym+2.4
Ym+2.6
Ym+3.0
Ym+3.2
Ym+3.4
Ym+3.6
Ym+4.0
Ym+4.2
Ym+4.4
Ym+4.6
Ym+5.0
Ym+5.2
Ym+5.4
0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B
+5V
Ym+0.1
Ym+0.3
Ym+0.5
Ym+0.7
Ym+1.1
Ym+1.3
Ym+1.5
Ym+1.7
Ym+2.1
Ym+2.3
Ym+2.5
Ym+2.7
Ym+3.1
Ym+3.3
Ym+3.5
Ym+3.7
Ym+4.1
Ym+4.3
Ym+4.5
Ym+4.7
Ym+5.1
Ym+5.3
Ym+5.5
CM11
J135
CM12
J136
CM13
J137
CM14 (FAP2007#4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
Ym+5.6
Ym+6.0
Ym+6.2
Ym+6.4
Ym+6.6
Ym+7.0
Ym+7.2
Ym+7.4
Ym+7.6
0V
B
Ym+5.7
Ym+6.1
Ym+6.3
Ym+6.5
Ym+6.7
Ym+7.1
Ym+7.3
Ym+7.5
Ym+7.7
In J135, J136 and J137, use the connectors for flat cable
FAS5017 or FAS5018 of Yamaichi Denki on the operators
panel connection unit C1 side.
In J138, use the connectors for flat cable
FAS2017 or FAS2018 of Yamaichi Denki.
CP61 (Japan FCI), Brown connector for cable: SMS 3PINS5
3
2
0V
435
1
+24V
CM14
J138
CM11 (FAP5007#4)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Addresses of DI/DO in the FANUC PMCM with I/O Link are as follows:
DI/DO
Address
DGN. NO
DI
128 byte = 1024 point (MAX)
X3072X3199
50725199
DO
128 byte = 1024 point (MAX)
Y3200Y3327
52005327
12 byte=96 points
DO
8 byte=64 points
Example
Address
DGN.No.
DI
X3100 X3111
5100 5111
DO
Y3200 Y3207
5200 5207
As a concrete example,
DI signal (Xn+6.2) of pin A2 of CM12 connector is X3106. 2.
DO signal (Ym+1.7) of pin B9 of CM13 connector is Y3201.7.
436
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
Xn+0.0
CM11 (A01)
RV
Xn+0.1
CM11 (B01)
RV
Xn+0.2
CM11 (A02)
RV
Xn+0.3
CM11 (B02)
RV
Xn+0.4
CM11 (A03)
RV
Xn+0.5
CM11 (B03)
RV
Xn+0.6
CM11 (A04)
RV
Xn+0.7
CM11 (B04)
RV
Xn+1.0
CM11 (A05)
RV
Xn+1.1
CM11 (B05)
RV
Xn+1.2
CM11 (A06)
RV
Xn+1.3
CM11 (B06)
RV
Xn+1.4
CM11 (A07)
RV
Xn+1.5
CM11 (B07)
RV
Xn+1.6
CM11 (A08)
RV
Xn+1.7
CM11 (B08)
RV
CM11 (A25)
437
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
Xn+2.0
CM11 (A09)
RV
Xn+2.1
CM11 (B09)
RV
Xn+2.2
CM11 (A10)
RV
Xn+2.3
CM11 (B10)
RV
Xn+2.4
CM11 (A11)
RV
Xn+2.5
CM11 (B11)
RV
Xn+2.6
CM11 (A12)
RV
Xn+2.7
CM11 (B12)
RV
Xn+3.0
CM11 (A13)
RV
Xn+3.1
CM11 (B13)
RV
Xn+3.2
CM11 (A14)
RV
Xn+3.3
CM11 (B14)
RV
Xn+3.4
CM11 (A15)
RV
Xn+3.5
CM11 (B15)
RV
Xn+3.6
CM11 (A16)
RV
Xn+3.7
CM11 (B16)
RV
438
0V
(CM11A25)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
Xn+4.0
CM11 (A17)
RV
Xn+4.1
CM11 (B17)
RV
Xn+4.2
CM11 (A18)
RV
Xn+4.3
CM11 (B18)
RV
Xn+4.4
CM11 (A19)
RV
Xn+4.5
CM11 (B19)
RV
Xn+4.6
CM11 (A20)
RV
Xn+4.7
CM11 (B20)
RV
Xn+5.0
CM11 (A21)
RV
Xn+5.1
CM11 (B21)
RV
Xn+5.2
CM11 (A22)
RV
Xn+5.3
CM11 (B22)
RV
Xn+5.4
CM11 (A23)
RV
Xn+5.5
CM11 (B23)
RV
Xn+5.6
CM11 (A24)
RV
Xn+5.7
CM11 (B24)
RV
439
0V
(CM11A25)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
Xn+6.0
CM12 (A01)
RV
Xn+6.1
CM12 (B01)
RV
Xn+6.2
CM12 (A02)
RV
Xn+6.3
CM12 (B02)
RV
Xn+6.4
CM12 (A03)
RV
Xn+6.5
CM12 (B03)
RV
Xn+6.6
CM12 (A04)
RV
Xn+6.7
CM12 (B04)
RV
Xn+7.0
CM12 (A05)
RV
Xn+7.1
CM12 (B05)
RV
Xn+7.2
CM12 (A06)
RV
Xn+7.3
CM12 (B06)
RV
Xn+7.4
CM12 (A07)
RV
Xn+7.5
CM12 (B07)
RV
Xn+7.6
CM12 (A08)
RV
Xn+7.7
CM12 (B08)
RV
CM12 (A25)
440
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
Xn+8.0
CM12 (A09)
RV
Xn+8.1
CM12 (B09)
RV
Xn+8.2
CM12 (A10)
RV
Xn+8.3
CM12 (B10)
RV
Xn+8.4
CM12 (A11)
RV
Xn+8.5
CM12 (B11)
RV
Xn+8.6
CM12 (A12)
RV
Xn+8.7
CM12 (B12)
RV
Xn+9.0
CM12 (A13)
RV
Xn+9.1
CM12 (B13)
RV
Xn+9.2
CM12 (A14)
RV
Xn+9.3
CM12 (B14)
RV
Xn+9.4
CM12 (A15)
RV
Xn+9.5
CM12 (B15)
RV
Xn+9.6
CM12 (A16)
RV
Xn+9.7
CM12 (B16)
RV
441
0V
(CM12A25)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
Xn+10.0
CM12 (A17)
RV
Xn+10.1
CM12 (B17)
RV
Xn+10.2
CM12 (A18)
RV
Xn+10.3
CM12 (B18)
RV
Xn+10.4
CM12 (A19)
RV
Xn+10.5
CM12 (B19)
RV
Xn+10.6
CM12 (A20)
RV
Xn+10.7
CM12 (B20)
RV
Xn+11.0
CM12 (A21)
RV
Xn+11.1
CM12 (B21)
RV
Xn+11.2
CM12 (A22)
RV
Xn+11.3
CM12 (B22)
RV
Xn+11.4
CM12 (A23)
RV
Xn+11.5
CM12 (B23)
RV
Xn+11.6
CM12 (A24)
RV
Xn+11.7
CM12 (B24)
RV
442
0V
(CM12A25)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
CM13 (A02)
DV
Yn+0.0
Yn+0.1
Relay
CM13 (B02)
DV
Yn+0.2
CM13 (A03)
DV
Yn+0.3
CM13 (B03)
DV
Yn+0.4
CM13 (A04)
DV
Yn+0.5
CM13 (B04)
DV
Yn+0.6
CM13 (A05)
DV
Yn+0.7
CM13 (B05)
DV
Yn+1.0
CM13 (A06)
DV
Yn+1.1
CM13 (B06)
DV
Yn+1.2
CM13 (A07)
DV
Yn+1.3
CM13 (B07)
DV
Yn+1.4
CM13 (A08)
DV
Yn+1.5
CM13 (B08)
DV
Yn+1.6
CM13 (A09)
DV
Yn+1.7
CM13 (B09)
DV
CM13 (A25)
443
0V
+24V
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
CM13 (A10)
DV
Yn+2.0
Yn+2.1
Relay
CM13 (B10)
DV
Yn+2.2
CM13 (A11)
DV
Yn+2.3
CM13 (B11)
DV
Yn+2.4
CM13 (A12)
DV
Yn+2.5
CM13 (B12)
DV
Yn+2.6
CM13 (A13)
DV
Yn+2.7
CM13 (B13)
DV
Yn+3.0
CM13 (A14)
DV
Yn+3.1
CM13 (B14)
DV
Yn+3.2
CM13 (A15)
DV
Yn+3.3
CM13 (B15)
DV
Yn+3.4
CM13 (A16)
DV
Yn+3.5
CM13 (B16)
DV
Yn+3.6
CM13 (A17)
DV
Yn+3.7
CM13 (B17)
DV
0V
(CM13A25)
444
0V
+24V
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
CM13 (A18)
DV
Yn+4.0
Yn+4.1
Relay
CM13 (B18)
DV
Yn+4.2
CM13 (A19)
DV
Yn+4.3
CM13 (B19)
DV
Yn+4.4
CM13 (A20)
DV
Yn+4.5
CM13 (B20)
DV
Yn+4.6
CM13 (A21)
DV
Yn+4.7
CM13 (B21)
DV
Yn+5.0
CM13 (A22)
DV
Yn+5.1
CM13 (B22)
DV
Yn+5.2
CM13 (A23)
DV
Yn+5.3
CM13 (B23)
DV
Yn+5.4
CM13 (A24)
DV
Yn+5.5
CM13 (B24)
DV
Yn+5.6
CM14 (A01)
DV
Yn+5.7
CM14 (B01)
DV
0V
(CM13A25)
445
0V
+24V
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
CM14 (A02)
DV
Yn+6.0
Yn+6.1
Relay
CM14 (B02)
DV
Yn+6.2
CM14 (A03)
DV
Yn+6.3
CM14 (B03)
DV
Yn+6.4
CM14 (A04)
DV
Yn+6.5
CM14 (B04)
DV
Yn+6.6
CM14 (A05)
DV
Yn+6.7
CM14 (B05)
DV
Yn+7.0
CM14 (A06)
DV
Yn+7.1
CM14 (B06)
DV
Yn+7.2
CM14 (A07)
DV
Yn+7.3
CM14 (B07)
DV
Yn+7.4
CM14 (A08)
DV
Yn+7.5
CM14 (B08)
DV
Yn+7.6
CM14 (A09)
DV
Yn+7.7
CM14 (B09)
DV
CM14 (A10)
446
0V
+24V
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
F.4
EXTERNAL
DIMENSION
Approx. 70 mm
447
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
448
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
G.1
OUTLINE
APPENDIX
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
Additional I/OB3 and F3 are I/O cards featuring a FANUC I/O Link
interface. Additional I/OB3 cards have the same number of input/output
signals as those of additional I/OB2 cards, thus maintaining the
compatibility of the interface with the machine.
Additional I/OB3 cards use sinktype output signals, while additional
I/OF3 cards use sourcetype output signals. Both have the same number
of input/output signals: 104 inputs and 72 outputs.
449
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
G.2
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL STANDARDS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The input signals are the same as those of the builtin I/O card. See the
input signal standard in Section 6.2.1.
The output signals for sinktype additional I/OB3 are the same as those
of the builtin I/O card. See the description of output signal A in the
output signal standard in Section 6.2.1. For sourcetype additional
I/OF3, the following applies:
The device of the output signal driver on this I/O board turns on and off
8 points DO signals per 1 device.
DO driver IC on this board observes and protects a over current. If the
protection circuit observes a over current, it works to turn off the output
signal, and then output current does not appears and it is not over current
condition. So, the driver turns on the output signal again. Therefore, if
the signal shorts to the ground or over current condition continuously, the
output signal is reperted to turn on and off. This condition may be happen
if instantaneous current is more. Further, DO driver IC on this board
observes and protects a over heat. If a DO signal shorts to the ground as
it must keep a over current condition and the device temperature may be
more heat, then over heat protection circuit will be worked and all 8 points
DO of the 1 device must be turned off. As the cancellation of protect
condition, at once turn off the output signal logically using ladder after
device temperature is cool, or at once power off.
A group of the 8 points of the 1 device is followings.
Group #0: Ym+0.0Ym+0.7, Group#1 : Ym+1.0Ym+1.7,
Group #2: Ym+2.0Ym+2.7, Group#3 : Ym+3.0Ym+3.7,
Group #4: Ym+4.0Ym+4.7, Group#5 : Ym+5.0Ym+5.7,
Group #6: Ym+6.0Ym+6.7, Group#7 : Ym+7.0Ym+7.7,
Group #8: Ym+8.0Ym+8.7
If some DO signal is turned on on the diagnosis screen but the signal is
really turned off, it may be turned off by other signal of the same group.
It means if one of the DO signals has over heat condition, the other 8
points DO signals of the same group including itself must be turned off.
In this case, at once power off and remove a cause of the over load.
450
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
DOCOM
IN#0
IN#1
IN#7
OHD
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD
451
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Caution of a DO
connection
NOTE
Dont connect with parallel as followings.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
Relay
DV
DV
0V
NOTE
If using a resister for slight lighting as followings, connect a
diode for leak current prevention.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
Resister for
slight lighting
0V
DV
452
Lamp
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
G.3
CONNECTION
(1) Connection of the
control unit and
additional I/OB3 and
F3
The connection outline is shown below. For the details of the signal cable,
refer to section 6.3.2.
PMC-M
Additional
I/O-B3
CS3
K1X
JD1A1
JD1B
M61
M62
To I/O Unit or
Power Mate
JD1A
M78
Power
supply
M79
J36
CAP
M80
CP14
CP5
Optical I/O
Link adapter
PMC
-M
JD1A1
K3X
JD1
Optical I/O
Link adapter
JD1
K4X
COP1
COP1
Optical cable
453
Additional
I/O-B3
K3X
JD1B
Power
magnetic
cabinet
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
JD1B
09
+5V
07
Control unit
Control unit
03
SOUT
01
SIN
JD1A
+5V
07
08
17
04
*SOUT
02
*SIN
10
03
SOUT
01
SIN
08
*SOUT
02
*SIN
+24V
0V
0V
13
0V
11
0V
17
04
CP51
15
19
06
05
454
19
06
05
09
10
15
0V
13
0V
11
0V
20
+5V
18
+5V
16
0V
14
0V
12
0V
20
+5V
18
+5V
16
0V
14
0V
12
0V
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M62(MR50RMA)
0V
1
0V
2
19
0V
3
20
0V
4
21
5 Ym+0.7
22
6 Ym+0.6
23
7 Ym+0.5
24
8 Ym+0.4
25
9 Ym+1.7
26
10 Ym+1.6
27
11 Ym+3.7
28
12 Ym+3.6
29
13 Ym+3.5
30
14 Ym+3.4
31
15 Ym+3.3
32
16 Ym+3.2
17 Ym+3.1
18 Ym+3.0
Xn+8.4
Xn+5.3
Xn+5.2
Xn+5.1
Xn+5.0
Xn+6.3
Xn+6.2
Xn+8.6
Xn+8.5
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
Ym+1.5
Ym+1.4
Ym+1.3
Ym+1.2
Ym+1.1
Ym+1.0
Ym+0.0
Ym+0.1
Ym+0.2
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Xn+8.3
Xn+8.2
Xn+8.1
Xn+8.0
Xn+7.6
Xn+5.5
Xn+5.4
Xn+6.5
Xn+8.7
Xn+9.7
Xn+9.6
Xn+9.5
Xn+9.4
Xn+9.3
Xn+9.2
Xn+9.1
Xn+9.0
M78(MR50RMA)
0V
1
0V
2
19
0V
3
20
4 COM1
21
5 Xn+0.5
22
6 Xn+1.0
23
7 Xn+1.3
24
8 Xn+1.6
25
9 Xn+2.1
26
10 Xn+2.4
27
11 Xn+2.7
28
12 Xn+3.2
29
13 Xn+3.4
30
14 Xn+3.6
31
15 Xn+4.0
32
16 Xn+4.2
17 Xn+4.4
18 Xn+4.6
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Ym+2.7
Ym+2.6
Ym+2.5
Ym+2.4
Ym+2.3
Ym+2.2
Ym+2.1
Ym+2.0
Ym+0.3
Ym+4.7
Ym+4.6
Ym+4.5
Ym+4.4
Ym+4.3
Ym+4.2
Ym+4.1
Ym+4.0
M80(MR50RMA)
0V
1
0V
2
19
0V
3
20
0V
4
21
5 Ym+7.5
22
6 Ym+8.0
23
7 Ym+8.3
24
8 Ym+8.6
25
9 Xn+10.1
26
10 Xn+10.4
27
11 Xn+10.7
28
12 Xn+11.2
29
13 Xn+11.4
30
14 Xn+11.6
31
15 Xn+12.0
32
16 Xn+12.2
17 Xn+12.4
18 Xn+12.6
M79(MR20RMA)
1 Ym+5.0
8
2 Ym+5.1
9
3 Ym+5.2
10
4 Ym+5.3
11
5 Ym+5.4
12
6 Ym+5.5
13
7 Ym+5.6
455
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Xn+0.0
Xn+0.2
Xn+0.4
Xn+0.7
Xn+1.2
Xn+1.5
Xn+2.0
Xn+2.3
Xn+2.6
Xn+3.1
Xn+3.3
Xn+3.5
Xn+3.7
Xn+4.1
Xn+4.3
Xn+4.5
Xn+4.7
33
34
Ym+7.1
35
Ym+7.3
36
Ym+7.6
37
Ym+8.1
38
Ym+8.4
39
Ym+8.7
40
Xn+10.2
41
Xn+10.5
42
Xn+11.0
43
COM4
44
COM5
45
+24V
46
+24V
47
+24V
48
49
50
Ym+7.0
Ym+7.2
Ym+7.4
Ym+7.7
Ym+8.2
Ym+8.5
Xn+10.0
Xn+10.3
Xn+10.6
Xn+11.1
Xn+11.3
Xn+11.5
Xn+11.7
Xn+12.1
Xn+12.3
Xn+12.5
Xn+12.7
Xn+0.1
Xn+0.3
Xn+0.6
Xn+1.1
Xn+1.4
Xn+1.7
Xn+2.2
Xn+2.5
Xn+3.0
COM2
COM3
+24V
+24V
+24V
Ym+5.7
Ym+6.0
Ym+6.1
Ym+6.2
Ym+6.3
Ym+6.4
14 Ym+6.5
15 Ym+6.6
16 Ym+6.7
17
0V
18
0V
19
20
M61
J40
H50.F
M78
J42
H50.F
M62
J41
H50.F
M80
J44
H50.F
M79
J43
H20.F
M61(MR50RMA)
0V
1
0V
2
19
0V
3
20
0V
4
21
5 Xn+7.5
22
6 Xn+5.7
23
7 Xn+5.6
24
8 Xn+6.7
25
9 Xn+6.6
26
10 Xn+6.4
27
11 Xn+6.1
28
12 Xn+6.0
29
13 Xn+7.7
30
14 Xn+7.4
31
15 Xn+7.3
32
16 Xn+7.2
17 Xn+7.1
18 Xn+7.0
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M61(MR50RMA)
1
0V
2
0V
19
3
0V
20
4
0V
21
5 Xn+7.5
22
6 Xn+5.7
23
7 Xn+5.6
24
8 Xn+6.7
25
9 Xn+6.6
26
10 Xn+6.4
27
11 Xn+6.1
28
12 Xn+6.0
29
13 Xn+7.7
30
14 Xn+7.4
31
15 Xn+7.3
32
16 Xn+7.2
17 Xn+7.1
18 Xn+7.0
Xn+8.4
Xn+5.3
Xn+5.2
Xn+5.1
Xn+5.0
Xn+6.3
Xn+6.2
Xn+8.6
Xn+8.5
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
M78(MR50RMA)
1
0V
2
0V
19
3
0V
20
4 COM1
21
5 Xn+0.5
22
6 Xn+1.0
23
7 Xn+1.3
24
8 Xn+1.6
25
9 Xn+2.1
26
10 Xn+2.4
27
11 Xn+2.7
28
12 Xn+3.2
29
13 Xn+3.4
30
14 Xn+3.6
31
15 Xn+4.0
32
16 Xn+4.2
17 Xn+4.4
18 Xn+4.6
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Xn+8.3
Xn+8.2
Xn+8.1
Xn+8.0
Xn+7.6
Xn+5.5
Xn+5.4
Xn+6.5
Xn+8.7
Xn+9.7
Xn+9.6
Xn+9.5
Xn+9.4
Xn+9.3
Xn+9.2
Xn+9.1
Xn+9.0
0V
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Ym+7.0
Ym+7.2
Ym+7.4
Ym+7.7
Ym+8.2
Ym+8.5
Xn+10.0
Xn+10.3
Xn+10.6
Xn+11.1
Xn+11.3
Xn+11.5
Xn+11.7
Xn+12.1
Xn+12.3
Xn+12.5
Xn+12.7
0V
MB80(MR50RMA)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DOCOM
DOCOM
0V
0V
Ym+7.5
Ym+8.0
Ym+8.3
Ym+8.6
Xn+10.1
Xn+10.4
Xn+10.7
Xn+11.2
Xn+11.4
Xn+11.6
Xn+12.0
Xn+12.2
Xn+12.4
Xn+12.6
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Ym+7.1
Ym+7.3
Ym+7.6
Ym+8.1
Ym+8.4
Ym+8.7
Xn+10.2
Xn+10.5
Xn+11.0
COM4
COM5
+24V
+24V
+24V
Xn+0.1
Xn+0.3
Xn+0.6
Xn+1.1
Xn+1.4
Xn+1.7
Xn+2.2
Xn+2.5
Xn+3.0
COM2
COM3
+24V
+24V
+24V
MB62(MR50RMA)
1 DOCOM
2 DOCOM
19 Ym+1.5
3
0V
20 Ym+1.4
4
0V
5 Ym+0.7 21 Ym+1.3
6 Ym+0.6 22 Ym+1.2
7 Ym+0.5 23 Ym+1.1
8 Ym+0.4 24 Ym+1.0
9 Ym+1.7 25 Ym+0.0
10 Ym+1.6 26 Ym+0.1
11 Ym+3.7 27 Ym+0.2
12 Ym+3.6 28
13 Ym+3.5 29
14 Ym+3.4 30
15 Ym+3.3 31
16 Ym+3.2 32
17 Ym+3.1
18 Ym+3.0
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Xn+0.0
Xn+0.2
Xn+0.4
Xn+0.7
Xn+1.2
Xn+1.5
Xn+2.0
Xn+2.3
Xn+2.6
Xn+3.1
Xn+3.3
Xn+3.5
Xn+3.7
Xn+4.1
Xn+4.3
Xn+4.5
Xn+4.7
0V
Ym+2.7
Ym+2.6
Ym+2.5
Ym+2.4
Ym+2.3
Ym+2.2
Ym+2.1
Ym+2.0
Ym+0.3
Ym+4.7
Ym+4.6
Ym+4.5
Ym+4.4
Ym+4.3
Ym+4.2
Ym+4.1
Ym+4.0
0V
MB79(MR20RMA)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MB80
MB62
MB79
H20.F
H50.F
Ym+5.0
Ym+5.1
Ym+5.2
Ym+5.3
Ym+5.4
Ym+5.5
Ym+5.6
Ym+5.7
Ym+6.0
Ym+6.1
Ym+6.2
Ym+6.3
Ym+6.4
H50.F
14 Ym+6.5
15 Ym+6.6
16 Ym+6.7
17 DOCOM
18 DOCOM
19
0V
20
0V
M61
M78
Magnetic cabinet
456
8
9
10
11
12
13
H50.F
H50.F
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
I/OF3
No.
Xn+0#0
M78
M78
33
Xn+0#1
M78
M78
19
Xn+0#2
M78
M78
34
Xn+0#3
M78
M78
20
Xn+0#4
M78
M78
35
Xn+0#5
M78
M78
05
Xn+0#6
M78
M78
21
Xn+0#7
M78
M78
36
Xn+1#0
M78
M78
06
Xn+1#1
M78
M78
22
Xn+1#2
M78
M78
37
Xn+1#3
M78
M78
07
Xn+1#4
M78
M78
23
Xn+1#5
M78
M78
38
Xn+1#6
M78
M78
08
Xn+1#7
M78
M78
24
Xn+2#0
M78
M78
39
Xn+2#1
M78
M78
09
Xn+2#2
M78
M78
25
Xn+2#3
M78
M78
40
Xn+2#4
M78
M78
10
Xn+2#5
M78
M78
26
Xn+2#6
M78
M78
41
Xn+2#7
M78
M78
11
Xn+3#0
M78
M78
27
Xn+3#1
M78
M78
42
Xn+3#2
M78
M78
12
Xn+3#3
M78
M78
43
Xn+3#4
M78
M78
13
457
I/OF3
No.
M78
M78
04
M78
M78
28
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
Signal
address
Xn+3#5
B61393E/06
I/OB3
I/OF3
No.
I/OB3
I/OF3
No.
M78
M78
44
M78
M78
28
Xn+3#6
M78
M78
14
Xn+3#7
M78
M78
45
Xn+4#0
M78
M78
15
Xn+4#1
M78
M78
46
Xn+4#2
M78
M78
16
Xn+4#3
M78
M78
47
Xn+4#4
M78
M78
17
Xn+4#5
M78
M78
48
Xn+4#6
M78
M78
18
Xn+4#7
M78
M78
49
Xn+5#0
M61
M61
23
Xn+5#1
M61
M61
22
Xn+5#2
M61
M61
21
Xn+5#3
M61
M61
20
Xn+5#4
M61
M61
39
Xn+5#5
M61
M61
38
Xn+5#6
M61
M61
07
Xn+5#7
M61
M61
06
Xn+6#0
M61
M61
12
Xn+6#1
M61
M61
11
Xn+6#2
M61
M61
25
Xn+6#3
M61
M61
24
Xn+6#4
M61
M61
10
Xn+6#5
M61
M61
40
Xn+6#6
M61
M61
09
Xn+6#7
M61
M61
08
M78
M78
29
Always sink in
input
ut
Use M61 pins 29, 30, 31,
and 32 for +24 V.
Xn+4#0 to Xn+4#7 are direct input signal B (for highspeed signal input).
458
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Signal
address
I/OF3
No.
Xn+7#0
M61
M61
18
Xn+7#1
M61
M61
17
Xn+7#2
M61
M61
16
Xn+7#3
M61
M61
15
Xn+7#4
M61
M61
14
Xn+7#5
M61
M61
05
Xn+7#6
M61
M61
37
Xn+7#7
M61
M61
13
Xn+8#0
M61
M61
36
Xn+8#1
M61
M61
35
Xn+8#2
M61
M61
34
Xn+8#3
M61
M61
33
Xn+8#4
M61
M61
19
Xn+8#5
M61
M61
27
Xn+8#6
M61
M61
26
Xn+8#7
M61
M61
41
Xn+9#0
M61
M61
49
Xn+9#1
M61
M61
48
Xn+9#2
M61
M61
47
Xn+9#3
M61
M61
46
Xn+9#4
M61
M61
45
Xn+9#5
M61
M61
44
Xn+9#6
M61
M61
43
Xn+9#7
M61
M61
42
I/OF3
No.
Always sink in
input
ut
459
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
Signal
address
B61393E/06
I/OF3
No.
Xn+10#0
M80
MB80
39
Xn+10#1
M80
MB80
09
Xn+10#2
M80
MB80
25
Xn+10#3
M80
MB80
40
Xn+10#4
M80
MB80
10
Xn+10#5
M80
MB80
26
Xn+10#6
M80
MB80
41
Xn+10#7
M80
MB80
11
Xn+11#0
M80
MB80
27
Xn+11#1
M80
MB80
42
Xn+11#2
M80
MB80
12
Xn+11#3
M80
MB80
43
Xn+11#4
M80
MB80
13
Xn+11#5
M80
MB80
44
Xn+11#6
M80
MB80
14
Xn+11#7
M80
MB80
45
Xn+12#0
M80
MB80
15
Xn+12#1
M80
MB80
46
Xn+12#2
M80
MB80
16
Xn+12#3
M80
MB80
47
Xn+12#4
M80
MB80
17
Xn+12#5
M80
MB80
48
Xn+12#6
M80
MB80
18
Xn+12#7
M80
MB80
49
460
I/OF3
No.
M80
MB80
29
B61393E/06
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
Table G.3 (b) Pin assignment for output signals and common
signal pin assignment for those signals
Signal
g
address
Signal pin
I/OB3
No.
I/OF3
No.
Ym+0#0
M62
25
MB62
25
Ym+0#1
M62
26
MB62
26
Ym+0#2
M62
27
MB62
27
Ym+0#3
M62
08
MB62
08
Ym+0#4
M62
07
MB62
07
Ym+0#5
M62
06
MB62
06
Ym+0#6
M62
05
MB62
05
Ym+0#7
M62
41
MB62
41
Ym+1#0
M62
24
MB62
24
Ym+1#1
M62
23
MB62
23
Ym+1#2
M62
22
MB62
22
Ym+1#3
M62
09
MB62
09
Ym+1#4
M62
21
MB62
21
Ym+1#5
M62
19
MB62
19
Ym+1#6
M62
20
MB62
20
Ym+1#7
M62
10
MB62
10
Ym+2#0
M62
40
MB62
40
Ym+2#1
M62
39
MB62
39
Ym+2#2
M62
38
MB62
38
Ym+2#3
M62
37
MB62
37
Ym+2#4
M62
36
MB62
36
Ym+2#5
M62
35
MB62
35
Ym+2#6
M62
34
MB62
34
Ym+2#7
M62
33
MB62
33
461
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Signal pin
Signal
address
Signal pin
I/OB3
No.
I/OF3
No.
Ym+3#0
M62
18
MB62
18
Ym+3#1
M62
17
MB62
17
Ym+3#2
M62
16
MB62
16
Ym+3#3
M62
15
MB62
15
Ym+3#4
M62
14
MB62
14
Ym+3#5
M62
13
MB62
13
Ym+3#6
M62
12
MB62
12
Ym+3#7
M62
11
MB62
11
Ym+4#0
M62
49
MB62
49
Ym+4#1
M62
45
MB62
45
Ym+4#2
M62
47
MB62
47
Ym+4#3
M62
46
MB62
46
Ym+4#4
M62
45
MB62
45
Ym+4#5
M62
44
MB62
44
Ym+4#6
M62
43
MB62
43
Ym+4#7
M62
42
MB62
42
Ym+5#0
M79
01
MB79
01
Ym+5#1
M79
02
MB79
02
Ym+5#2
M79
03
MB79
03
Ym+5#3
M79
04
MB79
04
Ym+5#4
M79
05
MB79
05
Ym+5#5
M79
06
MB79
06
Ym+5#6
M79
07
MB79
07
Ym+5#7
M79
08
MB79
08
462
B61393E/06
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
Signal pin
Signal
address
Signal pin
I/OB3
No.
I/OF3
No.
Ym+6#0
M79
09
MB79
09
Ym+6#1
M79
10
MB79
10
Ym+6#2
M79
11
MB79
11
Ym+6#3
M79
12
MB79
12
Ym+6#4
M79
13
MB79
13
Ym+6#5
M79
14
MB79
14
Ym+6#6
M79
15
MB79
15
Ym+6#7
M79
16
MB79
16
Ym+7#0
M80
33
MB80
33
Ym+7#1
M80
19
MB80
19
Ym+7#2
M80
34
MB80
34
Ym+7#3
M80
20
MB80
20
Ym+7#4
M80
35
MB80
35
Ym+7#5
M80
05
MB80
05
Ym+7#6
M80
21
MB80
21
Ym+7#7
M80
36
MB80
36
Ym+8#0
M80
06
MB80
06
Ym+8#1
M80
22
MB80
22
Ym+8#2
M80
37
MB80
37
Ym+8#3
M80
07
MB80
07
Ym+8#4
M80
23
MB80
23
Ym+8#5
M80
38
MB80
38
Ym+8#6
M80
08
MB80
08
Ym+8#7
M80
24
MB80
24
463
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
G.4
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL
ASSIGNMENT ON
FANUC I/O LINK
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Address
DGN. NO
DI 128byte=1024 point
(MAX)
X3072 X3199
50725199
DO 128byte=1024 point
(MAX)
Y3200Y3327
52005327
Number of points
DI
13byte=104 point
DO
9byte=72 point
Therefore, the signal names DI (Xn + j.j) and DO (Ym + j.j) of the
additional I/OB3 and F3 can be freely allocated in the range:
3072
3200
n 3187
m 3319
Example
Address
DGN. NO
DI
X3100X3112
51005112
DO
Y3200Y3208
52005208
As a concrete example,
DI signal (Xn + 11.2) of pin 12 of M80 connector is X3111.2.
DO signal (Ym + 4.7) of pin 42 of M62 connector is Y3204.7.
464
M79 (I/OB3)
MB79 (I/OF3)
M62 (I/OB3)
MB62(I/OF3)
Mounting hole
M80 (I/OB3)
MB80(I/OF3)
M78
M61
Mounting hole
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
G.5
DIMENSIONS
Reserve space
465
G. ADDITIONAL I/OB3, F3
APPENDIX
466
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.1
OUTLINE
PMCM
Printed circuit board
M25
COP4
PMC
Optical connector
I/O unit
0C
Master printed
circuit board
PMC
Power unit
0C
Master printed circuit board
M25
Optical connector
467
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.2
CONFIGURATION OF
THE I/O UNIT
H.2.1
Configuration of the I/O
Unit
The I/O unit is a unit for mounting the I/O modules, with the following
components.
D I/O base unit
A motor board to mount various modules. Four types of I/O base units
are offered with I/O module mount capacity of 4, 6, 8 and 10 modules.
D I/O Interface module
A module is for controlling I/O module. One of IF01A or IF01B is
always necessary. IF01A is connected to the NC control unit with
an optical fiber cable to control the I/O module. It can control up to
3 other I/O units. When expanding the I/O unit, IF01B is connected
with the IF01A mounted on I/O unit with an electric cable to control
the I/O module. Up to three IF01Bs can be connected to one IF01A.
IF04C can also be mounted to expand the I/O unit. The IF04C is
connected to the NC control unit with an optical fiber cable to control
up to four IF01As.
D I/O module
Various I/O modules are prepared for the input/output control of the
PMC. Details are described in after the next section.
Fig. H.2.1 (a) is an example of the I/O unit construction (maximum
components).
Metal cable
CNC
Control unit
Optical fiber
cable
CA15
PSU
M25
COP4
IEO1A
Base #0
CA16 CA15
CA16 CA15
CA16
PSU
IEO1B
PSU
IEO1B
PSU
IEO1B
Base #2
Base #3
Base #1
468
Group
#0
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Metal cable
CNC
control unit
Optical fiber
cable
M25
Base #0
Base #1
Base #2
Base #3
CA15
PSU
COP4
IEO1A
I/O base unit
IFO4C
COP4
COP2A
COP2B
COP2C
COP2D
CA15
PSU
COP4
IEO1A
PSU
COP4
IEO1A
CA16 CA15
CA16 CA15
PSU
IEO1B
PSU
IEO1B
CA16 CA15
CA16 CA15
PSU
IEO1B
PSU
IEO1B
CA16 CA15
CA16 CA15
PSU
IEO1B
PSU
IEO1B
CA16 CA15
CA16 CA15
PSU
IEO1B
PSU
IEO1B
CA16
Group
#0
PSU
IEO1B
I/O base unit
CA16
Group
#1
PSU
IEO1B
I/O base unit
CA16
Group
#2
PSU
IEO1B
I/O base unit
CA16
Group
#3
PSU
IEO1B
469
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Slots numer
BU10A
10
BU08A
BU06A
BU04A
NOTE
When using the interface module IF04C, one more slot is
necessary for the IF04C, so I must be subtracted from the
slots number of the I/O base unit mounted with IFG04Cs in
the above table.
470
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Table H.2.1 Power supply capacity of the I/O unit calculation list
Power supply
Mod le name
Module
Voltage A Voltage B Voltage C
DI
DO
IF01A
1.8
IF01B
1.6
IF01C
1.6
Output module
OD64A
2.1
64
Output module
OD32A
1.2
32
Output module
OD64B
2.1
64
Output module
OD32B
1.2
32
Output module
OD16B
0.8
16
Output module
OD08B
0.5
Output module
OD16C
0.8
16
Output module
OD08C
0.5
Output module
OD16D
0.6
16
Output module
OD08D
0.4
Output module
OD16E
0.6
16
Output module
OD08E
0.4
Input module
ID64A/B
0.6
0.7
64
Input module
ID32A/B
0.4
0.35
32
Input module
ID16A/B
0.5
0.2
16
Input module
ID08A/B
0.4
0.15
Input module
ID64C/D
0.6
64
Input module
ID32C/D
0.4
32
Input module
ID16C/D
0.5
16
Input module
ID08C/D
0.4
Input module
IA16E
0.5
16
Output module
IA08E
0.4
AD04A
0.7
AD03A
0.5
0.35
1.1
48
AD02A
0.4
0.25
0.8
32
12
(15)*
Limit value
0.6
64
752
496
NOTE
The limit of voltage A is normally 12, but when not using the input modules ID64A/B, 32A/B,
16A/B, 08A/B the limit will become 15. (In this case the +24E output from the I/O base unit
cannot be used.)
471
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
These two
terminals
cannot be used.
Do not connect
anything to these
two terminals.
M4 tap
F35
+24V(2A)
ALC
ALD
+24E
GND
T1
F31 F31
(5A) (5A)
COP4
CP31
CA16
POW
Power supply
module
I/O interface
module
(IF01A/01B)
F34 F33
2A 0.5A
CA15
M3
screw
Note 1
10
Slot
number
NOTE
When using a noninsular type input module, use these terminal to supply power to the external
contacts. Be careful not to connect short with the +24E of other base units.
472
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
F35
+24V(2A)
ALC
ALD
+24E
GND
BU08A
BU06A
BU04A
(8 modules)
(6 modules)
(4 modules)
COP4
CP31
F31 F32
(5A) (5A)
Slot
number
M4 tap
Note 1
T1
CA16
POWER
Power supply
module
I/O interface
module
(IF01A/01B)
F33
0.5A
F34
2A
CA15
M3
screw
NOTE
When using a noninsular type input module, use these terminal to supply power to the external
contacts. Be careful not to connect short with the +24E of other base units.
473
H.2.2
Types of I/O Modules
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The I/O unit offers abundant I/O modules so that optional systems can be
constructed according to the machine tool specifications.
Points (bytes)
External
connection
terminal
LED input
inp t
display
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
32(4)
One connector
None
64(8)
Two connectors
None
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
ID32B
32(4)
One connector
None
ID64B
64(8)
Two connectors
None
ID08C
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
32(4)
One connector
None
64(8)
Two connectors
None
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
ID32D
32(4)
One connector
None
ID64D
64(8)
Two connectors
None
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
Module name
Rated
voltage
Rated
current
Response
time
ID08A
ID16A
20mS
ID32A
Noninsulated
DC input
ID64A
24VDC
7 5mA
7.5mA
ID08B
ID16B
2mS
ID16C
20mS
ID32C
Insulated DC
input
ID64C
24VDC
9mA
ID08D
ID16D
2mS
IA08E
AC in
input
ut
IE16E
100V to
120VAC
9mA
50mS
474
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Non
insulated
DC input
Mod le
Module
name
OD32A
OD64A
Rated
voltage
Rated
current
Response
time
24V to
48VDC
0 125A
0.125A
0 2mS
0.2mS
OD08B
Points
(bytes)
External
connection
terminal
inp t
LED input
display
Fuse
32(4)
One connector
None
None
64(8)
Two connectors
None
None
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
32(4)
One connector
None
None
64(8)
Two connectors
None
None
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
8(1)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
16(2)
Terminal board
Provided
Provided
0 5A
0.5A
OD16B
0 3mS
0.3mS
Polarity
noncontact
DC output
OD32B
OD64B
24V to
48VDC
0 25A
0.25A
OD08C
2A
0.4mS
0 4mS
OD16C
OA08D
OA16D
100V to
120VAC
1 6A
1.6A
200V to
240VAC
1 6A
1.6A
1/2
cycles
AC output
out ut
OA08E
OA16E
1/2
cycles
D Analog input/output
module
Specification
Type
Module
Mod
le
name
Analog input
module
AD04A
Analog signal
range
Resolution
General
accuracy
10 to +10VDC
20 to +20mADC
12 bit
0.5%
DA02A
Analog
g output
module
10 to +10VDC
0 to +20mADC
12 bit
Analog input/
inp t/
output points
Occupying
input/output
inp
t/o tp t
points
(bytes)
External
connection
terminal
4 inputs
64 input
points
(8 bytes)
Terminal
board
2 outputs
32 input
points
(4 bytes)
Terminal
board
3 inputs
48 input
points
(6 bytes)
Terminal
board
0 5%
0.5%
DA03A
475
H.2.3
Module Addresses
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Group number
D Base number
The maximum 4 I/O base units are in one group. The I/O unit mounted
with I/O interface module IF01A is base number 0, and the other units are
numbered base #1, base #2, base #3 as it goes away from base #0.
D Slot number
D Module name
476
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
ADDRESS
X1100
X1101
X1102
X1103
X1104
X1105
X1106
X1107
X1108
X1109
The character and the mount position of each module is now decided with
the group number, base number, slot number, and module name, so the
address of each module can now be decided, corresponding these data and
the input/output addresses. After display the I/O unit address screen as
shown below on the PMCM programmers CRT, set necessary data on
the screen. the module address is now decided. The occupying DI/DO
points (bytes) of each module are stored in the PMCI programmer, so
just decide the address of the head byte of each module, and the addresses
of the other bytes in the module are automatically decided by the
programmer.
GROUP
BASE
SLOT
NAME
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
ID32C
ID32C
ID32C
ID32C
0
0
0
0
Automatically set
477
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
ADDRESS
X1100
X1101
X1102
X1103
X1104
X1105
X1106
X1107
X1108
X1109
GROUP
BASE
SLOT
NAME
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
1
1
ID16A
ID16A
ID08A
IA08E
IA08E
IA08E
IA16E
IA16E
ID16A
ID16A
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
D The head bytes of the analog input module (AD04A) and analog
output module (DA02A, 03A) must be assigned to even number
addresses of input address (X jjj), and output address (Y jjj)
each.When reading the A/Dconverted digital value from the input
address (X jjj), or wen writing the D/Aconverting value to the
output address (Y jjj), readout and writein must always be done
in word (16 bits) units.
478
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.2.4
Digital Input Module
(1) Specifications
Digital input module specifications are shown at Table H.2.4 (a) (c).
Table H.2.4 (a) DC input specifications (noninsulation type)
Module
Item
Points/module
ID08A/B
ID16A/B
ID32A/B
ID64A/B
16
32
64
24VDC
30VDC
ON
18V or more
OFF
6V or less
ON
6mA or more
OFF
1.5mA or less
O
eration voltage (Note 1)
Operation
Operation
O
eration current (Note 1)
Input current
Approx.7.5mA
Input impedance
Approx. 3.3kW
OFFON
ONOFF
Res
onse time (Note 2)
Response
Operation display
None
Connector
Dielectric strength
NOTE
1 When voltage between input terminal and common terminal is 18V or more, or when current
flowing into input terminal is 6 mA or more, the input signal (contact point) is regarded as ON.
When input terminal voltage is 6V or less, or when input current is 1.5 mA or less, input signal
(contact point) is regarded as OFF.
When using proximity switches or photo electric switches, be careful of current leakage when
contact point is off. In case current leakage is 1.5 mA or more, it will not be regarded as OFF.
2 Response times shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different in each system configuration.
3 The commons are not connected in the module.
4 This module is a noninsular type, so the 24 VDC applied to the external contact point is
provided from the I/O unit. However, as only 1.2 A or less can be externally supplied, maximum
contact points per one I/O unit which can be set ON, is limited to 140 points (when calculated
with the worst value of contact point current).
479
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
ID08C/D
ID16C/D
ID32C/D
ID64C/D
16
32
64
24VDC
30VDC
ON
15V or more
OFF
8V or less
ON
4.5mA or more
OFF
Operation
O
eration voltage (Note 1)
Response
Res
onse time (Note 2)
Input current
9mA or less
Input impedance
Approx. 2.2kW
OFFON
ONOFF
Response
Res
onse time (Note 2)
Operation display
None
Connector
Dielectric strength
NOTE
1 When voltage between input terminal and common terminal is 15V or more, or when current
flowing into input terminal is 4.5 mA or more, the input signal (contact point) is regarded as ON.
When input terminal voltage is 8V or less, or when input current is 2 mA or less, input signal
(contact point) is regarded as OFF.
When using proximity switches or photoelectric switches, be careful of current leakage when
contact point is off. In case current leakage is 2 mA or more, it will not be regarded as OFF.
2 Response time shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different in each system configuration.
3 The commons are not connected to each other in the module.
480
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
IA08E
IA16E
16
100120VAC, 50/60Hz
140VAC
ON
70V or more
OFF
20V or less
ON
5mA or more
OFF
2mA or less
Operation
O
eration voltage (Note 1)
Operation
O
eration current (Note 1)
Input current
Input impedance
Approx. 12.5kW
OFFON
50mS max
ONOFF
50mS max
Response
Res
onse time (Note2)
Operation display
Dielectric strength
NOTE
1 When voltage between input terminal and common terminal is 70V or more, or when current
flowing into input terminal is 5 mA or more, the input signal (contact point) is regarded as ON.
When input terminal voltage is 20V or less, or when input current is 2 mA or less, input signal
(contact point) is regarded as OFF.
When using proximity switches or photo electric switches, be careful of current leakage when
contact point is off. In case current leakage is 2 mA or more, it will not be regarded as OFF.
2 Response times shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different in each system configuration.
3 Commons are not connected in the module.
481
APPENDIX
C20B
(for DI)
250mm
C20A
(for DI)
162mm
(i)
B61393E/06
C20A
(for DI)
35mm
Connector:
MR50LFH
MR50RMA
(HONDA TSUSIN KOGYO)
C20B
MR50RMA
(HONDA TSUSIN KOGYO)
C20A
to load
to load
Cable:
With unified shield
Input module
The connection cables to the connector and load used in the above type
(ii) and (iii) are described in details in the above figure. When working
with the shield wire, fasten the shield casing to the ground plate with metal
fitting.
The terminal board in the above figure (i), can freely be mounted/
dismounted , so it is not necessary to remove the wiring when exchanging
the module.
482
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(2) Correspondence of the input signals and the addresses in the module
The following figure shows the correspondence of the input signals of
the digital input module and the addresses in the module and the bits.
The address in module are relative address taken in each module, and
the head address of the module is 0. The actual address in the
sequence program is decided as in the section H.2.3 (Module address)
by setting the correspondence of the module and the input/output
address. The input signal to PCI is 1 when the contact connected
to the digital input module is ON, and 0 when OFF. In the
noninsulated type DC input module (IDxxA, IDxxB), it is 1 when
ON and 0 when off, without relations to the polarity of the common.
BIT
Address in
module
0
7
IS07
6
IS06
5
IS05
4
IS04
3
IS03
2
IS02
1
IS01
0
IS00
IS17
IS16
IS15
IS14
IS13
IS12
IS11
IS10
IS27
IS26
IS25
IS24
IS23
IS22
IS21
IS20
IS37
IS36
IS35
IS34
IS33
IS32
IS31
IS30
IS47
IS46
IS45
IS44
IS43
IS42
IS41
IS40
IS57
IS56
IS55
IS54
IS53
IS52
IS51
IS50
IS67
IS66
IS65
IS64
IS63
IS62
IS61
IS60
IS77
IS76
IS75
IS74
IS73
IS72
IS71
IS70
8 points
module
16 points
module
32 points
module
483
64 points
module
IS00
IS01
IS02
IS03
ICM0
IS04
IS05
IS06
IS07
ICM1
IS10
IS11
IS12
IS13
ICM2
IS14
IS15
IS16
IS17
ICM3
APPENDIX
Terminal number
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
24V common
connection
+24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board (T1)
GND
484
B61393E/06
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C20A
IS00
IS01
IS02
IS03
IS04
IS05
IS06
IS07
ICM0
IS10
IS11
IS12
IS13
IS14
IS15
IS16
IS17
ICM1
24V common
connection
GND common
connection
(16)
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(39)
(46)
(49, 50)
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29, 45)
+24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board(T1)
GND
Fig. H.2.4 (b) Input module ID64A, ID32A, ID64B, ID32B (1)
485
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
APPENDIX
C20A
IS20
IS21
IS22
IS23
IS24
IS25
IS26
IS27
ICM2
IS30
IS31
IS32
IS33
IS34
IS35
IS36
IS37
ICM3
24V common
connection
GND common
connection
(7)
(24)
(39)
(6)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40, 41)
(3)
(20)
(35)
(2)
(19)
(34)
(1)
(33)
(21, 36)
+24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board(T1)
GND
486
B61393E/06
Address in
module
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C20B
IS40
IS41
IS42
IS43
IS44
IS45
IS46
IS47
ICM4
IS50
IS51
IS52
IS53
IS54
IS55
IS56
IS57
ICM5
24V common
connection
GND common
connection
(16)
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49, 50)
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29, 45)
+24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board (T1)
GND
487
Address in
module
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
APPENDIX
C20B
IS60
IS61
IS62
IS63
IS64
IS65
IS66
IS67
ICM6
IS70
IS71
IS72
IS73
IS74
IS75
IS76
IS77
ICM7
24V common
connection
GND common
connection
(7)
(24)
(39)
(6)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40, 41)
(3)
(20)
(35)
(2)
(19)
(34)
(1)
(33)
(21, 36)
+24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board(T1)
GND
488
B61393E/06
Address in
module
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
IS00
IS01
IS02
IS03
DC24V
ICM0
IS04
IS05
IS06
DC24V
IS07
ICM1
IS10
IS11
IS12
IS13
DC24V
ICM2
IS14
IS15
IS16
DC24V
IS17
ICM3
Terminal number
(1)
Address in
module
0.0
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
489
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C20A
IS00
IS01
IS02
IS03
IS04
IS05
IS06
DC24V
IS07
ICM0
IS10
IS11
IS12
IS13
IS14
IS15
IS16
DC24V
IS17
ICM1
(16)
Address in
module
0.0
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49, 50)
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29, 45)
490
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C20A
IS20
IS21
IS22
IS23
IS24
IS25
IS26
DC24V
IS27
ICM2
IS30
IS31
IS32
IS33
IS34
IS35
IS36
DC24V
IS37
ICM3
(07)
Address in
module
2.0
(24)
(39)
(06)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40, 41)
(03)
(20)
(35)
(02)
(19)
(34)
(01)
(33)
(21, 36)
491
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C20B
IS40
IS41
IS42
IS43
IS44
IS45
IS46
DC24V
IS47
ICM4
IS50
IS51
IS52
IS53
IS54
IS55
IS56
DC24V
IS57
ICM5
(16)
Address in
module
4.0
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49, 50)
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29, 45)
492
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C20B
IS60
IS61
IS62
IS63
IS64
IS65
IS66
DC24V
IS67
ICM6
IS70
IS71
IS72
IS73
IS74
IS75
IS76
DC24V
IS77
ICM7
(07)
Address in
module
6.0
(24)
(39)
(06)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40, 41)
(03)
(20)
(35)
(02)
(19)
(34)
(01)
(33)
(21, 36)
493
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
IS00
IS01
IS02
AC100
120V
IS03
ICM0
IS04
IS05
IS06
AC100
120V
IS07
ICM1
IS10
IS11
IS12
AC100
120V
IS13
ICM2
IS14
IS15
AC100
120V
IS16
IS17
ICM3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Terminal number
(1)
Address in
module
0.0
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
494
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.2.5
Digital Output Module
D Specification
Digital input module specifications are shown at Table H.2.5 (a) (e).
OD32A
OD64A
32
64
Points/module
Rated output voltage
24 48 VDC
Per point
0.125A
Per common
0.5A
Total
4A
8A
Surgeon current
0.75V max
0.1mA max
OFFON
ONOFF
Res
onse time (Note 2)
Response
Operation display
None
Connectors
Common points
Fuse
None
Polarity
None
Dielectric strength
CAUTION
In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
to both sides of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in parallel between the
output terminals to decrease current flow to within the standard.
NOTE
1 There is no lower limit in output voltage for the output operation.
2 Respoinse time shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different to each system configuration.
3 The output voltage drop at power ON depends on a load current. It is represented by following
equation.
Vsat = 6 IL
(Vsat : Output voltage drop
IL : Load current)
495
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
OD08B
OD16B
OD32B
OD64B
16
32
64
24 48 VDC
Per point
0.5A
0.25A
Per common
2A
1A
Total
4A
8A
8A
Surgeon current
16A
1V max
0.5V max
0.1mA max
OFFON
ONOFF
Response
Res
onse time (Note 2)
Operation display
None
Connectors
Common points
Fuse (Note 3)
3.2A/common
None
Polarity
Dielectric strength
CAUTION
1 The commons are mutually connected in the modules of types OD08B and OD16B, but load
current cannot be sent in the internal pattern. The common must always be connected to the
minus side (0V) of the load current.
2 In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
to both sides of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in parallel between the
output terminals to decrease current flow to within the standard.
NOTE
1 There is no lower limit in output voltage for the output operation, but the operation display LED
of the modules with operation display will become dark if the output voltage is 24 VDC or less.
2 Response time shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different to each system configuration.
3 Fuse are inserted to each common. The red LED at the bottom of the module front will light
if any of the fuse breaks.
496
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
OD08C
OD16C
16
Points/module
Rated output voltage
2448 VDC
Per point
2A
Per common
4A (Note 4)
Total
8A
16A
Surgeon current
1.0V max
0.5mA max
OFFON
ONOFF
Response
Res
onse time (Note 2)
Operated display
Common points
Fuse (Note 3)
None
Polarity
Dielectric strength
CAUTION
1 The commons are mutually connected in the modules, but load current cannot be sent in the
internal pattern. The common must always be connected to the minus side (0V) of the load
current.
2 In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
to both sides of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in parallel between the
output terminals to decrease current flow to within the standard.
NOTE
1 There is no lower limit in output voltage for the output operation, but the operation display LED
will become dark if the output voltage is 24 VDC or less.
2 Response time shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different to each system configuration.
3 A fuse is inserted between the following two points of outputs.
(00, 01) (02, 03) (04, 05) (06, 07)
(10, 11)
(12, 13) (14, 15) (16, 17)
4 The output current is limited to 2A per above fuse (group of two points).
5 The output voltage drop at power ON depends on a load current. It is represented by following
equation.
Vsat = 2 IL
(Vsat : Output voltage drom
IL : Load current)
497
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
OD08D
OD16D
8 outputs
16 outputs
100-120VAC, 50/60Hz
85-132VAC
Per point
1.6A
Per common
3.2A (Note 3)
Total
6.4A
12.8A
Surgeon current
10A (1 cycle)
1.5V max
1.5mA max
Response
Res
onse time (Note 1)
OFFON
0.2mS max
ONOFF
Operation display
1 common/4 outputs
Fuse (Note 2)
6.3A/common
Polarity
None
Dielectric strength
1500VAC, 1min
CAUTION
1 The common lines are interconnected inside the module. However, no load current is applicable to
internal patterns. Connect each common to one end of the load power supply without fail.
2 In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
to both side of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in parallel between the
output teminal to decrease current flow to within the standard.
3 It shows maximum of surgeon current which can be sent to one fuse. When plural loads are
turned to ON at the same time, total surgeon current which sends to one fuse should be under
the above value.
NOTE
1 The response time shows a delay time from an input to an output of the module. Actual
response time is obtained by adding the scan time determined by the system configuration to
the value shown in the above table.
2 A fuse is inserted every common line. If one of these fuses is blown out, the red LED lights at the
bottom part of the front panel of the module.
3 In addition to the above limitation, the output current is limited to 1.6A every 2output group
shown below.
(00, 01)
(02, 03)
(04, 05)
(06, 07)
(10, 11)
(12, 13)
(14, 15)
(16, 17)
Example, during the load current is sent to output [00], the load current cannot be sent to output
[01].
498
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
OA08E
OA16E
8 outputs
16 outputs
160 - 264VAC
Per point
1.6A
Per common
3.2A (Note 3)
Total
6.4A
12.8A
Surgeon current
10A (1 cycle)
1.5V max.
3 mA max.
Response
Res
onse time (Note 1)
OFFON
0.2mS max.
ONOFF
Operation display
1 common/4 outputs
Fuse (Note 2)
3.2A 2 pcs/common
Polarity
None
Dielectric strength
CAUTION
1 The common lines are interconnected inside the module. However, no load current is applicable to
internal patterns. Connect each common to one end of the load power supply without fail.
2 In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
to both side of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in paralle between the
output terminals to decrease current flow to within the standard.
3 It shows maximum of surgeon current which can be sent to one fuse. When plural loads are
turned to ON at the same time, total surgeon current which sends to one fuse should be under
the above value.
NOTE
1 The response time shows a delay time from an input to an output of the module. Actual
response time is obtained by adding the scan time determined by the system configuration to
the value shown in the above table.
2 Two fuses are inserted every common line. One red LED is mounted every two fuses, and a
corresponding LED lights, if a fuse is blown out.
3 In addition to the above limitation, the output current is limited to 1.6A every 2output group
shown below.
(00, 01)
(02, 03)
(04, 05)
(06, 07)
(10, 11)
(12, 13)
(14, 15)
(16, 17)
Example, during the load current 2A is sent to output [00], the load current cannot be sent to
output [01].
499
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21B
250mm
C21A
C21A
162mm
(i)
35mm
Terminal board
OD08B/C, OD16B/C
OA08D/E, OA16D/E
Connector:
MR50LFH
MR50RMA
(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO)
MR50RMA
(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO)
Input module
C21B
to load
C21A
Cable:
With unified shield
The connection cables to the connector and load used in the above type
(ii) and (iii) are described in details in the above figure. See section
3.7.5 for details on shield treatment. The terminal board in the above
figure (i), can freely be mounted/dismounted, so it is not necessary to
remove the wiring when exchanging the module.
(2) Correspondence of the output signals and the addresses in the module
The following figure shows the correspondence of the output signals
of the digital output module and the addresses in the module and the
bits.
The inmodule address is an address assigned within a module or an
address defined in relation to the first address 0 of the module.
The actual address in the sequence program is decided as in section
H.2.3 (Module address) by setting the correspondence of the module
and the input/output address. When the output signal from the
PMC0M is 1 , the output contact of the digital output module is
ON, and OFF when 0.
500
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
BIT
Address in
module
0
7
OS07
6
OS06
5
OS05
4
OS04
3
OS03
2
OS02
1
OS01
0
OS00
OS17
OS16
OS15
OS14
OS13
OS12
OS11
OS10
OS27
OS26
OS25
OS24
OS23
OS22
OS21
OS20
OS37
OS36
OS35
OS34
OS33
OS32
OS31
OS30
OS47
OS46
OS45
OS44
OS43
OS42
OS41
OS40
OS57
OS56
OS55
OS54
OS53
OS52
OS51
OS50
OS67
OS66
OS65
OS64
OS63
OS62
OS61
OS60
OS77
OS76
OS75
OS74
OS73
OS72
OS71
OS70
8 points
module
16 points
module
32 points
module
64 points
module
501
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21A
(16)
Isolator
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49)
(50)
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29)
(45)
OS00
LOAD
OS01
OS02
OS03
OS04
OS05
OS06
(Note)
OS07
OCM0
LOAD
()
OCM0
OS10
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
(Note)
LOAD
OS11
OS12
OS13
OS14
OS15
OS16
OS17
OCM1
(Note)
LOAD
()
OCM1
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
(Note)
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite. In this case, the direction of the surge
proof diode must also be set opposite.
502
Address in
module
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21A
(07)
Isolator
(24)
(39)
(06)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40)
(41)
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
(03)
(20)
(35)
(02)
(19)
(34)
(01)
(33)
(21)
(36)
OS20
LOAD
OS21
OS22
OS23
OS24
OS25
OS26
(Note)
OS27
OCM2
LOAD
()
OCM2
OS30
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
(Note)
LOAD
OS31
OS32
OS33
OS34
OS35
OS36
OS37
OCM3
(Note)
LOAD
()
OCM3
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
(Note)
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite. In this case, the direction of the surge
proof diode must also be set opposite.
503
Address in
module
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21B
(16)
Isolator
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49)
(50)
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29)
(45)
OS40
LOAD
OS41
OS42
OS43
OS44
OS45
OS46
OS47
OCM4
OCM4
OS50
OS51
(Note)
LOAD
()
DC24V
to
DC48V
(Note)
LOAD
OS52
OS53
OS54
OS55
OS56
OS57
OCM5
OCM5
(Note)
LOAD
()
DC24V
to
DC48V
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite.
In this case, the direction of the surge proof diode must also be set opposite.
504
(+)
(+)
(Note)
Address in
module
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21B
(07)
Isolator
(24)
(39)
(06)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40)
(41)
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
(03)
(20)
(35)
(02)
(19)
(34)
(01)
(33)
(21)
(36)
OS60
LOAD
OS61
OS62
OS63
OS64
OS65
OS66
(Note)
OS67
OCM6
LOAD
()
OCM6
OS70
DC24V
to
DC48V
(Note)
LOAD
OS71
OS72
OS73
OS74
OS75
OS76
OS77
OCM7
(Note)
LOAD
()
OCM7
DC24V
to
DC48V
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite.
In this case, the direction of the surge proof diode must also be set opposite.
505
(+)
(+)
(Note)
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
21
1
0.5
0.6
0.7
2 OS01
3 OS02
4 OS03
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
7 OS5
8 OS6
9 OS7
1.5
1.6
1.7
10 OCM2
11 OS10
12 OS11
13 OS12
14 OS13
3.2A
1.4
5 OCM1
6 OS4
3.2A
15 OCM3
16 OS14
17 OS15
18 OS16
19 OS17
3.2A
Fuse brown
detective
circuit
20 OCM4
()
M3 screw
terminals
506
LOAD
Isolator
3.2A
0.4
POW
OS00
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21A
(16)
Isolator
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49)
(50)
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29)
(45)
OS00
LOAD
OS01
OS02
OS03
OS04
OS05
OS06
OS07
OCM0
LOAD
()
OCM0
OS10
(+)
LOAD
OS11
OS12
OS13
OS14
OS15
OS16
OS17
OCM1
LOAD
()
OCM1
507
DC24V
to
DC48V
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
Address in
module
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21A
(07)
Isolator
(24)
(39)
(06)
(23)
(38)
(22)
(37)
(40)
(41)
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
(03)
(20)
(35)
(02)
(19)
(34)
(01)
(33)
(21)
(36)
OS00
LOAD
OS01
OS02
OS03
OS04
OS05
OS06
OS07
OCM2
LOAD
()
OCM0
OS10
(+)
LOAD
OS11
OS12
OS13
OS14
OS15
OS16
OS17
OCM1
LOAD
()
OCM1
508
DC24V
to
DC48V
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
Address in
module
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21A
(16)
Isolator
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49)
(50)
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29)
(45)
OS40
LOAD
OS41
OS42
OS43
OS44
OS45
OS46
OS47
OCM4
OCM4
OS50
OS51
LOAD
()
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
LOAD
OS52
OS53
OS54
OS55
OS56
OS57
OCM5
OCM5
509
LOAD
()
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
Address in
module
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
C21A
(16)
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
LOAD
Isolator
(32)
(48)
(15)
(31)
(47)
(30)
(46)
(49)
(50)
7.0
OS60
(12)
(28)
(44)
(11)
(27)
(43)
(10)
(42)
(29)
(45)
OS61
OS62
OS63
OS64
OS65
OS66
OS67
OCM6
OCM6
OS70
OS71
LOAD
()
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
LOAD
OS72
OS73
OS74
OS75
OS76
OS77
OCM7
OCM7
510
LOAD
()
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
21
1
0.3
2 OS01
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.1
1.2
1.3
7 OS5
3.2A
1.5
1.7
10 OCM2
11 OS10
12 OS11
3.2A
13 OS12
14 OS13
15 OCM3
16 OS14
17 OS15
3.2A
1.6
8 OS6
9 OS7
3.2A
1.4
5 OCM1
6 OS4
3.2A
1.0
3 OS02
4 OS03
3.2A
18 OS16
19 OS17
3.2A
20 OCM4
Fuse brown
detective
circuit
511
LOAD
Isolator
3.2A
0.2
POW
OS00
()
M3 screw
terminal
DC24V
to
DC48V
(+)
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
6.3A
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
6.3A
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
6.3A
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
6.3A
Fuse brown
detective
circuit
21
1
POW
OS00
2 OS01
3 OS02
4 OS03
5 OCM1
6 OS4
7 OS5
8 OS6
9 OS7
10 OCM2
11 OS10
12 OS11
13 OS12
14 OS13
15 OCM3
16 OS14
17 OS15
18 OS16
19 OS17
20 OCM4
M3 screw
terminal
512
LOAD
Address in
module
0.0
0.1
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
3.2A
0.2
0.3
3.2A
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
3.2A
3.2A
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
3.2A
3.2A
1.4
1.5
3.2A
1.6
1.7
3.2A
Fuse brown
detective
circuit
21
1
POW
OS00
2 OS01
3 OS02
4 OS03
5 OCM1
6 OS4
7 OS5
8 OS6
9 OS7
10 OCM2
11 OS10
12 OS11
13 OS12
14 OS13
15 OCM3
16 OS14
17 OS15
18 OS16
19 OS17
20 OCM4
513
LOAD
M3 screw
terminal
H.2.6
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(1) Specification
Module
AD04A
Item
Input points
4 points/module
Analog inpout
Digital output
I/O correspondence
Analog input
Digital output
+10V
+2000
+5V or +20mA
+1000
0V or 0mA
5V or 20mA
1000
10V
2000
Resolution
5mV, 20mA
Accuracy
0.5% or less
1mS or less
15%, 40 mA
Insulated
Noninsulated
64 points (8 byte)
NOTE
Response time shown here is the delay time of module only.
The actual response time is the above value plus the
scanning time which is different in each system
configuration.
514
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
input module
250mm
162mm
35mm
Address in
module
3
IA110
2
IA100
1
IA090
0
IA080
IA070
IA060
IA050
IA040
IA030
IA020
IA010
IA000
IA111
IA101
IA091
IA081
IA071
IA061
IA051
IA041
IA031
IA021
IA011
IA001
IA112
IA102
IA092
IA082
IA072
IA062
IA052
IA042
IA032
IA022
IA012
IA002
IA113
IA103
IA093
IA083
IA073
IA063
IA053
IA043
IA033
IA023
IA013
IA003
515
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
516
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Voltage input
0
10V
Note 1
VP1
IP1
COM1
FG1
VP2
IP2
COM2
FG2
Current input
0
10V
Note 1.
VPn and IPn must
always be connected
shorter for current input
1MW
1MW
250W
Channel #1
1MW
1MW
250W
Multiplexer
VP3
IP3
10
COM3
11
FG3
12
VP4
13
IP4
14
COM4
15
FG4
16
PG1
21
AMP
Channel #2
1MW
1MW
250W
Channel #3
1MW
1MW
250W
NOTE
Shielded twist pair cables (2 cores) are required as connecting cables.
517
A/D
Converter
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.2.7
Analog Output Module
D Specifications
Module
DA02A
DA03A
Item
Input points
2 points/module
Analog input
10 to + 10V DC
(External load resistance more than 10 kMW)
0 to +20mA DC
(External load resistance 0 to 500 W)
Selectively employable
Digital output
I/O correspondence
3 points/module
Digital input
Analog input
+2000
+10V
+1000
+5V or +20mA
0V or 0mA
1000
5V or 20mA
2000
10V
Resolution
5mV, 20mA
Accuracy
Less than
"0.5%
Noninsulated
48 points (6 byte)
NOTE
The response time shows the delay time of the module only.
Actual response time is obtained by adding the scan time
determined by the system configuration to the above value.
518
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
output module
250mm
162mm
35mm
(2) Correspondence of the output signals and the analog address in the
module
In the analog output unit DA02A and DA03A by writing a 12bit
digital value in the following address, the desired voltage or current
is output to the corresponding analog output. The assignment of the
digital output signal and its address is as follows:
Address in
module
1
0
3
2
5
4
3
2
1
0
OA110 OA100 OA090 OA080
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
NOTE
1 When setting address of the I/O module, the head address
of this module must be assigned and even number address.
When writing the D/Aconverting value from the user
program, writing must always be done in word (16 bits) unit.
2 In analog output module DA02A, the channel #2 cannot be
used.
520
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
DA02A/DA03A
Voltage
AMP
Channel
#0
D/A
converter
1
2
Current
AMP
3
4
5
Voltage
AMP
Channel
#1
6
7
D/A
converter
Current
AMP
8
9
10
Voltage
AMP
Channel
#2
11
12
D/A
Converter
Current
AMP
13
14
15
VP1
Voltage output
Note 1.
VN1
Note 1.
More
than
10KW
IP1
IN1
Load impedance
10KW
VP2
VN2
IP2
IN2
VP3
Voltage output
Less
than
500W
FG
Load impedance
500W
VN3
IP3
IN3
NOTE
1 A 2 pair shielded cable must be used as connection cable. The shield must be connected to
the ground at the load side.
2 Channel #2 cannot be used in DA02A.
521
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.3
NC AND I/O UNIT
CONNECTION
H.3.1
I/O Unit Signal
Connection Diagram
H.3.2
I/O Unit Power
Connection Diagram
Fig. H.3.1 (a) shows connection when only one group of I/O unit is used
and Fig. H.3.1 (b) shows connection when two or more groups of I/O units
are used. It is necessary to set the group number of interface module
IF01A according to the H.3.3.
Fig. H.3.2 (a) shows power connection when one I/O unit is used and
Fig. H.3.2 (b) shows power connection when two or more units are used.
When two or more I/O units are used, one power input unit may not have
capacity enough to supply power to all I/O units. In such case it is required
to use an additional power input unit and additional number of power
connectors as shown in Fig. H.3.2 (b). The additional power input unit
should be mounted to the magnetic cabinet power on the machine side.
Fig. H.3.2 (c) shows signal cable connection between I/O unit.
NOTE
1 Use optical cables listed below.
Name
Specification
Length
A02B0072K801
5m
A02B0072K802
10m
A02B0072K803
15m
522
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
10
CA15
IF01B
I/O module
CA16
MR50F
Power
Module
J81
10
I/O module
MR50M
CA15
IF01B
CA16
I/O unit
Group #0
Power
Module
J81
10
CA15
IF01B
I/O module
CA16
Power
Module
J81
10
CA15
IF01A
I/O module
CA16
Power
Module
COP4
Optical fiber
cable
M25
Fig. H.3.1 (a) I/O unit signal connection diagram (1) (In case of one group)
NOTE
Cable J81 must be 1.5 m or shorter.
Run wiring separately from the power supply and I/O module input signals.
523
524
MR50F
CA15
Power
IF01B
Power
IF01B
CA16
CA15
CA16
MR50M
J81
10
Power
IF01B
Power
IF01B
CA16
CA15
CA16
J81
10
IF04C
COP2D
COP2C
COP2B
COP2A
COP4
COP2C
COP2B
M25
CA16
COP4
COP4
Power
CA15
CA16
CA15
J81
10
10
COP4
CA16
CA15
CA16
CA15
COP4
Power
IF01A
Power
IF01B
J81
J81
10
10
COP2D
IF01A
Power
IF01B
J81
CA15
COP4
CA15
CA16
CA15
CA16
CA15
CA16
COP4
Power
IF01A
Power
IF01B
Power
IF01B
CA16
J81
J81
J81
10
10
10
COP4
C
OP4
CA15
CA16
CA15
CA16
CA15
CA16
CA15
CA16
COP4
Power
IF01A
Power
IF01B
Power
IF01B
Power
IF01B
Power
IF01B
J81
J81
J81
Optic
fiber
cable
COP2A
CA15
10
10
10
Fig. H.3.1 (b) I/O unit signal connection diagram (2) (When several groups are employed)
NOTE
1 Interface module (IF04C) for optical interface expansion is mounted on base unit #0 in group 0
as example. Actually it can be mounted on any type of base unit and on arbitrary slot NO other
than No. 0.
2 Cable J81 should be shorter than 1.5 m. It should be separated from I/O signal of power I/O
module in wiring.
APPENDIX
M3
SMS3PWS5
ALD
ALC
Japan FCI
2
1
CP6
SMS3RK4TK2
Japan FCI
G
S
R
3
2
1
CP5
PB
PA
SMS6RA2TK2
G
6
Japan FCI
S
5
R
4
CP6
CP5
SMS3PK5
J73
J74
CP31
1
2
SMS6P1
M4
Tap
GND
ALD
+24E
I/O module
I/O unit
IF01A
CP31
Power
module
T1
SMS3RWS4D28
Crimpstyle
terminal
M3
ALC
B61393E/06
Fig. H.3.2 (a) I/O unit power connection diagram (In case of one I/O unit)
CAUTION
Use 1.25 mm2 or larger wire to ground for GND terminal of T1.
NOTE
1 PA and PB of CP31 are not used.
2 Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm) or larger wire for J73 and J74.
3 When the power unit containing the input unit is used, connect J73 to CP2, ALD of J74 to AL
of CP3 (SMS6RW4D28), and ALC of J74 to OFF.
525
M4
SMS6P1
CP31
GND
+24E
ALD
M3
T1
ALC
I/O module
I/O module
SMS6P1
CP31
Power
M4
GND
+24E
ALD
M3
T1
ALC
Power
M4
J73
CP92
CP91
SMS3PK5
J82
Japan FCI
SMS3RK4TK2
G
R
CP95
3
1
CP94
CP92 CP96
CP96
J73
J73
CP93
Japan FCI
SMS3RK4TK2
S
R
CP92
3
2
CP91
CP91
1
M4
M4
R
AC
INPUT
SMS3PK5
Additional Power
input unit
Japan FCI
SMS3RWS4D28
CP6
3
2
1
ALC ALD
SMS3RK4TK2
Japan FCI
G
S
R
3
2
1
CP5
SMS3PK5
SMS3PWS5
CP5
SMS3PK5
J82
J73
J74
I/O module
I/O module
SMS6P1
SMS6P1
CP31
GND
+24E
ALD
M3
T1
ALC
Power
M4
GND
+24E
CP31
Power
T1
ALC
ALD
M3
J80
J80
PB
Japan FCI
SMS6RA2TK2
PA
B61393E/06
J80
S
R
3
2
1
APPENDIX
J80
CP91
Fig. H.3.2. (b) I/O unit power connection diagram (When several I/O units are employed)
CAUTION
GND terminal (T1) of I/O unit (max. 4 sets ) in one group is connected by the wire with cross
section more than 1.25 mm2.
NOTE
1 PA and PB in CP31 are not used.
2 Wires more than 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) are used for J73, 74 and 80.
3 One additional power input unit can control I/O unit power input. (Max. 4 sets)
4 Connector contact specification (made in Burndy)
1 Other than CP6 . . RC16MSCT3
2 CP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . RC16M23D28
526
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(1) Connector
CA16
CA15
(2) Connection
CA16
CA15
Pin number
Pin number
49
49
49
50
50
D Use twist pair wires for (1,2) , (3,4), (5,6), (7,8) and (49,50).
(3) Wiring materials
25 pairs
Conductor
Dia. (incl. insulator)
Construction
1.05 mm
7/0.18
527
Finished
O.D.
Electric
characteristics
Conductor
resistance
14 mm
110 W/km
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H.3.3
Interface Module
Setting
D IF01A Setting
Setting plug
Front
view
Setting terminal
Setting
IF01A group
number
SH3
SH2
f
Group 0
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
528
SH1
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D IF04C setting
IF04C has the same type of setting as IF01A should be set as follows
without fail. (Already set as follows at FANUC before shipment.)
Setting plug
Setting terminal
SH1
SH2
SH3
Setting method
Insert SH2 and SH3 to the setting plug. (SH1 is open.)
529
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
I/O UnitMODEL A
530
B61393E/06
I.1
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O
UnitMODEL A
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
I.1.1
Structure of FANUC
I/O UnitMODEL A
10
I.1.2
Outer Dimensions
(80)
142
90
130
20
B
5 (mounting hole)
253
238
430
415
531
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
I.1.3
Mounting and
Dismounting Modules
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Mounting
1 Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper side
of the base unit.
2 Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
3 Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.
Dismounting
1 Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the module.
2 Push the module upwards.
532
B61393E/06
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
I.1.4
Connection Diagram
Series 0
control unit
PMCM
(Correspinded to
I/OLink)
JD1A
Terminator TX
I/O UnitA
AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A
JD3
JD2
JD2
CP32
PC32
24VDC
24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A
AIF01B
JD1B
Max.
16
group
S
S
S
JD1A
JD3
JD2
JD2
CP32
PC32
24VDC
24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A
AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A
JD3
JD2
JD2
CP32
PC32
24VDC
24VDC
K2X
NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
533
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
I.1.5
Connecting Input
Power Source
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
+24V
GND
24VDC
NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.
ON
OFF
t
ON
OFF
534
I.1.6
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Grounding
Base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A)
M4 Screw
terminal
D When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section I.1.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table I.1.6 Required current of each module
Required current (mA) of +24V
Mod le name
Module
A
AIF01A
50
AIF01B
50
AIF32A
20+0.5n
30+7.5n
30+7.5n
AIF32B
20+0.5n
AIF16C
AIF16D
AIF32E
AIF32F
AIA16G
5+1.5n
AOD08C
5+2n
AOD08D
5+2n
AOD16C
5+2n
AOD16D
5+2n
AOD32C
5+0.5n
AOD32D
5+0.5n
AOA05E
5+5.5n
AOA08E
5+5.5n
AOA12F
5+4.5n
AOR08G
10n
AOR16G
10n
AAD04A
130
n : Number of the input and output points (for each module) which turn
ON simultaneously
D The rating (mA) of the module to be used can be obtained by adding
the corresponding values in the A and B columns.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should
not exceed 500 mA.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.
535
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
I.1.7
Connecting Signal
Cables
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
connection diagram are as follows.
Cable K1X
CNC or AIF01A
JD1A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SIN
11
:SIN 12
SOUT 13
:SOUT 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AIF01A
JD1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0V
0V
0V
0V
SIN
11
:SIN 12
SOUT 13
:SOUT 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0V
0V
0V
0V
Cable connection
JD1A
JD1B
SIN (1)
:SIN (2)
SOUT (3:)
SOUT (4)
0V (11)
0V (12)
0V (13)
0V (14)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
SOUT
:SOUT
SIN
:SIN
0V
0V
0V
0V
D Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT and
*SOUT.
D Recommended cable material : A66L00010284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of the
cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
D Maximum cable length: 10 m
D Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
D Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases] :
- When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
- When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
- When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise.
536
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Cable K2X
Connector HONDA
TSUSHIN KOGYO CO.,
LTD. PCRE20FS
AIF01A or
AIF01B
JD2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S1
:S1
S2
:S2
S3
:S3
S4
:S4
ID1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AIF01B
JD3
S5
:S5
S6
:S6
0V
0V
ID2
ID3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S1
:S1
S2
:S2
S3
:S3
S4
:S4
ID1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
S5
:S5
S6
:S6
0V
0V
ID2
ID3
Cable connection
JD2
JD3
S1(1)
:S1(2)
S2(3)
:S2(4)
S3(5)
:S3(6)
S4(7)
:S4(8)
S5(11)
:S5(12)
S6(13)
:S6(14)
ID1(9)
ID2(17)
ID3(18)
0V(15)
0V(16)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(9)
(17)
(18)
(15)
(16)
S1
:S1
S2
:S2
S3
:S3
S4
:S4
S5
:S5
S6
:S6
ID1
ID2
ID3
0V
0V
537
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Terminator TX
AIF01B
Connector HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO Co., LTD.
PCRE20FS
JD2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4 TRM1
5
6
7
8
9
10 TRM1
TRM2
TRM3
TRM2
TRM3
Cable connection
JD2
Shortting jumper
TRM1 (4)
TRM1 (10)
Shortting jumper
TRM2 (12)
TRM2 (19)
Shortting jumper
TRM3 (14)
TRM3 (20)
538
B61393E/06
I.1.8
Connecting with I/O
Modules
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
The terminal block is a removable type.
Connector type
Input/Output
display LED
A0 . . .7
B0 . . .7
Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO
CO., LTD.
MR50RMA
Dismounting the
terminal block
1 Open the cover of the terminal block.
2 Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
3 Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.
539
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
1.25S3.5
1.253.5S, etc.
D Mark tube : As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part with
the mark tube.
I.1.9
Digital Input/Output
Module
Digital input modules
Input
type
Noninsulation
DC input
Insulation
ty
e DC
type
input
AC input
Module
name
Rated
voltage
Rated
current
Polarity
Response
time
Points
External
connection
LED
display
AID
32A
24VDC
7.5mA
Both
Maximum
20ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AID
32B
24VDC
7.5mA
Both
Maximum
2ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AID
16C
24VDC
7.5mA
NEG
Maximum
20ms
16
Terminal
block
provided
AID
16D
24VDC
7.5mA
POS
Maximum
20ms
16
Terminal
block
provided
AID
32E
24VDC
7.5mA
Both
Maximum
20ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AID
32F
24VDC
7.5mA
Both
Maximum
2ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AIA
16G
100
120VAC
10.5mA
(120V AC)
16
Terminal
block
provided
ON Max 35ms
OFF Max 45ms
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current source type)
The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive : 24 V common (current sink type)
The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A
ConnectionMaintenance Manual (B61813E).
540
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Insulation
ty
e DC
type
output
Module
name
Rated
voltage
Rated
current
Polarity
Points
AOD
08C
1224VD
C
2A
NEG
AOD
08D
2A
POS
AOD
16C
0.5A
NEG
AOD
16D
0.5A
AOD
32C
AOD
32D
AOD
05E
AC output
AOD
08E
AOD
12F
Relay
output
AOR
08G
AOR
16G
100
240V
AC
100
120V
AC
Maximum
250VAC/
30VDC
Points
External
/common connection
LED
display
Fuse
Terminal
block
provided
provided
Terminal
block
provided
provided
16
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
POS
16
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
0.3A
NEG
32
Connector
not
provided
not
provided
0.3A
POS
32
Connector
not
provided
not
provided
2A
Terminal
block
provided
provided
1A
Terminal
block
provided
provided
0.5A
12
Terminal
block
provided
provided
4A
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
2A
16
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current sink type)
Output is at low level when ON.
Positive : 24 V common (current source type)
Output is at high level when ON.
2. For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A
ConnectionMaintenance Manual (B61813E).
541
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
I.1.10
Correspondence
between I/O Signals
and Addresses in a
Module
Bit
Address in the
module
#7
0
A7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Module of 8
points
Module of 16
points
Module of
32 points
I.1.11
Number of Points for
I/O UnitMODEL A
Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit MODEL A using
the following.
D Output points
Sum of the actual output
points in a group
0 to 32
40 to 64
72 to 128
136 to 256
32 points
64 points
128 points
256 points
NOTE
Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
D Input points
Sum of the actual input
points in a group
0 to 32
40 to 64
72 to 128
136 to 256
32 points
64 points
128 points
256 points
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
I. I/O UnitMODEL A
Example 1:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 0
AOD32C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AOA12F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
AID32A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AIA16G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
[Input points]
325+163 = 208 256 points
[Output points]
323+162 = 128 128 points
Example 2:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 2.
AOD16C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
AOA05F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
AID16A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
AIA16G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
[Input points]
164+163 = 112 128 points
[Output points]
167+89 = 184 256 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumed to be equal to that
of the output points, in other words, 256 points.
543
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
544
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
J.1
INSTALLATION
D Cautions about heating
value
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
The installation conditions and method for the CRT/MDI for the Series
00 are basically the same as in 9 CRT/MDI unis. Therefore, refer to item
3 in the text. Follow this reference material, however, for the following
items.
This units heating value is about 170 W. The pendant, etc. on which to
mount this unit should be designed as follows so that the inside
temperature does not rise more than 15_C above the outside temperature.
(1) Heat absorber
The conventional 14 CRT/MDI unit heat absorber has insufficient
radiation. A special heat absorber is available for this unit. (It is a little
different from the conventional 14 CRT/MDI unit heat absorber in
size.)
(2) Air agitation fan in cabinet
An air agitation fan (1) should be installed at the position shown in the
figure below so that air flows between the printed circuit boards at
0.5m/sec. (A special fan unit is available.)
(1)
C R T
P C B
Rear view
545
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
J.2
CONNECTION
J.2.1
General Connection
Diagram
Manual
pulse
generator
No.1 unit
CA3
H20- F
Manual
pulse
generator
No.2 unit
Manual
pulse
generator
No.3 unit
CD13
14 CRT/ MDI
M4
M4
BK6 F
CA7
Battery
unit
Note
CD13
M : Connector, male
F :
H20- F
Connector, female
CP3
Input unit
TP2
BK3 F
M4
: M4 screw terminal
NOTE
Connection with the battery unit is necessary when using RAM file.
Connection with the battery unit on the CNC side is also possible.
546
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
J.2.2
547
Connector Layout
Drawing
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
J.2.3
Connection of the CNC
and the CRT/MDI
CNC
CRT/ MDI
Signal
CD13
MRE20-RMA
CD13
MRE20-RMA
Input unit
M4 screw terminal
EOF
COM
ON
OFF
COM
Power ON/OFF
ON1
ON2
OFF1
OFF2
ON
COM
COM
OFF
SMS3PK-5
M4 screw terminal
CP3
1
200A
200B
Power supply
200A
200B
200A
200B
CAUTION
A power cable 30/0.18 (0.75mm2) and over in gauge should be used.
NOTE
For the signal cable, see the next page.
548
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
CNC
10
1
2
11
14
15
18
19
10
11
14
15
28
19
NC earth plate
Wiring gauge :
Specification :
549
CRT/ MDI
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
J.2.4
Connection of the
CRT/MDI and Manual
Pulse Generators
CA3
1
2
3
HA1
HB1
10
HA2
0V
15
0V
+5V
+5V
Name of signal
14
0V
MRE20-RMD
17
11
HB2
12
HA3
HB1 to 3
13
HB3
18
19
20
CNC
HA1
HB1
0V
Power supply
for M. P. G
HA1 to 3
16
+5V
Manual Pulse
Generator
Description
CA3 (8)
CA3 (9)
CA3 (1)
CA3 (4)
3 (1st M. P. G)
+5V
HA2
HB2
0V
CA3 (10)
CA3 (11)
CA3 (2)
CA3 (5)
Manual Pulse
Generator
3 (2nd M. P. G)
+5V
CA3 (12)
HA3
CA3 (13)
HB3
CA3 (3)
0V
+5V
Manual Pulse
Generator
CA3 (6)
Manual Pulse
Generator
(3rd M. P. G)
550
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
NOTE
The manual pulse generators current drain is 95mA per unit. The +5V and 0V wire gauges
should be decided on so that the twoway voltage drop between the CRT/MDI and the manual
pulse generator is not over 0.25V.
J.2.5
Connection of the
CRT/MDI and the
Battery Unit
Battery unit
CRT/ MDI
SMS6PK-5
CA7
1
+
M4 screw terminal
+
NOTE
1 Connection with the battery unit is necessary only when using RAM file.
2 A cable (3.4m) is attached to the battery unit for CRT/MDI.
3 Connection with the battery unit on the CNC side is also possible. In this case, the cable should
be manufactured by the machine tool builder.
Wire gauge : 30/0.18 (0.75mm2) and over twist pair, shielding
Connector contact : Goldplated
4 The cable shielding should be shorted to the earth plate.
551
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
J.3
OUTER VIEW
J.3.1
Outer View of CRT/MDI
Unit
2M4 (Bottom)
(Mounting hole
for stand)
Air flow
D Notices of mount
Machining drawing
for mounting hole.
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
553
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
K.1
CRT/MDI SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
K.1.1
Overview
K.1.2
When Connecting Two
Control Unit with One
CRT/MDI Unit
D Block diagram
CRT/MDI
UNIT
Control unit B
CRT/MDI signal from B
Switching signal
Selected CRT/MDI signal
switchover
switch
A
D Operation
D Connection
The switching printed board is installed in the CRT/MDI unit. There are
2 kinds of printed board for use with the smallsize MDI and for use with
the full key MDI.
554
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Installation diagram
To control unit B
Connector M3
Switching circuit printed board
A20B10030890
Connector CCX5
(4)
To control unit A
Connector M3
To control unit B
Connector M3
Connector CCX5
(4)
Connector M3
NOTE
Above is color CRT.
555
To control unit A
D Connection diagram
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Switching printed
board
Electric
power
M3
K1
M3A
K2
CCXA
K3
CP51IN
CRT/MDI
panel
Control unit A
CP15
CCX5
(CCX4)
M3S
CP15
Electric
power
M3
K4
M3B
K5
CCXB
K6
SW
KM1
Control unit B
CCX5
(CCX4)
Switchover switch
(machineside operation board)
CCXS
K8
F1
CP51OUT
NOTE
1 Connect [CCX4] when using graphic card.
2 Select either
K7
or
K8
. When selecting
K7
power unit C for the electric power of the control unit connected to CP51ITN.
3 In the case of 0Mate C, be sure to select
K8
556
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Switching printed
board
Power
supply
M3
K1
M3A
K2
CCXA
K3
CP51IN
CRT/MDI
panel
Control unit A
CP15
CCX4
M3S
M3
CP15
Power
supply
K4
M3B
K5
CCXB
K6
SW
Control unit B
CCX4
Switchover switch
(machineside operation board)
CCXS
F1
CP51OUT
CN1
Input unit
CP5
CN2
K9
M4 section terminal
557
M4 screw terminal
KM1
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(1) The relationship between the switchover switch connection point and
the selected control unit is as shown below.
Open
Open
Connection
point
SW(18)
SW(19, 20)
K4
K2
K5
K3
K7
K6
K9
SMS6PN5(JAPAN FCI)
SMS3PK5(JAPAN FCI)
(4) Connet
(5) When
K3
K8
558
K3
cable.
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Application example
Switching signal
CP51IN
M3A, CCXA
M3B, CCXB
CN2
2
M3S, CCXS
M3S, CCXS
B
SW
CP51IN
M3A, CCXA
SW
CP51IN
M3A, CCXA
M3B, CCXB
M3B, CCXB
M3S, CCXS
SW
CP51IN
M3A, CCXA
Series 0
M3B, CCXB
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
NOTE
1 /2 means the 2 signal cables (MDI key signal and CRT video signal)
2 The switching signal A, B, C and D are as shown in the below.
Switching signal
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 5
C
D
No. 4
: close
: open
559
No. 5
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
K.1.3
When Connecting One
Series 0C with Two
CRT/MDI Units
D Overview
Control unit
(FS0)
CRT/MDI signal
CRT/MDI signal
Changeover
circuit
CRT/MDI signal
Changeover signal
CRT/MDI
unit
A
CRT/MDI
unit
B
B
Changeover switch on the
machine operators panel
NOTE
Order a changeover circuit for use with a small MDI unit.
D Operation
560
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
D Connection
Control unit
Power
supply
Changeover circuit
C1
M3
CCX5
C2
CRT/MDI A
M3A
C3
KM1
CCXA
C4
CN1
M3S
FS0
CP15
CCXS
(CCX4)
CN2
CP51
IN
K3
CP51
OUT
K7
CRT/MDI B
C7
Changeover switch
(on the machine
operators panel)
M3B
C5
KM1
CCXB
C6
CN1
SW
CN2
24 VDC
P3
24 VDC
P4
CAUTION
Be sure to select
P4
NOTE
1 Connect CCX4 when the graphic card is used.
2 Select either
K7
or
P4
. If
K7
561
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Control unit
Power
supply
Changeover circuit
M3
C1
CP15
CCX5
M3A
C3
KM1
CCXA
C4
CN1
M3S
FS0
C2
CRT/MDI A
CCXS
(CCX4)
CN2
M4 crimp
terminal
CP51
IN
K3
CP51
OUT
CRT/MDI B
Changeover switch
(on the machine
operators panel)
C7
M3B
C5
KM1
CCXB
C6
CN1
SW
CN2
200 VAC
P5
200 VAC
P6
M4 crimp
terminal
NOTE
Connect CCX4 when the graphic card is used.
(3) Connectors
: MR20LFH
(Honda 20pin female)
: MR20LMH
(Honda 20pin male)
562
SMS6PN5
(Japan FCI)
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Contact
Selection
Open
Close
SW(18)
SW(19, 20)
(5) Cables
The machine tool builder must prepare all the following cables.
C1
C3
C5
C2
C4
C6
C7
P3
P4
P5
P6
563
APPENDIX
564
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
D Arrangement
specification
Arrangement
specifications
CRT/MDI SWITCHER
Smallsize
A02B0098J122
CRT/MDI SWITCHER
Full key
A02B0098J123
Smallsize
A20B10030890
Full key
A20B10030891
A20B10030770
565
D Precautions
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
K7
unit B2 and C.
Electric power unit B2 :
A02B0098H012
Electric power unit C :
A02B0098H013
3) Do not use the CRT/MDI switching printed board when it is leaning
more than 30 from the vertical.
566
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
K.2
PDP/MDI SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
K.2.1
Overview
This PDP/MDI switching circuit corresponds to the switch of not only the
Plasma display but also CRT, EL and PDP display.
Following are the examples of connection and adjustment for PDP.
K.2.2
Attach the switching circuit to the PDP/MDI unit. There are two kinds
of switching circuit for small MDI and fullkey MDI.
Connection
The PDP/MDI switching circuit is assembled to the back side of the MDI
unit as well as the case of CRT/MDI switching circuit.
K.2.2.1
Installation diagram
K.2.2.2
Connection diagram
24V INPUT
CP5IN
24V OUTPUT
K1
24V OUTPUT
CP5OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
K2
MDI SIGNAL
K3
VIDEO SIGNAL
INPUT A
JA1A
VIDEO SIGNAL
INPUT B
JA1B
VIDEO SIGNAL
K4
K5
VIDEO SIGNAL
OUTPUT
JA1S
SWITCHOVER
SIGNAL
SW
MDI SIGNAL
CP15
Note 1)
CONTROL
CCX5
UNIT A
M3
CCX5
CONTROL
UNIT B
M3
SWITCHOVER SWITCH
MDI SIGNAL
INPUT A
JA2A
MDI SIGNAL
INPUT B
JA2B
K6
K7
MDI SIGNAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
M3S
(Note 2)
MDI SIGNAL
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
PDP/MDI UNIT
567
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
NOTE
1 When a graphic card is used, the connector name is different. (CCX4)
2 This connection does not use the cable. Directly connect the switching circuit to MDI unit.
K.2.2.3
Diagram of cable details
(1)
K1
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
POWER UNIT
CP5IN
CP15
(AMP)
(SMS 6RN4)
(3,4)
(2)
(5,6)
(1)
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
Use two cables which are equal to or larger than 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).
Cable lenth to be 50m or shorter.
(2)
K2
K4
K7
CONTROL UNIT
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
JA1A, JA1B, JA1S
CCX5(CCX4), CN1
(PCRV20LA)
(MR20LFH)
(01)
(1)
(08)
(2)
(04)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(05)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(02)
(18)
(09)
(16)
(03)
(12)
(10)
(14)
RVDO
RVDO
0G
0G
GVDO
GVDO
0G
0G
BVDO
BVDO
0G
0G
HSYN
HSYN
0V
0V
VSYN
VSYN
0V
0V
Recommended cable
A66L00010295 (20m or less in length) smallcapacity twist pair cable (IDC)
A66L00010296 (20m or more in length) coaxial cable
or A66L00010371
A66L00010371 is best.
568
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
(3)
K3
K5
CONTROL UNIT
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
M3
JA2A, JA2B
(MR20LFH)
(PCRV20LA)
(07)
(01)
(13)
(11)
(06)
(02)
(12)
(12)
(05)
(03)
(11)
(13)
(04)
(04)
(10)
(14)
(02)
(05)
(03)
(15)
(08)
(06)
(09)
(16)
(14)
(07)
(15)
(17)
(16)
(08)
(17)
(18)
(01)
(09)
*SW00
*SW01
*SW00
*SW01
*SW02
*SW02
*SW03
*SW03
*SW04
*SW04
*SW05
*SW05
*SW06
*SW06
*SW07
*SW07
*KCM00
*KCM00
*KCM01
*KCM01
*KCM02
*KCM02
*KCM03
*KCM03
*KCM04
*KCM04
*KCM05
*KCM05
*KCM06
*KCM06
*KCM07
*KCM07
*KCM08
*KCM08
Recommended cable
A66L00010284#10P(#28AWGX10 pair)
569
K.2.3
Selection Method
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The relation between state of the contact point of the switchover switch
and selected control units is as follows.
Contact point
open
close
Contact point
SW (12)
SW (14, 16)
K.2.4
Connector Table
10
20
19
8
18
HSYN
16
0V
14
0V
12
VSYN
17
6
BVDO
GVDO
RVDO
0G
15
0G
13
0G
11
20
10
9
*KCM08
*KCM04
*KCM00
*SW04
*SW00
19
8
18 *KCM07
*KCM06
17 *KCM05
16 *KCM03
*KCM02
15 *KCM01
14 *SW07
*SW06
13 *SW05
12 *SW03
*SW02
11 *SW01
570
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
SW (PCR20P FEMALE)
10
20
19
8
18
17
6
5
4
3
2
11
+24V
0V
15
16
17
0V
14
0V
12
SELECT
13
14
16
15
*KCM04
08
*KCM02
09
*KCM03
10
*SW07
11
*SW05
12
*SW03
13
*SW01
*KCM05
*KCM06
*KCM07
18
19
20
571
01
*KCM08
02
*KCM00
03
*KCM01
04
*SW06
05
*SW04
06
*SW02
07
*SW00
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
K.2.5
Adjustment Method
FINE
POWER
UNIT
SW1 SW2
POWER
UNIT
HP1
PDP/MDI(BACK SIDE)
EL/MDI(BACK SIDE)
B) Adjustment method
a) Adjustment of flicker
1. PDP : Set switch SW1 or TM1
2. EL : Set switch FINE
Change setting. And, search for the range not generating the
flicker.
Set the switch at the center within the range when there are
several set values not generating the flicker in the screen.
b) Position setting of horizontal direction
1. PDP : Set switch SW2
2. EL : Set switch HP1
It is possible to move to the horizontal direction by every one
dot.
Please set the switch in the place where all displays can be done.
There is only oneplacebest position. You need not change
setting when shipping usually.
c) Please do not change setting not listed above and volume, etc.
(3) Select control unit B side. (switchover switch close)
(4) Turn set switch SW1 of the this switching circuit. And, search for the
range not generating the flicker.
(5) Set switch at the center within the range of setting where the flicker is
not generated.
572
B61393E/06
Example
APPENDIX
If you set and do not generate the flicker by 59, assume setting to be 7.
SW1
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
NOTE
It is not necessary to adjust when use this switching circuit
to switch CRT.
573
APPENDIX
K.2.6
External View
K.2.6.1
MDI : small
574
B61393E/06
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
K.2.6.2
MDI : full key
575
K.2.7
Order Specification
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
ORDER SPECIFICATION
ATTACHED TYPE
small
A02B0098J124
ATTACHED TYPE
full key
A02B0098J125
UNIT
small
A02B0098C194
UNIT
full key
A02B0098C195
576
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
577
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
APPENDIX
L.1
B61393E/06
OUTLINE
J71
M3
J71
Detachable CRT/MDI
CP15
Approx. 1.5 m of cable is provided.
CAUTION
Set the position of the relay connector in a location which does not require cutting liquid or
cutting power.
NOTE
When not using the CRT/MDI panel, set so as to be able to protect the relay connector with the
protective cover.
578
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
L.2
ARRANGEMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
Arrangement specifications
Remarks
A02B0098C121
A02B0098C122
A02B0099C121
A02B0099C122
L.3
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
DIAGRAM
Rear view
of unit
15
210
Honda MR connector
20P2
Cable length :
about 1.5 m
410
275
Panel color :
Weight : about 11 kg
579
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
L.4
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
M51(MR20RH)
Machine side control board
1
+24
*CM0
*CM1
*SW6
*SW4
*SW2
*SW0
Control unit
M3(MR20RMD)
1
10
11
12
13
*CM2
*CM3
*SW7
*SW5
*SW3
*SW1
14
*CM0
*CM1
*SW6
*SW4
*SW2
*SW0
10
11
12
13
*CM2
*CM3
*SW7
*SW5
*SW3
*SW1
15
*CM5
+24
16
17
18
19
20
*CM6
*CM7
*CM4
0V
0V
J71
J71
14
15
16
17
*CM4
*CM5
*CM6
*CM7
18
19
20
Detachable
CRT/MDI
panel
(CCX4)
CCX5(MR20RMD)
1
RVDO
HSNC
VSNC
GVDO
BVDO
14
10
11
12
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
15
16
17
18
13
19
J72
20
M52(MR20RFH)
CP15(SMS6PN5)
1
3
0V
4
0V
5
+24
RVDO
HSNC
VSNC
GVDO
BVDO
+24
14
10
11
12
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
15
16
17
18
13
19
20
NOTE
1 The J71 and J72 cables in the above diagram are produced by the machine manufacture.
2 Connect cable J72 to CCX4 when a graphic card is connected, and to CCX5 when there is no
graphic card.
580
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
L.5
DIAGRAM OF CABLE
DETAILS
Detachable CRT/MDI unit side
H20.M
H20.F
(01)
(01)
RVDO
RVDO
(08)
(08)
0V
0V
(02)
(02)
(09)
(09)
HSYN
HSYN
0V
0V
(03)
(03)
(10)
(10)
VSYN
VSYN
0V
0V
(04)
(04)
(11)
(11)
GVDO
GVDO
0V
0V
(05)
(05)
(12)
(12)
BVDO
BVDO
0V
0V
NOTE
For the J72 cable use a coaxial cable and set the cable length under 48 m. Recommended
cable specifications : A66L00010219 or A66L00010371 A66L00010371 is the best.
Refer to L.6 DIAGRAM OF MATERIAL DETAILS.
581
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
H20.F
(02)
H20.F
(02)
*KCM00
*KCM00
(03)
(03)
(04)
(04)
(05)
(05)
(06)
(06)
(07)
(07)
(08)
(08)
(09)
(09)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(15)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(17)
(17)
(18)
(14)
*KCM01
*KCM01
*SW06
*SW06
*SW04
*SW04
*SW02
*SW02
*SW00
*SW00
*KCM02
*KCM02
*KCM03
*KCM03
*SW07
*SW07
*SW05
*SW05
*SW03
*SW03
*SW01
*SW01
*KCM05
*KCM05
*KCM06
*KCM06
*KCM07
*KCM07
*KCM04
*KCM04
(01)
+24V
(14)
+24V
(19)
0V
(05)
(20)
0V
(06)
(03)
(04)
SMS 6PN5
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
CAUTION
For the 0V and +24V power lines. use material greater than 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) and set the cable
length under 48 m.
NOTE
For the J71 cable, with the exception of the 0V and +24V power lines, use a collective shield
cable and set the cable length under 48m.
Recommended cable specifications : A66L00010041
Refer to L.6 DIAGRAM OF MATERIAL DETAILS.
582
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
L.6
DIAGRAM OF
MATERIAL DETAILS
Details of cable material of A66L00010219
Item
Cable type
Size
Composition
External diameter (approx.)
Insulator
Shield
braiding
Material
Core
mm2
0.18
Cable/mm
mm
Thickness
mm
0.93
mm
2.40
Inner diameter
mm
Density
Jacket
unit
90
Thickness
mm
0.25
mm
2.90
Material
Vinyl
Color
thickness
mm
0.25
mm
3.40
mm
9.2
Press rolling
mm
0.25
Material
Vinyl
Color
Black
Sheath
Thickness
mm
0.5
mm
10.3
mm
11.0
/km
110
V/1 min
1000
Mkm
1000
753
nF/km
56
dB/km
46
583
Internal
conductor
Expanded
PE insulator
External
conductor
Vinyl
Separator
Vinyl sheath
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Diameter
Composition
0.55mm
7/0.18
584
Sheath
thickness
g
Finishing
outer
diameter
1.5mm
10.0mm
Electrical characteristics
Dynamic
resistance
Permissible
current
110/km
1.6A
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
585
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
M.1
OUTLINE
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The position coder switching circuit is the circuit which can freely switch
the connections between a maximum of four position coder units and a
maximum of four CNC units.
Switching is performed by giving a 2 bit switching signal indicating
which position coder is to be connected to each CNC.
Therefore, there are a total of 8 switching signals.
WARNING
The switching is performed at such times as when the
spindle stop when the CNC is not using the position coder
signal.
Otherwise, the spindle may run out of control, resulting in
injury or damage to a tool or the machine.
586
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M.2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Position coder switching circuit CPC1
+5V
J359
CPC2
Position
coder 1
M291
Switching circuit 1
M295
Spindle
motor 1
J355
M292
CNC2
Switching circuit 2
M296
J352
M27
J356
CNC3
Switching circuit 3
Position
coder 3
Spindle
motor 3
M297
M293
M27
J357
J353
CNC4
Switching circuit 4
M298
Spindle
motor 4
CNC1 CPA5
J351
Position
coder 2
Spindle
motor 2
M27
Position
M294
coder 4
J354
J358
Switching
signal
M290
J350
Magnetics
cabinet
587
M27
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M.3
CONNECTION
EXPLANATION
M.3.1
Connection Signal
Arrangement of
Position Coder
SL1A
02
SL1B
03
SL2A
04
SL2B
08
09
0V
0V
10
0V
11
0V
05
14
SL3A
15
SL3B
16
SL4A
17
SL4B
18
12
06
19
13
07
20
M295 : MRH20WRMA(CNC1)
PCI1
15
*PCI1
16
PAI1
17
*PAI1
18
PBI1
19
*PBI1
20
OREQ1
08
OHI1
09
OHB1
10
C8I1
11
C4I1
12
C2I1
13
C1I1
01
0V
02
0V
15
*PC1
03
0V
16
PA1
04
+5V
14
17
15
PCI2
+5V
18
PB1
06
+5V
19
*PB1
20
REQI1
07
*PCI2
16
PAI2
17
*PAI2
18
PBI2
19
*PBI2
20
OREQ2
08
OHI2
09
OHB2
10
C8I2
11
C4I2
12
C2I2
13
C1I2
01
0V
02
0V
PCI3
14
15
15
*PCI3
16
PAI3
17
*PAI3
18
PBI3
19
*PBI3
20
OREQ3
09
10
11
OHI3
OHB3
C8I3
C4I3
12
C2I3
13
C1I3
PC2
*PC2
03
0V
16
PA2
04
+5V
17
*PA2
05
+5V
18
PB2
06
+5V
19
*PB2
20
REQI2
07
08
08
MOHO1
09
OHB1
10
C8O1
11
C4O1
12
C2O1
13
C1O1
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
+5V
05
+5V
06
+5V
07
M296 : MRH20WRMA(CNC2)
*PA1
05
PC1
08
MOHO2
09
OHB2
10
C8O2
11
C4O2
12
C2O2
13
C1O2
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
05
06
07
M297 : MRH20WRMA(CNC3)
01
0V
02
0V
15
*PC3
03
0V
16
PA3
04
+5V
17
*PA3
05
+5V
18
PB3
06
+5V
19
*PB3
20
REQI3
14
07
588
PC3
08
09
10
MOHO3
OHB3
C8O3
11
C4O3
12
C2O3
13
C1O3
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
05
06
07
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
PCI4
15
*PCI4
16
PAI4
17
*PAI4
18
PBI4
19
*PBI4
20
OREQ4
08
OHI4
09
OHB4
10
C8I4
11
C4I4
12
C2I4
13
C1I4
M298 : MRH20WRMA(CNC4)
01
0V
02
0V
15
*PC4
03
0V
16
PA4
04
+5V
17
*PA4
05
+5V
18
PB4
06
+5V
19
*PB4
20
REQI4
14
07
PC4
08
MOHO4
09
OHB4
10
C8O4
11
C4O4
12
C2O4
13
C1O4
01
0V
02
0V
03
0V
04
05
06
07
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
589
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
M.3.2
Switching Signal
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Magnetics cabinet
RSW1
1
3 4
SEL1A
J350
3.3k
SEL1A
M290(01)
RV
+5V
CNC1
SEL1B
SEL1B
3.3k
M290(02)
RV
+5V
RSW2
1 2
3 4
SEL2A
SEL2A
3.3k
M290(03)
RV
+5V
CNC2
SEL2B
SEL2B
3.3k
M290(04)
RV
+5V
RSW3
1 2
3 4
SEL3A
SEL3A
3.3k
M290(14)
RV
+5V
3.3k
CNC3
SEL3B
SEL3B
M290(15)
RV
+5V
RSW4
1 2
3 4
SEL4A
SEL4A
3.3k
M290(16)
RV
+5V
CNC4
3.3k
SEL4B
SEL4B
M290(17)
RV
0V
0V
NOTE
Each the shield casing of the cable using the earth plate.
590
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
The relationship between the connection state and the switching signal is
shown in the table below.
CNC
CNC1
(M295)
CNC
CNC2
(M296)
CNC
CNC3
(M297)
CNC
CNC4
(M298)
Position coder
SEL1B
SEL1A
Position coder 1
(M291)
Position coder 2
(M292)
Position coder 3
(M293)
Position coder 4
(M294)
Position coder
SEL2B
SEL2A
Position coder 1
(M291)
Position coder 2
(M292)
Position coder 3
(M293)
Position coder 4
(M294)
Position coder
SEL3B
SEL3A
Position coder 1
(M291)
Position coder 2
(M292)
Position coder 3
(M293)
Position coder 4
(M294)
Position coder
SEL4B
SEL4A
Position coder 1
(M291)
Position coder 2
(M292)
Position coder 3
(M293)
Position coder 4
(M294)
: released
: abbreviation of 0V
591
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M.3.3
Connection between
Position Coder and
Switching Circuit
Position coder 1
Switching circuit
J351
PA1
M291(16)
*PA1
*PA1
M291(17)
(C)
PB1
PB1
M291(18)
(R)
*PB1
*PB1
M291(19)
(B)
PC1
PC1
M291(14)
(P)
*PC1
*PC1
M291(15)
(H)
+5V
+5V
(K)
0V
0V
(A)
PA1
(N)
NOTE
1 Also connect the position coder 24 and the switching circuits M292M294 in accordance with
the above diagram.
2 Earth the shield casing of the cable using the earth plate.
3 Refer to the precautionary note in item M.5.2 concerning the cable material for +5V and 0V.
592
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M.3.4
Connection between
Switching Circuit and
CNC
Switching circuit
CNC1
M295(16)
PA1
M295(17)
J355
PA1
M27(16)
*PA1
*PA1
M27(17)
M295(18)
PB1
PB1
M27(18)
M295(19)
*PB1
:PB1
M27(19)
M295(14)
PC1
PC1
M27(14)
M295(15)
*PC1
*PC1
M27(15)
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
NOTE
1 Also connect the position coder 24 and the switching circuit M296M298 in accordance with
the above diagram.
2 Earth the shield casing of the cable using the earth plate.
3 Refer to the precautionary note in item M.5.2 concerning the cable material for +5V and 0V.
593
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M.4
EXTERNAL VIEW
Bind screw M4 17
Spacer details same as updown screw section
Spacer
NOTE
1 The position coder switching circuit is in the form of an option printed board as shown in the
above diagram. Install in the magnetics cabinet using the spacer in the vertical direction.
2 It can be installed in the CNC master printed board and, when other option printed boards which
have vacant slots and cables do not interfere, in master printed boards.
594
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
M.5
PRECAUTION
M.5.1
Power Unit
This supplies the +5V power source from the CNC1 (M295) for the
position coder switching circuit and the position coders (14).
Therefore, specify power supply B2 or power supply C for the CNC1
power unit.
M.5.2
Cable Power Supply
Voltage Drop
The position coder switching circuit and the potions coder (14) +5V
power source are supplied from the CNC1 (295).
Select the cable material such that the voltage drop in the cables
(J351J355) in the current circulation is under 0.2V.
However, because the conditions for J355 are strict, the +5V supply cable
J359 can also be specially installed.
In this case, connect the connector CPA5 in the CNC1 power unit lower
section master printed card and the CPC1.
The following shows the calculation method for the voltage drops in the
various position coders.
VD=
595
M.5.3
Noise Countermeasure
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Cable
40 mm to 80 mm
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
596
Cable
cramp
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
597
N.1
OUTLINE
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
MDI key sheets, used with the CRT/MDI units of the Series 0C, are
available in two types: the standard type and that qualifying for CE
marking (machine directive). The two types differ in their colors and
characters. This section summarizes the differences.
NOTE
Some Series 0 models qualify for CE marking while other do
not. The use of an MDI qualifying for CE marking does not,
therefore, always guarantee that the machine tool itself will
qualify for CE marking.
N.2
CHARACTERS
598
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
N.3
The colors of those MDI key sheets that qualify for CE marking differ
from those of the standard MDI key sheets. See the table below and the
figures on the subsequent pages.
COLORS
Item
Smallsize MDI
For lathes
Reference
Standard
N1
CE marking
Englishlanguage
N2
Symbolic
N3
N4
CE marking
Fullkey MDI
For lathes
Englishlanguage
N5
Symbolic
N6
Standard
N7
CE marking
N8
Standard
N9
CE marking
Englishlanguage
N10
Symbolic
N11
N12
CE marking
Englishlanguage
N13
Symbolic
N14
Standard
N15
CE marking
N16
N17
CE marking
Englishlanguage
N18
Symbolic
N19
Standard
N20
CE marking
N21
599
APPENDIX
RESET
CURSOR
B61393E/06
7
O
8
N
9
G
ALTER
4
X
5
Z
6
F
INSRT
1
U
2
W
3
R
DELET
0
S
B
A
C
K
I
H
J
No. Q
V P
/,#
EOB
CAN
PAGE
POS
PRGRM
MENU
OFSET
INPUT
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
OUTPT
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
START
CURSOR
7
O
8
N
9
G
ALTER
4
X
5
Z
6
F
INSRT
1
U
2
W
3
R
DELET
0
S
B
A
C
K
I
H
J
No. Q
V P
/,#
EOB
CAN
PAGE
POS
PRGRM
MENU
OFSET
INPUT
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
OUTPT
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
START
600
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
7
O
8
N
9
G
4
X
5
Z
6
F
1
U
2
W
3
R
0
S
B
A
C
K
I
H
J
No. Q
V P
/,#
EOB
601
APPENDIX
RESET
CURSOR
B61393E/06
7
O
8
N
9
G
ALTER
4
X
5
Y
6
Z
INSRT
1
H
2
F
3
R
DELET
0
S
D
4TH
B
K
J
I
L
No. Q
P
POS
PRGRM
/,#
EOB
CAN
PAGE
MENU
OFSET
INPUT
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
OUTPT
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
START
Fig. N4 Standard key sheet for smallsize MDI for machining centers
CURSOR
7
O
8
N
9
G
ALTER
4
X
5
Y
6
Z
INSRT
1
H
2
F
3
R
DELET
0
S
D
4TH
B
K
J
I
L
No. Q
P
POS
PRGRM
/,#
EOB
CAN
PAGE
MENU
OFSET
INPUT
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
OUTPT
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
START
Fig. N5 Englishlanguage key sheet for smallsize MDI for machining centers
602
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
7
O
8
N
9
G
4
X
5
Y
6
Z
1
H
2
F
3
R
0
S
D
4TH
B
K
J
I
L
No. Q
P
/,#
EOB
Fig. N6 Symbolic key sheet for smallsize MDI for machining centers
603
MARK
APPENDIX
KEY TOP
B61393E/06
TEXT
RED
MANSELL
5R4/14
IVORY
DIC 946
BLUE
DIC 102
IVORY
DIC 946
GREEN
DIC 173
IVORY
DIC 946
IVORY
DIC 946
BLACK
DIC 514
604
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
MARK
KEY TOP
COOL GRAY
DIC
442
TEXT
BLACK
DIC
514
BLACK
DIC
514
WHITE
MANSELL
2.5Y 8.3/0.4
BLACK
DIC
514
605
RESET
APPENDIX
O
X
CURSOR
(
Y
M
P
#
[
N
Z
K
)
J
G
U
B
V
E
T
ALTER
INSRT
DELET
EOB
CAN
INPUT
SP
OFSET
MENU
C
H
No.
B61393E/06
L
A
PAGE
POS
SHIFT
PRGRM
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
OUTPT
MACRO
START
O
X
CURSOR
(
Y
I
M
P
#
[
N
Z
K
)
J
S
Q
=
]
G
U
B
V
E
T
ALTER
INSRT
DELET
EOB
CAN
INPUT
SP
OFSET
MENU
C
H
No.
L
A
PAGE
SHIFT
POS
PRGRM
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
MACRO
Fig. N10 Englishlanguage key sheet for fullkey MDI for lathes
606
OUTPT
START
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
O
X
(
Y
I
M
P
#
[
N
Z
K
)
J
S
Q
=
]
G
U
B
V
E
T
D
EOB
SP
C
H
No.
L
A
Fig. N11 Symbolic key sheet for fullkey MDI for lathes
607
APPENDIX
RESET
X
CURSOR
(
U
M
P
#
[
N
Y
J
S
Q
)
V
A
=
]
G
Z
D
H
B61393E/06
ALTER
4TH
INSRT
DELET
EOB
CAN
INPUT
SP
OFSET
MENU
No.
L
B
PAGE
POS
SHIFT
PRGRM
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
OUTPT
MACRO
START
Fig. N12 Standard key sheet for fullkey MDI for machining centers
O
X
CURSOR
(
U
I
M
P
#
[
N
Y
J
S
Q
)
V
A
=
]
G
Z
K
T
@
:
D
H
ALTER
4TH
INSRT
DELET
EOB
CAN
INPUT
SP
OFSET
MENU
No.
L
B
PAGE
SHIFT
POS
PRGRM
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
MACRO
OUTPT
START
Fig. N13 Englishlanguage key sheet for fullkey MDI for machining centers
608
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
O
X
(
U
I
M
P
#
[
N
Y
J
S
Q
)
V
A
=
]
G
Z
K
T
@
:
D
H
4TH
EOB
SP
No.
L
B
Fig. N14 Symbolic key sheet for fullkey MDI for machining centers
609
MARK
APPENDIX
KEY TOP
TEXT
RED
MANSELL
5R4/14
IVORY
DIC 946
BLUE
DIC 102
IVORY
DIC 946
GREEN
DIC 173
IVORY
DIC 946
IVORY
DIC 946
BLACK
DIC 514
610
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
MARK
KEY TOP
COOL GRAY
DIC
442
TEXT
BLACK
DIC
514
BLACK
DIC
514
WHITE
MANSELL
2.5Y 8.3/0.4
BLACK
DIC
514
611
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
OUTPT
SHIFT
START
O
X
(
U
I
M
P
N
Y
)
V
K
T
@
:
4TH
F
No.
D
H
EOB
ALTER
INSRT
DELET
INPUT
POS
PRGRM
OFSET
MENU
SP
CURSOR
PAGE
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
CAN
MACRO
612
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
OUTPT
SHIFT
START
O
X
(
U
I
M
P
N
Y
)
V
K
T
@
:
4TH
F
No.
D
H
EOB
ALTER
INSRT
DELET
INPUT
POS
PRGRM
OFSET
MENU
SP
CURSOR
PAGE
DGNOS
OPR
AUX
PARAM
ALARM
GRAPH
CAN
MACRO
613
APPENDIX
O
X
(
U
I
M
P
#
[
N
Y
)
V
B61393E/06
G
Z
K
T
@
:
4TH
F
No.
D
H
EOB
SP
614
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
MARK
KEY TOP
TEXT
RED
MANSELL
5R4/14
IVORY
DIC 946
BLUE
DIC 102
IVORY
DIC 946
GREEN
DIC 173
IVORY
DIC 946
IVORY
DIC 946
BLACK
DIC 514
615
APPENDIX
MARK
B61393E/06
KEY TOP
TEXT
COOL GRAY
DIC
442
BLACK
DIC
514
WARM GRAY
DIC
518
BLACK
DIC
514
WHITE
MANSELL
2.5Y 8.3/0.4
BLACK
DIC
514
Fig. N21 Color scheme for MDI for 14 CRT (CE marking)
616
B61393E/06
APPENDIX
O. INSTALLING CRT
PROTECTION COVERS
617
O. INSTALLING CRT
PROTECTION COVERS
APPENDIX
B61393E/06
Bottom cover
Insert under the bracket.
618
Index
B61393E/06
Symbols
ASR33, 148
Connector, 305
Characters, 598
Colors, 599
Configuration, 4, 372
Control unit, 33
i1
INDEX
B61393EN/06
Descriptions on signals, 83
Dimensions, 465
Interface, 404
Grounding, 535
i2
INDEX
B61393E/06
Precaution, 595
Precautions, 42
Restrictions, 244
Noise suppressor, 29
Operation, 361
Power source, 56
i3
INDEX
B61393EN/06
When connecting two control unit with one CRT/MDI unit, 554
i4
Sep., 91
Nov., 89
Oct., 88
Date
03
02
01
Edition
APPENDIX 16
APPENDIX 17
APPENDIX 18
APPENDIX 19
Contents
ANALOG INTERFACE
Edition
04
Date
Feb., 92
APPENDIX 15
APPENDIX 14
APPENDIX 21
APPENDIX 22
APPENDIX 23
APPENDIX 24
S
S
S
APPENDIX 20
Contents
DNC1 CONNECTION
S
S
Additional I/OB3
S
S
APPENDIX 13
S
Series 0C DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
Addition
CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT
APPENDIX 12
Jul., 97
Series 0D/0DII
Correction of errors
05
Sep., 98
Addition
06
Addition
Revision Record